中财网三环唑使用方法:高考专题复习讲与练(语法)
来源：百度文库 编辑：中财网 时间：2024/05/05 07:26:59
名词
一、考点聚焦
1.可数名词单、复数变化形式
（1）规则变化。
①单数名词词尾直接加-s。如：boy — boys, pen — pens。
②以s、x 、ch 、sh结尾的单词一般加-es。如：glass — glasses,box— boxes, watch — watches, brush — brushes。
特例：stomach — stomaches。
③以“辅音字母 + y”结尾的变“y”为“i”再加“-es”。如：
baby — babies, lady — ladies, fly — flies。
④以“o”结尾的多数加-es。如：tomato — tomatoes, potato — potatoes, hero — heroes。但以两个元音字母结尾的名词和部分外来词中以o结尾的词只加-s。 如：radio — radios, zoo — zoos, photo — photos, piano — pianos, kilo — kilos, tobacco — tobaccos。
⑤以“f”或“fe”结尾的名词复数形式变“f”或“fe”为“v”，之后再加-es。如：wife — wives, life — lives, knife — knives, wolf— wolves, self — selves, leaf — leaves等。特例：handkerchief— handkerchiefs, roof — roofs, chief — chiefs, gulf — gulfs, belief — beliefs, cliff — cliffs。
⑥改变元音字母的。如：man — men, mouse — mice, foot — feet,
woman — women, tooth — teeth, goose — geese, ox — oxen。特例：child — children。 ⑦复合名词的复数形式。（A）在复合词中最后名词尾加-s。如：armchair — armchairs, bookcase — bookcases, bookstore — book-
stores。（B）man和woman作定语修饰另一个名词时，前后两个名词都要变成复数。如：man doctor — men doctors, woman driver — women dri-
vers。（C）与介词或副词一起构成的复合名词应在主体名词部分加-s。如：brother-in-law — brothers-in-law, passer-by — passers-by。
⑧有的名词有两种复数形式。如：zero — zeros 、zeroes, deer —
deers 、deer。penny的两种复数形式含义有所不同。如：pence（便士的钱数），pennies(便士的枚数)。
（2）不规则变化。
①单、复数同形。如：means, aircraft, deer, fish, Chinese,
Japanese, sheep, works（工厂）,cattle。
②合成名词的复数。如：boy-friend — boy-friends, go-between— go-betweens(中间人)，grown-up — grown-ups。
③有些名词通常只用作复数。如：glasses眼镜，clothes衣服，goods
货物，trousers裤子，belongings所有物,wages工资，riches财富, surroundings环境，ashes灰尘, campasses圆规，cattle家畜，congratulations祝贺，have words with sb. 同某人吵架，in high spirits以很高热情地，give one’s regards to sb.向某人问侯，in rags衣衫破烂，It is good manners to do sth.有礼貌做某事。
④集体名词的数。有些集体名词通常只用作复数，如：people,
cattle, police; 有些名词只用作单数，如：machinery, furniture, mankind, jewellery;有些名词既可用作单数又可用作复数，单数看做整体，复数看做集体的各个成员。如：The crew is large.船员人数很多（指整体）；The crew are all tired.船员们都累坏了（个体）。
2、不可数名词的数
（1）一般说来抽象名词为不可数名词，但当抽象名词表示具体的东西时，可用作可数名词且词义发生变化，主要类型如下：
①抽象名词表示具有某种特性、状态、感情情绪的人或事。如：
抽象名词（不可数） 具体化（个体名词，可数名词）
in surprise惊讶地 a surprise一件令人惊讶的事
win success获得成功 a success一个(件)成功的人(事)
win honor赢得荣誉 an honor一个(件)引以为荣的(事)
Failure(失败)is the mother of success a failure失败者
失败是成功之母。
by experience靠经验 an experience一次经历
youth青春 a youth一个青年人
have pity on sb.怜悯某人 a pity可惜的事情
with pleasure乐意 a pleasure乐事
②抽象名词与a(an)连用，淡化了抽象概念，转化为似乎可以体验到的动作、行为或类别。如： A knowledge of English is a must in international trade.
Would you like to have a walk(swim, bath, talk)with me?
It is waste of time reading such a novel.
She made an apology to her mother for her wrong doings.
(2)物质名词是不可数名词，但表示数量或种类之多时，可以用作可数名词。如：
①物质名词有形或数的相应物体，有单、复数。如：some coffee一些咖啡，a coffee一杯咖啡，three coffees三杯咖啡，some drink一些饮料, a drink一杯饮料，three drinks三杯饮料，his hair他的头发，a few grey hairs几根白发，glass玻璃，a glass一只玻璃杯。
②物质名词有前置后置修饰时，前面要使用不定冠词。
have breakfast The road is covered with snow.
have a wonderful breakfast They have a heavy snow every year.
Time and tide wait for no man.
We had a wonderful time last night.
(3)有复数形式的不可数名词
①有些抽象名词往往以复数形式出现，起到一种丰富语言感情色彩或强调某种特殊状态的作用。如：
Use your brains, please.
They have smoothed away the difficulties.
Have you made preparations for tomorrow’s meeting?
Many thanks for your kindness.
No pains, no gains.
After many failures, they finally succeeded.
②有些物质名词以复数形式出现，表示数量之多，范围之广。如：
The boy burst into tears at the bad news.
The rising waters did a lot of harm to the crops.
The stone bridge broke down in heavy rains.
3.名词所有格
（1）“’s”所有格的特殊表示形式有：
① 用于表示时间、距离、价格、重量等的名词后，如：today’s
newspaper,five minutes’walk(drive),five pounds’weight, tend
ollars’worth of coffee。
②用于表示国家、世界、城市等地方的名词后。如：the earth’s planet, the word’s population, China’s industry, New York’s parks。
（2）“of”所有格的特殊表示方式有：
①表示“部分”时，一般在所修饰的名词前有一个表示数量的词（a、two、several、some、no、many等），如：Some students of Mister Zhang’s have gone to college.张老师的一些学生已经上大学了。
②表示“其中之一，其中一部分”的意思时，用：a friend of Tom’s
汤姆的一个朋友（许多朋友中的一位）。
③表示赞扬、批评或厌恶等感情色彩时，应该用：that/this/these/
those + 名词（单、复数）of Mary’s/yours/his/hers。如：
That invention of hers belongs to the world. 她的那项发明是属于全世界的（表赞赏）。
4、名词作定语
英语中有些名词没有其对应的同根形容词，这些名词可以直接用来作定语修饰另一个名词。
（1）分类意义。
air pollution 空气污染 boy friend 男朋友
coffee cup咖啡杯 income tax所得税
tennis ball网球 song writer歌曲作家
body language身体语言 road accident交通事故
Nobel Prize诺贝尔奖
（2）时间、地点、称呼等。
Doctor Jack杰克医生 Professor Li李教授
evening school夜校 winter sleep冬眠
street dance 街舞 country music乡村音乐
village people村民 school education学校教育
China problem中国问题
（3）表目的、手段、来源，所属意义。
reception desk接待台 sports field田径场
stone table石桌 color TV彩电
weather report天气预报
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. It is generally believed that teaching is ___________it is a science.
(NMET 2001)
A.an art much as B.much an art as
C.as an art much as D.as much an art as
解析：答案为D。当名词前有what、so、as、too、quite等词修饰时，其形容词被这些词修饰，组成下列结构，如：What a nice book! This is too heavy a box for me to carry. He is not as honest a boy as Mike.等，应采取too/how + 形容词（副词）+ a(an) + 名词的形式。要记住一些类似的特殊结构，并加以分析。2. The police are offering a __________to anyone who can give information about the lost key.（NMET 1999）
A.price B.prize C.reward D.money
解析：答案为C。price 价格，价钱；prize奖金。Ｄ项是钱，属不可数名词，题中所要填的是“酬金，报酬”。注意正确理解名词的含义及其搭配是活用语言的基础，在复习备考中要熟练掌握考纲中一些名词的词义、搭配、习惯等，才能更好辨析名词，从而选择最符合句意的选项。
3.You’ll find this map of great _____________in helping you to get round London.（NMET 1998）
A.price B.cost C.value D.usefulness
解析：答案为C。本题考查特定语境中名词的词义及“be of + 抽象名词”结构。Price (价格)，cost（价钱，费用，成本）不符合题意，value作“quality of being useful or desirable”解时，常与of搭配，在句中作表语或补语，意为“有用，有价值”。故选择value。注意名词词义辨异及惯用法表达，题中“of + 抽象名词”相当于该名词的形容词形式。
冠词
一、考点聚焦
1.不用冠词的情况
（1）专有名词、物质名词、抽象名词、人名、地名等名词前，一般不加冠词。
China , America, Smith
Air is matter.
（2）可数名词前有物主代词、指示代词、名词所有格等限制时，不加冠词。
This dictionary is mine.
（3）季节、月份、星期、节日、假日、一日三餐名称前一般不加冠词。
March, May Day, National Day, Children’s Day, Women’s Day
Have you had supper?
Spring is the best season of the year.
（4）称呼语或指家用雇用的nurse、cook等名词前及表示头衔职务的名词作宾语、补语及同位语时，一般不加冠词。
What’s this, Father? We made him our chairman.
Ask nurse to put the child to bed. Professor Li.
（5）学科名称、球类、棋类名称前不加冠词。
Do you study physics?
He likes playing football/chess.
（6）复数名词表示泛指一类人或事物时前不用冠词。
They are peasants/ workers.
（7）在与by连用的交通工具名称前不加冠词。
by car, by bus,by bike, by train, by air/ water/ land
但：take a bus, come in a boat, on the train/ bus需注意。
（8）某些固定词组中不用冠词。
①名词词组中：
husband and wife, brother and sister, body and soul, day and night, knife and fork
②介词词组中：
to(at, from) school, in (to)class, in (to,at, from)university（college）,to（in, into, from）church, to(in,into, out of)prison(hospital, bed), to(at, from, out of)work, to(in, from) town,at (from)home, to(at)sea, at night(noon, midnight), by car (bus, bicycle, plane), on foot
注意：在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。
in hospital 住院（因病）
in the hospital在医院（工作、参观等）
in front of在前面，指某物体之外
in the front of在前部，指某物之内
in charge负责，主管 out of question没问题
in the charge由……负责 out of the question不可能
（9）as引导的让步状语从句中，作表语的名词不带冠词。
Child as she is, she knows a lot of French.
（10）系动词turn（作“变成”解）后作表语的单数可数名词前习惯不用冠词。
The young girl has turned writer.
= The young girl has become a writer.
（11）在单数名词 + after + 同一单数名词（表示“一个接一个”）结构中，单数可数名词前不加冠词。
She did experiment after experiment.
类似的还有：shop after shop, mistake after mistake
（12）形容词的最高级前、序数词前也有不用定冠词的情况。
①“most + 形容词原级”作“十分、非常、极”解时，前面不用定冠词。
Oh, it’s most beautiful.
②当两个形容词最高级并列修饰同一个名词时，第二个形容词前通常不用定冠词。
She is the tallest and fattest girl in our school.
③当形容词最高级作表语，不表示与其他人或物相比时，其前不用定冠词。
The market in the country is busiest in winter.
④形容词最高级前有名词所有格或物主代词时，不能用定冠词。
A wolf in a sheep’s skin is our most dangerous enemy.
⑤序数词前面一般加定冠词表示“第……”之意，但在second、third等词前加不定冠词表示“又一，再一”之意。
…why you took a second arrow
注意：下句中“a first”表示“第一名、冠军”。
He is a top student in our class, he often gets a first in maths.
（13）no与such连用时应放在such之前，such后面的名词不用冠词。
No such thing has ever happened in this village.
（14）never、ever置于作主语的名词前，这些名词前不用冠词。
Never did student study so hard.这个学生从未学得这么认真。
（15）有时为了节省空间、时间、金钱和精力，或为了引起注意力，省去a(n)或the,这主要用于新闻标题、工商业文件、广告、电报、公告、提纲、书名等。
Conference opens.会议召开了。
2.定冠词的使用情况
（1）使用定冠词的一般情况。
①特指或第二次提到。
②序数词前、最高级前、独一无二的东西前。
③用于表示发明物的单数名词前或某些专有名词前。
（2）定冠词使用特殊的场合。
① He hit him in the face.
beat sb. on the nose, take sb. by the arm, pat sb. on the head② the rich, the poor, the wounded 富人，穷人，伤员
③ the elder of the two, he more beautiful of the two两者中较年长的一位，较漂亮的一个
④ The sooner, the better.越快越好。
⑤ He got paid by the hour.他是按小时付工钱的。
by the yard/the dozen/the month/the year…
但：by weight按重量
⑥ in the 50s /in the 1870s（表示年代）
⑦ the Smiths/the Whites（表示一家人或夫妇俩）
⑧ in the water/field/light/shade/distance/middle/country/
rain
⑨ tell the truth/on the other hand/on the way home
⑩ 当抽象名词表示某一特定内容，特别是当它有一限定性修饰语时，
它与定冠词连用：
She is fond of music.
He is playing the music written by Beethoven.
Good advice is beyond price.
I’m sorry not to have taken the advice he gave.
3.不定冠词常用的几种情况
（1）表示“一”相当于“one”。I’ll return in a day or two.
（2）表示“每”相当于“per”。We have three meals a day.
（3）表示“同一性”相当于“the same”。The children are of an age.
（4）表示类指，表示“某类”。He wants to he a doctor.
（5）表示泛指，相当于“any”。A horse is a useful animal.
（6）表示某一个，相当于“a certain”。A Mr. Smith is asking to see you.
（7）与抽象名词连用，可以表示“一场、一次、一件”，如：a pleasure一件乐事，a surprise一件令人惊讶的事，a joy一件高兴的事，a pity一件遗憾的事，an honour一个（件）经以为荣的人(事)。
（8）与物质名词连用，表示“一种，一阵、一份”。
What a heavy rain!
What a good supper!
Please give me a black coffee!
4.冠词表类别的常见方式
（1）定冠词 + 单数可数名词，表示一个，代表一类。
The computer was invented in 1945.
The TV set was invented by Joan Baird.
The horse is a useful animal.
（2）不定冠词 + 单数可数名词（表示任意一个，某一个）。
A pen is a tool for writing.
A square has four sides.
A horse is a useful animal.
注意：man, woman表示泛指时，不用冠词，且常用单数。如：
Man is fighting a battle against pollution.
Man tries to be the protector of woman.
（3）可数名词或不可数名词，指类别（考虑到同类中的各个情况）。
Horses are useful animals.
Rice is a kind of food.
5.冠词位置问题
（1）不定冠词 + 副词 + 形容词 + 名词。
This is a very interesting story.
（2）such、what、both、all、quite、rather +不定冠词+形容词+名词。
I’ve never seen such a film!
Half a pound of pork,please!
What a good idea it is!
（3）as、so、too、how、however、enough+形容词+不定冠词+名词。
It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent.
I can’t finish the task in so short a time.
This seems not too long a distance.
We wonder how difficult a problem he worked out.
However low te price you paid,you waste your money.
He is brave enough a hunter to kill the bear.
（4）定冠词位置。
①half、twice、three times + the + 名词
He paid twice the price for it.
Their house is three times the size of yours.
②all、both、double + the + 名词
Both the blind men were mistaken.
All the students in our class are eager to know the secret.
I offered him double the amount, but he still refused.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.The warmth of ____________sweater will of course be determined by the sort of ___________wool used.（NMET 2001）
A．The ; the B．the ; / C．/; the D．/; /
解析：答案为B。第一空格为特指，交待the warmth的内容，第二空格为泛指，the sort of wool used所用羊毛的种类。此题有三点需注意：①正确理解sweater 这一句词在句中的类别。②掌握determine在句中作“决定”、“取决于”这个意思。③掌握定冠词表特指的基本用法。
2.Most animals have little connection with_________animals of___________different kind unless they kill them for food.（NMET 2000）
A．the … a B．/ … a C．the … the D．/ … the
解析：答案为B。名词复数表类别，其前不用冠词，故第一个空格不填冠词，表不定概念的“一种”，“某种”要用不定冠词a。要准确掌握冠词表类别的三种表达方式和不定冠词常用的几种情况，见前面要点考点聚
焦内容。
3.Paper money was in___________use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in __________thirteenth century.（NMET1999）
A．the … / B．the … the C．/ … the D．/ … /
解析：答案为C。题中in use是固定搭配，意为“在使用”，use为抽象名词，其前不用冠词。后者是序数词前用定冠词the。要牢记一些固定搭配如in use、under construction（在建设中）、in debt（欠债）、come to power（执政）、on fire（着火）、at table（用餐）、out of work（失业）等。
（一）名词
1．To the sea captain’s surprise，he found that travel could also be quite pieasant．
A．earth B．1and C．ground D．plain
2．Some famous singers live on the from their record sales．
A．salary B．value C．bill D．income
3．Many countries are increasing their use of nature gas，wind and other forms of ．
A．energy B．source C．power D．material
4．You can take as many as you like because they are free of ．
A．fare B．charge C．money D．pay
5．George always wants things done quickly．He’s got to .
A．idea B．means C．patience D．decision
6．Do you know the of the saying I just quoted?
A．source B．resource C．course D．cause
7．—Why did you refuse to move in the house?
—Because it was really in a poor and dirty ．
A．form B．kind C．shape D．state
8．His name was on the of my tongue，but I just couldn’t remember it．
A．end B．edge C．tip D．side
9．You shouldn’t let children play with ．It’s dangerous!
A．football B．watches C．matches D．chess
10．We’ll have PE this afternoon but I forgot to bring my .
A．sports clothes B．sport clothes C．clothes of sports D．sport’s clothes
11．Dark clouds are a of rain while a smile is a of friendship
A．gesture；sign B.mark；sign C.sign；gesture D.sign；mark
12．—Is the house very expensive，Dick?
—I don’t think it’s worth the they are asking．
A．price B．cost C．value D．money
13．These days I hire two in my house．
A．man servants B．men servant C．man servant D．men servants
14．The editor to1d the newsman to write report．
A．a two-thousand-words B．a two-thousands-words
C．a two thousand Word D．a two-thousand-word
15．The brook lies within of the train station．
A．ten-minute-ride B．ten minutes ride
C．ten minute’s ride D．ten minutes’ride
16．Though I spoke to him many times，he never took any of what I said．
A．remark B．observation C．attention D．notice
17． came that his should be kept secret．
A．A word；words B．The word；word C．Word：words D．Words；Word
18．We’ve missed the last bus．I’m aftaid we have no but to take a taxi．
A．way B．choice C．possibility D．selection
19．—How was your recent Visit to Qingdao?
—It was great．We visited some friends，and spent the days at the seaside．
A．few 1ast sunny B．1ast few sunny C．few sunny list D．1ast sunny few
20．We climbed higher up the mountain so that We could get a better ．
A．view B．idea C．point D．opinion
21．We have worked out a plan．But I’m not sure whether it will do in ．
A．fact B．practice C．deed D．time
22．—I’ve got an“A”in the examination．
——T11at’s a good .You’ll surely win a sec-ond．
A．result B．start C．news D．idea
23．The makes me feel sick．
A．sign B．sight C．scene D．look
24．— What a pleasant these trees give us!
——Why not stop here and have a rest in it?
A．shade B．shadow C．peace D．scene
25．They can never make good nurses，not having the necessary .
A．practice B．education C．exercise D．training
26．Mr Tong couldn’t keep pace with the others as they
marched along．He often stood out of ．
A．order B．sight C．mind D．line
27．I’m afraid that there is no for you in my car,because there are already five people．
A．place B．room C．need D．position
28． it is to go swimming on sueh a hot day!
A．What fun B．How fun C．What a fun D．How a fun
29．—Heavy trucks which run day and night are doing damage to our houses and shops of historical
A．scene B．period C．interest D．sense
30．The dress is nice but she doesn’t like the on the material．
A．sharp B．size C．model D．pattern
31．It is foolish to go to the of taking music lessons if you never practice．
A．expense B．sense C．pay D．money
32．For twenty years Gandhi p1ayed an important in working for equal rights fbr Indians．
A．action B．ro1e C．figure D．position
33．Last night the president made a speech on TV to the .
A.country B.state C.1and D.nation
34．The old house belongs to ．
A．Jack’s and his brother B．Jack’s and his brother’s
C．Jack and his brother’s D．Jack and his brother
35． will make a trip to China during the summer holidays．
A．The Evens B．The Even’s C．The Evenses D．The Evenses'
36．I’d like you to meet David’a cowboy．
A．dark，handsome and tall B．tall，handsome and dark
C．dark，tall and handsome D．tall，dark and handsome
37.The young student is as a writer．It’s to all his teachers．
A．success；surprise B．a success；sorprise
C．success；a surprise D．a success；a surprise
38.My mother’s is getting grey，but my father has only a few grey ．
A．hairs；hair B．hair：hair C．hair；hairs D．hair：hairs
39. unicle is going to pick them up at the airport this afternoon．
A．Jack’s and Joan’s B．Jack’s and Joan
C．Jack and Joan’s D．Jack and Joan
40.Many old houses are being pulled down to make for the apartment buildings．
A．room B．ground C．space D．area
41.Enough of it! Nobody here thinks what you are say ing hould make any ．
A．excuse B．sense C．use D．value
名词
1-5 BDABC 6-10 ADCCA 11-15 CADDD 16-20 DCBBA 21-25 BABAD 26-30 DBAC
31-35 ABDDC 36-40 DDCCA 41 B
冠词与数词
1．He has great interest in history，especially in history of Tang Dynasty．
A．a；the B．a；不填 C．不填；the D．不填；a
2．The party last night was success．we sang and danced until it came to end at twelve．
A．a；the B．the；an C．a；an D．不填；an
3．While Jane was cooking fish on open fire outside，her hair caught． fire．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．an；a D．an；不填
4．Young as he is，David has gained rich experience in society．
A．不填；不填 B．the；the C．a；不填 D．不填；the
5．People regard the wheel as invention of the
first importance in human history．
A．an；the B．an；不填 C．the；the D．the；不填
6．Mr Stock，who is in Mexico on ，runs small business．
A．business；a B．business；不填 C．the business；a D．business；不填
7．Fortunately he will go on holiday in place of Brown．
A．不填；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．the；不填
8．Zhang Hua is a student at ．
A．the University of Beijing B．the Beijing University
C．Beijing University D．University of Beijing
9．Many people are still in habit of writing silly things in public places．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．不填；the
10．Wouldn’t it be wonderful world if all nations
lived in peace with one another?
A．a；不填 B．the；不填 C．a；the D．the；the
11．Your uncle must have X- ray examination．
A．a B．不填 C．the D．an
12．I remember he lives in south，so we shouldn’t be walking to west．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；the D．the；不填
13．Where is ?
A．the manager office B．the office of the manager
C．the manager’s office D．the office of the manager’s
14．Five years ago her brother was university student of physics．
A．an；the B．a；不填 C．an；不填 D．a；the
15．—Do you know who invented telephone?
—No，but it is really most useful invention．
A．the；the B．a；a C．the；a D．a；the
16．Summers in south of France are for most part dry and sunny．
A．不填；a B．the；不填 C．不填；不填 D．the；the
17．The police have power to arrest bad people by 1aw．
A．the；the B．不填；the C．不填；不填 D．the；不填
18．—Do you like the novels?
—I don’t like either of them．Please show me third one．
A．a B．the C．不填 D．an
19．Keep away from the cage. lion is fierce animal．
A．The；the B．A；the C．A；不填 D．a；不填
20．Now the machine runs at double .
A．a speed B．speed C．the speed D．for speed
21．My mother is usually on duty in her office every few days．
A．the；a B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．a；不填
22．My brother likes to play football while my sister prefers to play violin．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．the；the
23．I came by sea and I had a 1ovely journey on Queen Elizabeth II．
A．不填；the B．the；不填 C．不填：不填 D．the；the
24．Cleaning women in big cities usually get paid
A．by a hour B．by an hour C．by the hour D．by hours
25．—I’m afraid I dare not speak in public．
—Just have try．
A．a；不填 B．不填；a C．the；a D．the；the
26．—What’s your elder sister?
—She is teacher and writer．
A．the；the B．a；不填 C．a；a D．the；a
27．She plays violin fairly well and makes a living by teaching violin．
A．the；不填 B．不填；不填 C．a；不填 D．a；a
28．These two rooms are of size．But another two rooms are three times size of them．
A．the；the B．a；the C．a；a D．the；a
29．He served in the army in when he was in
A．1940’s；his twenties B．the 1940s；the twenties
C．1940s’；his twenties D．the 1940’s；his twenties
30．This computer centre is larger than that one in the area．
A．one sixth B．four ninths C．fifth four D．two third
31．Paper produced every year is the world’s production of vehicles．
A．the three times weight of B．three times the weight of
C．as three tirues heavy D．three times as heavier as
32．The hero of the story is an artist in his ．
A．thirtieth B．thirty C．thirty’s D．thirties
33．Mr Smith me to buy several eggs for the dinner．
A．asked；dozen B．suggested；dozens of
C．had；dozen D．persuaded；dozens
34．—Tell me where you live，please．
—I live ．
A．in 123，King Street B．at 123，King Street
C．in King Street，123 D．at King Street，123
35．30％ of the cattle thin，but the rest fat．
A．are；are B．is；is C．is；are D．are；is
冠词与数词
1-5 ACDAB 6-10 ABCCA 11-15 DDCBC 16-20 DDADC 21-25 BAACB 26-30 BABDA
31-35 BDABA
一、考点聚焦
1、it的基本用法
（1）用作人称代词，代替前文提到过的事物。
The train has arrived. It arrived half an hour ago.
（2）用以代替提示代词this, that。
—What’s this? —It’s a knife.
—Whose watch is that? —It’s mine.
（3）起指示代词的作用，指一个人或事物。
—Who is knocking at the door? —It’s me.
（4）指环境情况等。
It was very noisy (quiet) at the very moment.
（5）指时间、季节等。
—What time is it? —It’s eight o’clock.
It often rains in summer here.
（6）指距离。
It is a long way to the school.
（7）作形式主语。
It is not easy to finish the work in two days.
It is no use crying over spilt milk.
It is as pity that you didn’t read the book.
（8）作形式宾语。
I think it no use arguing with him.
I found it very interesting to study English.
He made it clear that he was not interested in that subject.
（9）用于强调结构。
It was Xiaoming whom(that)I met in the street last night.
It was in the street that I met Xiaoming last night.
It ws last night that I met Xiaoming in the street.
It was I who met Xiaoming in the street last night.
2、含有“It is …”的句型
（1）It is time (for sb.) to do sth.
It is (high) time that sb. did sth.(虚拟语气)
（2）It is + 形容词（+of / for sb.）+ to do sth.
通常用 of的词有brave、clever、careful、hopeless、kind、good、naughty、nice、silly、stupid、foolish、wise等。
（3）It is + 形容词 + that + sb. + (should) do sth.（虚拟语气）
能用于这个句型的形容词有strange、wonderful、natural、good、proper、right、wrong、well、fortunate、important、necessary、useless、likely、probable、impossible等。有时可省去should而直接用动词原形。如：
It is important that we should pay close attention to grain.
It is natural that he（should）say so.
（4）It is no use/ good + doing sth.
It is no use trying again = It is of no use to try again.
（5）It is + 被强调部分 + that/who + …
Was it in the street that you met her?
Who was it that called him“comrade”?
It was not until yesterday that I met my old friend.
It is in a small factory that my brother is going to work.（注意上述各句均为强调句型的“考点”）
比较：It is a small factory where my brother is going to work.（定语从句）
（6）It is said/reported/announced/ (well) known … that…
（7）It is/was + 时间 + since … 从……已多久了。
It is three years since I met him in Beijing.
It was a long time since I (had) lived in that small mountain village with these farmers.（注意两句中的时态）
It is five months since I arrived in New York.我到纽约已经五个月了。
It is five months since I was in New York.我离开纽约已经五个月了。
（注意：终止性动词表示从动作发生时算起；如果是状态动词或持续性动词，则从动作或状态结束时算起。）
（8）It is + 时间 + before …
这个句型和上面句型中时间都是时间段，如long、years、months、weeks、five days、three hours、twenty minutes等。不过主句的时态多用一般将来时或一般过去时。
It will be several years before we meet again.
我们要过好几年才能再见面。
It was not long before they set out for the front.不久他们就出发去了前线。
（9）It is /was/will be the first/second/third … time that …
It is the first time that I have been here.
It was the second time that he had seen the film.
（10）It is up to sb. to do sth … 应由某人做某事。
It is up to you to decide whether we start or not.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. _________ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.(NMET 1995)
A.There B.This C.That D.It
解析：答案为D。本题考查作形式主语的用法。that引导的从句是真正的主语。为避免头重脚轻而平衡句子结构，将it置于句首作形式主语。
2. I hope there are enough glasse for each guest to have ________.(NMET 1995)
A.it B.those C.them D.one
解析：答案为D。本题考查替代词it和one的区别。it用于替代同类的、特定的、同一的事物；one替代同类的、泛指的人或物。根据题意“我希望有足够的杯子使每个客人有一个。”可知应用one泛指enough glasses中的一个。
3. Was __________ that I saw last night at the concert?
A.it you B.not you C.you D.that yourself
解析：答案为A。本题考查强调句型的疑问式。只须将句序变为陈述句便不难得出答案。
三、常见用法有以下几类：
1、it可用于代替上文中提到的那一个事物。
2、it可用于代替上文中说到的一件事。
3、it可用于代替不知情的人（尤其是不知身份、性别和姓名的人）。
4、it可用于表示时间、天气、距离、计算结果等。
5、it可用于代替不定式、动名词、从句等，充当形式主语。其常用句型为： It---be---adj./ n. / v-ed---to+V/ V-ing/ Clause
6、it 可用于代替不定式、动名词、从句，充当形式宾语，把真正宾语（不定式、动名词、名词或从句）置于句末。其常用句型为： S---Vt---it---adj./ n.---to+V / V-ing /n./ Clause
7、 it可用于构成强调句，把一个句子中除谓语以外的句子成分（如主语、宾语、表语、状语等）提到句首加以强调。其构成形式是：It is(was) + 被强调成分（不能改变被强调成分的数和格）+ that/ who+原句剩余部分
8、it常用于一些固定结构中，作无人称代词用，充当主语等。
it用法专题练习1：
1---What’s this? ---_______ a map of China
A.This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
2---Where is my pen? ---_____on the desk.
A.This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
3I was disappointed with the film. I had expected_____to be much better.
A.it B.this C.them D.one
4They often help us with our research. ______kind of them.
A.They are B.You are C.It is D.This is
5Tom’s mother kept telling him to work harder, but______didn’t help.
A.he B.she C.this D.it
6John passed the exam successfully and _____was more than we had expected.
A.he B.it C.this D.there
7---Who’s knocking at the door? ---_____ me.
A.It’s B.I’m C.That’s D.This is
8---Who’s the baby in the photo? ---_____ my brother.
A. This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
9_____ Sunday today. Let’s go for an outing.
A.There is B.It’s C.This is D.That’s
10_____ was raining heavily when the film was over.
A.Weather B.Sky C.It D.There
11______a long way from my home to the school.
A.It is B.This is C.There is D.There has been
12---What’s ten added to six? ---______ sixteen.
A.There is B.It is C.This is D.We have
13_____ important to learn English well.
A.This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
14_______ great fun to play basketball after school.A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
15______ no use asking them for help.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
16_______a waste of money smoking a lot.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
17_____strange that he should say such words to you.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
18_____ said that only three people could understand Einstein at that time.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
19Einstein found _____ hard to get along with the other boys at school.
A.its B.it’s C.it D./
20They feel _____ a pity that they should miss the wonderful film.
A.its B.this C.it D./
21The dusty air makes _____ difficult to get a clear picture.
A.its B.it’s C.it D./
22I find _____no need going to town without any money on me.
A.its B.this C.it D./
23He thinks _____a duty to work for the people.
A.its B.this is C.it D./
24We feel _____a pity _____ we (should) miss the chance of going to the party.
A.its,that B.this,that C.it,that D.that,that
25____ was not until he got to the office _____ he remembered leaving the key home.
A.It,it B.It,that C.It,when D.That,when
26________ am ready to help you out of the danger.
A.It is I who B.it is me who C.It is me that D.This is me that
27_____English_____I will try to learn well.
A.It is,that B.This is,that C.That,which D.There is,which
28---I’m afraid I can’t do the job as you told me to. ---_______matter.
A.You don’t B.It doesn’t C.There isn’t D.This isn’t
29_____ years ______ I enjoyed myself so much.
A.It is,that B.There is,that C.It is,since D.There has,since
30_____ a year _____ I go to college.
A.It will be,before B.It will be,when C.This will be,when D.It has been,that
31_____won’t be long_____ he catches up with us.
A.It,before B.There,before C.That’s, when D.It, when
32______ doesn’t matter whether he comes or not.
A.He B.It C.She D.What
33_____ matter when he will come back home?
A. Does it B.Do you C.Does he D.Does this
it用法专题练习2
1.___is four years since I left my hometown.
A.It B.There C.This D.That
2.___is no good____ without doing anything.
A.This, talking B.It, to talk C.It, talking D.That, to talk
3.The people there felt___ not so difficult to work with him.
A.it B.this C.it’s D.that
4.How long____ to finish the work?
A.you’ll take B.will take you C.you’ll take it D.will it take you
5.____is a long way to school, which means____is a long way to go before we arrive.
A.It, there B.There, it C.It, it D.There, there
6.Mike’s mother was always telling him that he should not be lazy, but___ didn’t help.
A.she B.it C.he D.which
7._____ you met Jane?
A.Where was that B.Who was it that C.Where was it that D.Where it was that
8.Who was____ that called him “comrade”?
A.he B.that C.it D.one
9.They are all classmates. ____ is no wonder that they should help each other with
their studies.
A.There B.It C.This D.That
10.____ to all that Taiwan is the largest island in China.
A.As knows B.As we know C.It is known D.What is known
11.It was in the lab____ was taken charge of by Professor Black____ they did the
experiment.
A.that, where B.which, that C.whom, that D.which, where
12.____will be years____ we meet again.
A.There, since B.There, after C.It, that D.It, before
13.____ seems unlikely that he will catch the train.
A.It B.The man C.This D.That
14.____is easy to learn English, but ____is difficult to learn____ well.
A.It, it, this B.It, this, it C.It, it, it D.It, which, which
15.I don’t remember how many years ago_____ I last met you.
A.it was that B.that was it C.was it that D.that was when
16.---___ you left school? ---About a year ago.
A.When was that B.When was it C.When was it that D.How long was that
17.Will you see to____ that our gift is taken back?
A.me B.yourself C.it D.them
18.Was___because____ snowed last night that you didn’t come?
A.it, it B.that, it C.it, that D.it, why
19.___was only when I reread the poems again____I began to appreciate their beauty.
A.That, why B.It, that C.It, it D.That, that
20.I hate_____ when people talk with their mouths full.
A.it B.that C.these D.them
21.Was______ I saw last night at the cinema?
A.you it that B.it you C.that you it D.it you that
22.____ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.
A.There B.This C.That D.It
23.Does_____ matter if he can’t finish the job on time?
A.this B.that C.he D.it
24.I don’t think _____ possible to master a foreign language without much memory
work.
A.this B.that C.its D.it
25.Is_____ necessary to complete the design before National Day?
A.this B.that C.it D.he
26.I’m quite able to afford the suit. _____ is too cheap.
A.It B.Which C.Its D.There
27._____is a pity that he should be absent from the meeting today.
A.There B.That C.It D.He
28.---____is weeks since he was drunk. He hasn’t been drunk so much like this.
A.He B.It C.That D.There
一、考点聚焦
代词分为九类：人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、相互代词、指示代词/疑问代词、连接代词、不定代词、关系代词。大多数代词具有名词和形容词的作用。
1、人称代词
（1）人称代词作主语用主格，作宾语、表语用宾格，但应注意以下4中情况：
①作主语的人称代词如果孤立地使用于无谓语动词的句子中，或在这种句子中与动词不定式连用，常用宾格。
—Does any of you know where Tom lives?
—Me.
What! Me (to)play him at chess? No!
②句子中代词作宾语或宾语补足语时，与所替代的名词在人称、数、格在意义上一般要保持前后一致。
The thief was thought to be he.(the thief是主格，故用he代替)
They took me to be her.他们误以为我是她。（me是宾格，故用her
替代）
③作表语人称代词一般用宾格，但在强调句型中，被强调部分代词的格不变。
I met her in the hospital.→It was her who I met in the hospital.
④在比较级的句子中than、as后用主格、宾格都可以。如：He is taller than me(I).但在下列句中有区别。
I like Jack as much as her.=I like both Jack and her.
I like Jack as much as she.=I like Jack and she likes him, too. (2)两个以上的人称代词并列，其次序排列原则：
①在并列主语中，“I”总是放在最后，排列顺序为：二 三 一（人称）。宾格me也一样。
You ,she and I will be in charge of the case.
Mr.Zhang asked Li Hua and me to help him.
②第三人称，男女两性并用，男先女后。
He and she still don’t agree to the plan.
(3)几个人称代词的特殊用法。
①we/you(口语)常用来泛指一般人。
②she可以代表国家、船只、大地、月亮等。
The “Titanic”was the largest, wasn’t she?
2.物主代词
（1）名词和形容词性物主代词各自的语法功能。
（2）one’s own…=...of one’s own句式的转换。
（3）某些固定结构中常用定冠词代替物主代词。
如： take sb. by the arm, be wounded in the leg.
3.反身代词
（1）反身代词的语法功能：宾语、表语、主语或宾语的同位语。
（2）反身代词和某些动词连有，构成固定短语。
enjoy oneself, feel oneself, make oneself at home, make oneself understood
（3）反身代词还可用于某些成语中。
for oneself为自己或独立地，of oneself自然地，自动地
by oneself独自地，in oneself本身性质，beside oneself喜怒哀愁至极
This problem gets a chapter to itself.这个问题占了一章（独有）。
Just between ourselves, I don’t think much of him.私下地说我并不怎么看重他。
They were discussing about it among themselves.（相互共同）
Left to himself he began to write.别人走后只留下他，他写了起来。
I’m very angry with myself.生自己的气。
4.相互代词（each other, one another）
相互代词无人称、数和格的区别，在句中作宾语。其所有格分别为each other’s 、one another’s ,作定语。
一般来说，each other指两者之间，one another指三者或三者以上之间，但现在区分已不明显。
5.指示代词（this, that , these, those, such, same）
指示代词具有形容词和代词两种词性，在句子中可以作定语、主语、宾语或表语等。
（1）指示代词this和that的区别。
①this (these)一般指时间或空间上较近的人或物；that(those)常指时间或空间较远的人或物。
This is my desk and that is yours.
In those days they could not go to school.
②this常指后面要讲到的事物，有启下的作用；that则指前面讲到过的事物，有承上的作用。
I want to tell you this:the English party will be held on Saturday
afternoon. He hurt his leg yesterday. That’s why he didn’t come.
③为了避免重复，常用that或those代替前面已提过的名词。
The weather of Beijing is colder than that of Nanjing.
The ears of a rabbit are longer than those of a fox.
④this在电话用语中作自我介绍，that询问对方；this和that可以当副词用，意思相当于副词so。
（2）such和same的用法。
①such指“这样的”人或事，在句中作主语和定语。
Such was the story.
We have never seen such a tall building.
②same指“同样的”人或事，在句中作主语、表语、宾语和定语，same的前面要用定冠词the.
The same can be said of the other article.
另一篇文章也是同样的情况。（主语）
Whether he can do it or not,it is all the same to me.
他是否能做这事，对我来说都一样。（表语）
6、疑问代词（who,whom,which,what,whose）
疑问代词在句中作主语、宾语、定语和表语。
（1）who/what
①询问姓名或关系。——Who is he? ——He is my brother./He is
Henry.询问职业或地位。——What is he？ ——He is a lawyer/teacher.
②What/who 作主语时，谓语动词的数取决于说话人的视点，可单数也可复数。
What is /are on the table?
Who is/are in the library?
(2)which与who、what
which表示在一定范围内，而who、what则无此限制。
I found two books on the desk.Which is yours?
7.连接代词和关系代词
连接代词与疑问代词的形式相同，主要有who、whom、whose、what、which以及它们与ever合成的代词whoever、whomever、whatever、whichever等。它们用来引导主语从句，宾语从句和表语从句，即连接复合句中的主句和从句，并在从句中担任一定的句子成分，以连接代词引起的名词性从句前不能再加that.
关系代词是用来引导定语从句的代词，它们包括who、whom、whose、which、that等。这两类代词的用法详见“名词性从句”和“定语从句”部分。
8、不定代词
不定代词主要有：all、each、every、both、either、neither、one、none、little、few、many、much、other、another、some、any、no等。还有由some、any、no和every构成合成代词，不定代词具有名词和形容词的性质，并有可数和不可数之分，在句中可以作主语、表语、宾语、同位语、定语、状语等（every、no只能作定语）。下面介绍几组主要不定代词的用法与区别。
（1）some与any
一般用法：some、any可与单、复数可数名词及不可数名词连有。some一般用于肯定句，any多用于疑问、否定或条件句。
He has some Chinese paintings.(定语)
Some like sports,others like music.(主语)
Ask me if you have any questions.(定语)
Do you have any questions to ask?(定语)
I don’t know any of the students.（宾语）
特殊用法：
①any用于肯定句表示“任何”的意思。
Any child can do that.（定语）
You may take any of them.（宾语）
②some用于单数可数名词前表示“某一”。
Smith went to some place in England.（定语）
③在期待对方回答yes 时，some用在表示请求或邀请的问句中。
Would you like some bananas?（邀请）
Mum,could you give me some money?(请求)
④some 用于否定句表示部分否定。
I don’t know some of the students.（宾语）
some和any在句中还可作状语，作副词。some意为“大约”相当于“about”,而any则表示程度，意为“稍，丝毫”。如：
There are some 300 workers on strike.
Do you feel any better today?
(2)one,both,all
①one作定语、表语、主语或宾语，可以指人或物，表示“一个”的意思，其复数为ones,指人时，其所有格是one’s，反身代词是oneself.
One should try one’s best to serve the people.(主语、定语)
This is not the one I want.(表语)
one、ones可以代替上文提到过的名词，以免重复，one、ones前面分别可以用this、that、these、those或the、which等词修饰。如：
These books are more interesting than those ones.
Here are three pens.Which one is yours,this one or that one or the one in the pencil-box? ②both用作定语、宾语、主语和同位语，可以指人或指物，表示“两者都”的意思。
This maths problem can be worked out in both ways.(定语)
Both of the boys are here.(主语)
We both are students.(同位语)
注意：both用于否定句，表示部分否定；表示完全否定时，用neither。如：Both of us are not teachers.我们俩并不都是教师。
Neither of us is a teacher. 我们俩都不是教师。
both不能放在the、these、those、my等之后，而应放在它们的前面。如：Both my parents like this film.
Both the /these boys are tall.
③all用作主语、表语、宾语、定语、同位语，指“全部的”、“整个的”，可与可数或不可数名词连用，除少数情况外，一般不与单数可数名词连用，与复数名词连用时，表示“所有的”、“全部的”，指三个或三个以上的人或物。
He gave me all the money.他把全部的钱给了我。
All the schools are flooded.所有的学校都被淹了。
I told him all about it. 我把一切都告诉了他。
That’s all for today.今天就在这儿。
They have all been to Xi’an.他们都去过西安。
注意：all 用于否定句，表示部分否定，完全否定用none。如：
Not all the ants go out for food.(or:All the ants don’t go out for food.)并不是所有的蚂蚁都出去寻找食物。
None of the money is mine.这钱一分也不是我的。
（3）many和much
many和much都表示“许多”，但many修饰或代替复数可数名词，much修饰或代替不可数名词。它们在句中可作主语、宾语、定语。much有时用作状语。
（4）few, little; a few, a little
few和little表示没有多少，含否定意义；而a few 和a little表示有一些，有几个，含肯定意义。另外，few、a few 修饰可数名词；little、a little修饰不可数名词。它们在句中常用作定语、主语和宾语。
（5）no和none
no=not any,表示“没有”，用来修饰可数名词或不可数名词，通常作定语，none代替不可数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；代替可数名词作主语时，谓语动词可用单数也可用复数形式。none还可以在句中作宾语。
注意：none既可以指人又可以指物，no one只能指人。
（6）each和every
each（各个），指两个或两个以上的人或物，侧重个体，在句中作主语、宾语、定语和同位语。every（每个），指三个或三个以上的人或物，侧重整体，在句中只能作定语。
Every student it our class has a dictionary.(定语，强调班上“所有的人”)
Each student in our class has a dictionary.（定语，强调各个个体）
Each of them has been there.（主语）
The teacher gave each of the students a new textbook.（宾语）
We each got a ticket.（同位语）
（7）either和neither
either是“两者中任何一个”的意思，可修饰或代替单数可数名词，neither是“两者中没有一个”的意思，可以修饰或代替单数可数名词，它们可在句在作主语、宾语或定语。如：
Here are two pens. You may take either of them.(宾语)
Neither boy knows French.(定语)
注意：①either也作副词，其意为“也”，用于否定句的句末。He doesn’like tea, and I don’t either.（状语）②either与or构成连词，意为“不是……就是……”或“要么……要么……”。He is either Japanese or Chinese. ③neither用作副词，意为“也不”，即“not…either”。He can’t do it, neither can I. ④neither可与nor构成连词，意为“既不……也不”。Neither he nor you are a student.
（8）other和another, the others 和others
the other表示“两者中的另一个”；“the other + 复数可数名词”
表示“其余（他）的……”；the others表示“其他的人或物”。“others及other + 复数名词”泛指“其他的（别的）人或物”。这些词语在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。如：
He got two books; one is textbook, the other is a novel.
Five of the pencils are red, the others(the other pens)are yellow.
Some are singing, others are dancing.
another修饰或代替单数可数名词，意为“（三个或三个以上的）另一个”，不能指两者中的另一个，在句中可作宾语和定语。
This coat is too dark. Please show me another.(宾语)
Please give me another book.（定语）
注意：another修饰复数名词时，意为“再，又”。如：Please give me another ten minutes. one … another(a second)… a third…the other…意为“一个……一个……一个……一个”用于三者或三者以上的排列。some…others…others…，意为“一些……一些……一些”。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The Parkers bought a new house but__________will need a lot of work before they can move in.(NMET 2001)
A.they B.it C.one D.which
解析：答案为B。分析题意可知，they显然不合，which多引导从句，从此为并列句式，one表示泛指，而此处空格内容指代前面提到的the new house。要仔细区别代词的所指范围，是人还是物，单数还是复数，另应注意句式。
2．If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay_________$ 15.（NMET 2000）
A.another B.other C.more D.each
解析：答案为A。本题考查不定代词用于表示数量附加的用法。“another + 数字 + 复数名词”结构通常用来表示在原有数量上的附加。若选C，正确结构是“数词 + more + 复数名词”。掌握another和more与数字搭配的位置是此题关键。another放在数字前，more放在数字后。NMET 1995中第25小题命题思路与此题一致。
3. Few pleasures can equal ___________of a cool drink on a hot day.(NMET 1999)
A.some B.any C.that D.those
解析：答案为C。本题考查替代词that的用法。that通常在句中替代同类的、特定的但不是同一的事物。本句中that替代the pleasure。句意为“在炎热的夏天几乎没有任何乐趣能与饮一杯冷饮的乐趣相比”。that指代单数或不可数名词，复数用those，表示特指，以避免重复，在比较句型中较为常用，代替可数名词时可换用the one。
代词与it的用法
1.Not all these books are second-hand； of them are new．
A．all B．none C．some D．each
2.You can buy these maps at railway station．They all have them．
A．that B．any C．every D．each
3.I prefer a street in a small town to in such alarge city as Shanghai．
A．that B．it C．this D．one
4.1've only seen one copy of Gone with the wind in the bookshop opposite．Tom，g。and buy ．
A．one B．any C．other D．the others
5.At the time neither country allowed to open any companies on its land．
A．another B．the other C．other D．the others
6.Most of the housework was done by two members of the family，my sister and ．
A．me B．I C．myself D．mine
7. was thoughtful John to send me this present．
A．1t；for B．He；for C．It；of D．He；of
8.—We walked twenty miles today．
—I never guessed you could have walked far．
A．as B．this C．that D．such
9.—Have you read through the two books he lent you last week?
—No， of them is easy to read．
A．either B．none C．both D．neither
10.Meeting my uncle after all these years Was an uncom fortable moment， I will always treasure．
A．that B．one C．it D．what
11.The noise of the party prevented me from getting sleep．
A．some B．any C．no D．many
12.I hate when people talk with their mouths full．
A．it B．that C．those D．then
13.The class are busy preparing lessons for a test．
A．his B．her C．their D．its
14.—Would you care for tea or coffee?
— ，thank you．I’ve just had some tea．
A．Little B．Both C．Either D．Neither
15.It was in the house he used to 1ive that the exhibition was held．
A．where B．that C．as D．which
16.I make a rule to take a walk in the morning．
A．that B．this C．myself D．it
17. of them knew about the plan because it was k。pt a secret．
A．Each B．Any C．None D．No one
18.We couldn’t eat in a restaurant because of us had money on us．
A．all；no B．any；no C．none；any D．no one；any
19.There’re so many kinds of tape-recorders on sale that I can’t make up my mind to buy．
A．what B．which C．how D．where
20． we can’t get seems better than we have．
A．What；what B．What；that C．That；that D．That；what
21．Two ancient Chinese vases， worth$1，000，were sold at Sothebv’s last Monday．
A．which B．each C．every D．all
22．The computers we use today are much better than we used ten years ago．
A．one B．that C．ones D．those
23. of them are party members．Some 0f them are League members．
A．None B．Neither C．No one D．Not all
24．—Why don’t we take a 1ittle break?
—Didn’t we just have ?
A．it B．that C．one D．this
25．One of the sides of the board should be painted yellow，and ．
A．the other is white B．another white
C．the other white D．another is white
26．Some people would rather ride bike as bike riding has of the trouble of taking buses.
A.nothing B.none C.some D.neither
27．The two friends met by chance .
A．another day B．some day C．the other day D．other day
28．—Which of the two Italian films do you like better?
— ，because they are meaningless．
A．Both B．Either C．None D．Neither
29． don’t visit this part of the town．
A．The most tourists B．Most tourists C．Most of tourists D．Most the tourists
30．——Would you like some soft drink?
——Yes，but only ．
A．a few B．a little C．few D．1ittle
31．—Which coat would you prefer，sir?
—I’ll take ，to have a change sometimes．
A．all them B．them all C．both them D．them both
32．—Do you have at home now，mum?
—No，we still have to get scores of eggs and some vegetables．
A．nothing B．everything C．anything D．something
33．It was a great party． enjoyed it．
A．All of us B．Evervbody of us C．Everybody D．All
34．If this dictionary is not yours， can it be?
A．what else B．who else C．which else’s D．who else’s
35．—Have you finished your report yet?
—No，I’ll finish it in ten minutes．
A．another B．other C．more D．less
36．—Is here?
—No，Bob and Tim have asked for leave．
A．anybody B．somebody C．everybody D．nobody
37．Sarah has read lots of stories by American writers．
Now she would 1ike to read stories by writers from countries．
A．some；any B．other；some C．some；other D．other；other
38．Tom’s mother kept telling him that he should work harder，but didn’t help．
A．he B．which C．she D．it
39．They are good friends． is no wonder that they know each other so well．
A．This B．That C．There D．It
40．This bus service is very good．There’s bus ten minutes．
A．each B．any C．all D．every
41．Mr Zhang’s English is very fluent，but he speaks Chinese．
A．1ittle B．fewer C．few D．1ess
42．—What Would you like to eat?
—I don’t mind． — whatever you’ve got．
A．Something B．Anything C．Nothing D．Everything
代词与it的用法
l-5 CBDCB 6-10 ACCDC 11-15 BACDA 16-20 DCCBA 2l-25 BDDCC 26-30 BCDBB
3l-35 DBADA 36-40 CCDDD 41-42 AB
Composed by Chinephone Lew
独立主格结构是由一个相当于主语的名词或代词加上非谓语动词、形容词（副）词、或介词短语构成的一种独立成分。该结构不是句子，也不是从句，所以它内部的动词不能考虑其时态、人称和数的变化，它与其主句之间既不能通过并列连词连接也不能有从句引导词引导，常用逗号与其主句隔开。独立主格结构在很多情况下可以转化为相应的状语从句或其他状语形式，但很多时候不能转化为分词形式，因为它内部动词的逻辑主语与主句主语不一致。在做这类题目时一定要小心判断，不能粗心大意。
一、独立主格结构的构成形式
1、逻辑主语+V-ing
这种构成形式内部的逻辑主语是分词的动作执行者，分词表示的动作不是整句主语发出的动作，而是其逻辑主语发出的动作。如：
1.__________no bus, we had to walk home.
A.There being B.Being C.Having been D.There was
2._______no bus, we had to walk home.
A.As there being B.As there was C.Being D.There was
3._______Sunday, the library doesn't open.
A.Being B.There being C.It being D.Having been
4.______Sunday, the library doesn't open.
A.As it being B.Being C.It is D.As it is
2、逻辑主语+V-ed
该构成形式内部的逻辑主语是分词的动作承受者。如：
1._________, the train started.
A.The signal given B.Giving the signal B.The signal being given D.The signal giving
2.__________, the train started.
A.After having given the signal B.After the signal given C.Giving the signal D.After the signal was given
3._________, the text became easier for us to learn.
A.Explaining new words B.New words explained C.Being explained new words D.Having explained new words
4.______________, the text became easier for us to learn.
A. When new words were explained B.Explaining new words B.New words explaining D.Being explained new words
3、逻辑主语+形容词（副词）
该结构相当于一个未带动词的“主—系—表”结构。如：
1.___________, the patient can leave the hospital.
A.Better conditions B.Conditions better C.Conditions are better D.Being better conditions
2._________, the patient can leave the hospital.
A.If better conditions B.If conditions better C.If conditions are better D.Being better conditions
3.________, we’d like to go outing.
A.Being Sunday B.Sunday OK C.Sunday is OK D.If Sunday OK
4.___________, we’d like to go outing.
A.If Sunday is OK B.Sunday being OK C.Sunday OK D.A,B and C
5._________, you can wait a while.
A.The play being still on B.The play still on C Being still on the play D.A and B
6._________, so you can wait a while
A.The play is still on B.The play being still on C.As the play is still on D.The play still on
4、逻辑主语+介词短语
该结构相当于不带动词的“主—系—介词短语”结构。如：
1.The boy followed the nobleman here, ___________.
A.a sword in hand B.a sword in his hand B.Being a sword in hand D.sword in hand
2.The boy followed the nobleman here ___________.
A.with a sword in his hand B.with a sword in hand C.with a sword being in hand D.a sword being in hand
3.He left the office, __________.
A.tears being in eyes B.tears in eyes C.being tears in eyes D.with tears being in eyes
4.He left the office __________.
A.with tears being in eyes B.with tears in her eyes C.being tears in eyes D.tears being in eyes二、独立主格结构在整句中可作以下成分：
1、原因状语
该结构在句中作原因状语时相当于一个原因状语从句。如：
1.________ no bus, we had to walk home.
A.There being B.As there was C.There was D.A and B
2._________Sunday, the library doesn't open.
A.It being B.As it is C.Being D.A and B
3.____________, I had to ask for two days’ leave.
A.Mother being ill B.Bother ill C.As mother was ill D. A,B and C
4.____________, we have to work late into the night.
A.The exam near B.The exam being near C.As the exam is near D. A,B and C
2、时间状语
独立主格结构作时间状语时相当于一个由when, as soon as, after等引导的时间状语从句。如：
1.__________, the train started.
A.The signal given B.After the signal was given C.Given the signal D.A and B
2.__________, the text became easier for us to learn.
A. New words explained B.When new words were explained C.When teacher explained new words D.all above
3、条件状语
独立主格结构作条件状语时可以改为由if引导的条件状语从句。如：
1.___________, we'll go to visit the Great Wall.
A.Weather permitting B.If weather permits C.If permitting D.A and B
2._________, the patient will recover himself soon.
A.If the treatment is in time B.The treatment in time C.The treatment being in time D.A,B and C
4、伴随状语
独立主格结构作伴随状语时相当于一个介词短语或并列谓语。如：
1.We have lessons every day, ___________.
A.Sunday included B.Sunday including C.Sunday is including D.all the above
2.The boy fell asleep,___________.
A.cap on head B.with a cap on head C.a cap on was on head D. all the above
3.Father came home,_________
A.a dog following him B.a dog followed him C.being followed by a dog D.all the above
with + 复合宾语结构常见类型及其用法
Composed by Chinephone Lew
“with + 复合宾语”结构是指“with +宾语（名词或代词）+ 非谓语动词（分词、不定式）、介词短语、形容词或副词等”所构成的一种介词短语。该结构内部若是动词，则其非谓语形式的选用要注意三点：若内部动词表示将来（无论主动还是被动），则用不定式；若内部动词表示被动且属过去，则用过去分词；若内部动词表示持续主动动作，则用现在分词。该结构在句子中可以作以下几种成分：
1、原因状语
1.With the man ______ us ahead, we had no trouble finding the village.
A.To guide B.Guiding C.Guided D.To have guide
2.With a lot of work_____, she doesn’t have time to rest. A.to do B.to be done C.doing D.done
3.With the machine _____all the time, we finished harvesting crops in time.
A.to work B.worked C.working D.Being working
2、时间状语
1.The street looks more beautiful with all the lights _____.A.are on B.on C.to be on D.been on
2.With our problem ________, we all felt happy.
A.to settle B.to be settled C.settled D.being settled
3.With his work______, the secretary began to walk home. A.to do B.doing C.done D.to be done
3、伴随状语
1.She left the offices with tears ________.
A.in her eyes B.in eyes B.being in eyes D.to be in eyes
2.The man found the door with both his eyes ______.
A.to be closed B.being closed C.closed D.closing
3.We felt uncomfortable with two waitresses_______.
A. standing by B.to be standing by C.stood by D.being standing by
4.The murderer was brought in, with his hands________.
A.to be tied behind B. tied behind C.tying behind D.being tied behind
5.You can’t see well ________.
A. with the glasses on B.being on the glasses C.with the glasses to be on D.with the glasses4、后置定语
1.Do you know the man ______ a book in his hand? A.with B.having C.being D.A and B
2.Please offer your seat to the woman _____ a baby in her arms.A.carrying B.having C.with D.all the above
分词、独立主格和“with + 复合宾语”作状语的区别
分词结构、独立主格结构、with + 复合宾语结构在句中均可作状语，其区别是这样的：
一、分词在句中作状语时句子的主语是分词的逻辑主语，即主句主语是分词的动作执行者（用现在分词）或动作承受者（用过去分词或现在分词被动式）。这种情况下的分词短语可以改为相应的状语从句或并列谓语。
分词短语在句中常作以下状语：
1、原因状语
1._______late, we had to walk home. A.Being B.As we were C.We being D.A and B
2.______ busy, they had no time to play. A.As they were B.Being C.Because they were D.all the above
2、时间状语
1._______ the students' homework, the teacher found a lot of mistakes.
A.When he was correcting C.When he corrected C.Correcting D.all the above
2.________by your teachers, you are supposed to be modest.
A.When you are praised B.Praised C.When praised D.all the above
3、条件状语
1.______ more time, he is sure to finish his test paper. A.If he is given B.If given C.Given D.all the above
2._______ another chance, I'll do my job better.A.If I have B.If having C.Having D.all the above
4、伴随状语
1.Father came back, _______ a bag of money on his left shoulder.
A.carrying B.he was carrying C.and he was carrying D.all the above
2.Father came back, _______ by a monkey.
A.and he was followed B.followed C.and was followed D.all the above
二、独立主格结构和with + 复合宾语结构在句子中作状语时，这种结构内部的分词或介词短语的逻辑主语不是整句的主语，即主句主语与分词的逻辑主语不一致。如：
1.______, we’ll go fishing in the country.
A.Permitting weather B.Weather permitted C.Weather permitting D.Permitting
2._________, he finished playing the game of chess.
A.His eyes closing B.With his eyes closed C.Closing his eyes D.Closed his eyes
3._________, I couldn’t get the book I wanted.
A.Closed B.Library closed C.Closing library D.With library closing
三、使用分词短语、独立主格结构、with + 复合宾语结构分别在句子中作状语时要注意：它们与主句之间不应有从属连词（如when, if, as soon as, as, while等）或并列连词（如and, but, or, so等）。例如：
1.____________ the teacher told the class to go through the text
A.Checking the answers B.Checking the answers and C.When checking the answers and D.all the above
2._________a rainy day, so all the farmers had to stay inside.
A.It being B.Being C.It was D.all the above
3.As_______a little sick, he remained at the clinic.
A.feeling B.he felt C.he felling D.all the above
四、在使用独立主格结构、with +复合宾语结构、分词结构作句子的状语时，一定要看句子主语同这些结构的逻辑关系。
1、当句子主语与该状语内部动词之间有逻辑上的主谓或动宾关系时，该状语可用分词结构或从句表示。
1.______ in thought, he almost ran into the car in front of him.
A.Lost B.As he was lost C.He lost D.A and B
2._______for the bus at the stop, he suddenly caught sight of a thief.
A.Waiting B.When he was waiting C.As he was waiting D.all the above
2、若句子主语与状语内动词之间不存在逻辑上的主谓或动宾关系且状语内有自已的逻辑主语。则该状语不能用分词结构，只能用独立主格结构、with +复合宾语结构或从句。如：
1.The soldier fell asleep ___________.
A.with the candle burning B.burning the candle C.when he was burning the candle D.when burning the candle
2.__________, the Tiananmen Square looks more beautiful.
A.Being on B.When being on C.With all the lights on D.When it turns on all the lights
3.________ the notice, he had an idea.
A.When he was watching B.Watching C.When watching D.all the above
4.________ the notice, an idea came to his mind.
A.When he was watching B.Watching C.When watching D.all the above
一、考点聚焦
1、序号表示法
（1）单纯的序号，可在基数词前加number,简写为No.。如：No.1第一号
（2）事物名词的序号表达法有什所不同：
①对于一些小序号可有序数词也可用基数词表达，形式分别为：the +
序数词 + 名词；名词 + 基数词。如：第一次世界大战可以表示为the First World War或World War One。
②对于一些大序号我们通常只用一种表达法，即名词 + 数词。如：501号房间表示为Room 501, 538路公共汽车表示为Bus 538。
③可用a / the + number + 基数词 + 名词。如：a No.5 bus一辆五路公共汽车，the No.8 bus那辆8路公共汽车。
2、倍数的表达方式
一般情况下我们用以下三种倍数表达方式：
（1）倍数用在as + 形容词 / 副词（原级）+ as结构之前。如：
They have three times as many cows as we do.
（2）倍数放在形容词或副词的比较级之前或by + 倍数用在比较级之后。如：
This rope is four times longer than that one.
They produced more products in 2001 than those in 2000 by twice.
（3）倍数用在表示度量名词前，其基本结构为：倍数 + the + size / length / weight … + of + 表示比较对象的名词，也可用于倍数 + what引导的从句中。如：
This room is three times the size of that one.
The college is twice what it was 5 years age.
You can’t imagine that rats eat 40 to 50 times their weight.
3、大约数的表示方法
（1）用ten、dozen、score、hundred、thousand、million等数词的复数后加of短语来表示几十、几百、上千、成千上万等大约数概念。如：
The little boy buys dozens of pencils every term.
Thousands of people died in the earthquake.
Every year tens of thousands of people go to work in Guangdong Province.
（2）用、less than、under、below、almost、nearly、up to 等来表示小于或接近某数目。如：
He is good at English, so he can finish the paper in less than two hours.
（3）用more than、over、above、beyond、or more等来表示超过或多于某个数目。如：
Peking University has a history of more than 100 years.
（4）用or、or so、about、around、some、more or less等表示在某一数目左右。如：
About 50 people were present at that time.
（5）用to、from … to…、between … and表示介于两数词。如：
His salary rises from 20 dollars a week to 35 dollars a week.
（6）注意事项：dozen、score、hundred、thousand、million作数词表示确切数量时，不用复数。如：three score, five dozen, seven million等。
4、分数的表达方式
（1）分子用基数词，分母用序数词，分子大于1时，分母用复数。如：one-third三分之一，three-sevenths七分之三。
（2）分子与分母之间加in, 分子在前，分母在后，分子分母都用基数词。如：one in ten 十分之一，five in eight八分之五。
（3）分子与分母之间加out of , 分子在前，分母在后，分子分母都用基数词。如：one out of ten十分之一，five out of eight八分之五。
5、百分数的表示法
（1）表示百分数直接将数词放在单词percent前面即可，如：twenty percent百分之二十。
（2）分数和百分数后面不能直接接名词或代词，而用以下形式：分数/百分数 ＋of + 冠词 / 限定词 + 名词 / 代词 ，其谓语动词与of后的名词在人称和数上保持一致，如：
Two-thirds of the money was spent on food.
About seventy percent of the earth surface is covered by water.
6、小数的表示法
小数的表示法，小数点前的总值发同其他数词一样，小数点用point,小数点后面的数读成个位数，如：9.65表示为nine point six five。218.39表示为two hundred and eighteen point three nine。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. ____________ people in the world are sending information by E-mail every day.(2001年上海春季高考卷)A.Several million B.Many millions
C.Several millions D.Many million
解析：答案为A。本题考查的是million表示确切数量的用法。million前需用数表确切数量，而不用many这类词，但可说many millions of（上百万的），故本题中用Several million。
2. The number of people invited __________ fifty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.(NMET 96)
A.were ; was B.was ; was C.was ; were D.were ; were
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是the number of + 名词与a number of + 名词作主语时谓语的单复数问题。the number of是“……的数目”，作主语时谓语动词用单数，而a number of 后接可数名词的复数形式，作主语时谓语动词用复数形式，故此题最佳选项为C。
3. Shortly after the accident, two ___________ police were sent to the sport to keep order .(NMET 92)
A.dozens of B.dozens C.dozen D.dozen of
解析：答案为C。此题考查的是数词dozen表示确切数量时的用法，dozen表示确切数量时用其单数形式，当dozens的复数后接of时则表示不确切数量，本题答案为C。
冠词与数词
1．He has great interest in history，especially in history of Tang Dynasty．
A．a；the B．a；不填 C．不填；the D．不填；a
2．The party last night was success．we sang and danced until it came to end at twelve．
A．a；the B．the；an C．a；an D．不填；an
3．While Jane was cooking fish on open fire outside，her hair caught． fire．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．an；a D．an；不填
4．Young as he is，David has gained rich experience in society．
A．不填；不填 B．the；the C．a；不填 D．不填；the
5．People regard the wheel as invention of the
first importance in human history．
A．an；the B．an；不填 C．the；the D．the；不填
6．Mr Stock，who is in Mexico on ，runs small business．
A．business；a B．business；不填 C．the business；a D．business；不填
7．Fortunately he will go on holiday in place of Brown．
A．不填；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．the；不填
8．Zhang Hua is a student at ．
A．the University of Beijing B．the Beijing University
C．Beijing University D．University of Beijing
9．Many people are still in habit of writing silly things in public places．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．不填；the
10．Wouldn’t it be wonderful world if all nations
lived in peace with one another?
A．a；不填 B．the；不填 C．a；the D．the；the
11．Your uncle must have X- ray examination．
A．a B．不填 C．the D．an
12．I remember he lives in south，so we shouldn’t be walking to west．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；the D．the；不填
13．Where is ?
A．the manager office B．the office of the manager
C．the manager’s office D．the office of the manager’s
14．Five years ago her brother was university student of physics．
A．an；the B．a；不填 C．an；不填 D．a；the
15．—Do you know who invented telephone?
—No，but it is really most useful invention．
A．the；the B．a；a C．the；a D．a；the
16．Summers in south of France are for most part dry and sunny．
A．不填；a B．the；不填 C．不填；不填 D．the；the
17．The police have power to arrest bad people by 1aw．
A．the；the B．不填；the C．不填；不填 D．the；不填
18．—Do you like the novels?
—I don’t like either of them．Please show me third one．
A．a B．the C．不填 D．an
19．Keep away from the cage. lion is fierce animal．
A．The；the B．A；the C．A；不填 D．a；不填
20．Now the machine runs at double .
A．a speed B．speed C．the speed D．for speed
21．My mother is usually on duty in her office every few days．
A．the；a B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．a；不填
22．My brother likes to play football while my sister prefers to play violin．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．the；the
23．I came by sea and I had a 1ovely journey on Queen Elizabeth II．
A．不填；the B．the；不填 C．不填：不填 D．the；the
24．Cleaning women in big cities usually get paid
A．by a hour B．by an hour C．by the hour D．by hours
25．—I’m afraid I dare not speak in public．
—Just have try．
A．a；不填 B．不填；a C．the；a D．the；the
26．—What’s your elder sister?
—She is teacher and writer．
A．the；the B．a；不填 C．a；a D．the；a
27．She plays violin fairly well and makes a living by teaching violin．
A．the；不填 B．不填；不填 C．a；不填 D．a；a
28．These two rooms are of size．But another two rooms are three times size of them．
A．the；the B．a；the C．a；a D．the；a
29．He served in the army in when he was in
A．1940’s；his twenties B．the 1940s；the twenties
C．1940s’；his twenties D．the 1940’s；his twenties
30．This computer centre is larger than that one in the area．
A．one sixth B．four ninths C．fifth four D．two third
31．Paper produced every year is the world’s production of vehicles．
A．the three times weight of B．three times the weight of
C．as three tirues heavy D．three times as heavier as
32．The hero of the story is an artist in his ．
A．thirtieth B．thirty C．thirty’s D．thirties
33．Mr Smith me to buy several eggs for the dinner．
A．asked；dozen B．suggested；dozens of
C．had；dozen D．persuaded；dozens
34．—Tell me where you live，please．
—I live ．
A．in 123，King Street B．at 123，King Street
C．in King Street，123 D．at King Street，123
35．30％ of the cattle thin，but the rest fat．
A．are；are B．is；is C．is；are D．are；is
冠词与数词
1-5 ACDAB 6-10 ABCCA 11-15 DDCBC 16-20 DDADC 21-25 BAACB 26-30 BABDA
31-35 BDABA
一、考点聚焦
1、介词的分类与语法功能
（1）介词是虚词，不能单独作句子成分，必须与名词、代词（或相当于名词的其他词类、短语或从句等）构成介词短语，在句中充当一个成分。介词分为：简单介词，如at、in、for等；合成介词，如within、inside、onto、througout等；短语介词，如according to、out of、because of、by means of、in spite of、instead of等。双重介词，如from behind / above / under、until after等。分词介词，如considering、including、judging(from / by) 等。
常见的介词宾语：名词、代词、动名词、从句、不定式等。如：
①It is going to rain this afternoon according to the weather
forecast.
②He quarrelled with her yesterday.
③He succeeded in passing the final exam.
④I’m still thinking of how I can fulfil the task ahead of time.
⑤The professor will give us a talk on how to study English well.
（2）介词短语在句中可作表语、定语、状语和宾补等。如：
①This machine is in good condition.(表语)
②Where is the key to my bike?(定语)
③Nothing in the world could live without air or water.(状语)
④She always thinks herself above others.（宾补）2、介词搭配
（1）“动词+介词”搭配：注意特定搭配与同一介词与多个动词搭配意义不同的情况。
①rob sb. of sth. / clear the road of snow(“夺去、除去”意
义的动词与of 连用)
②supply us with food / fill the glass with wine（“供给”意义的动词与with连用）
③make a desk of wood / make bread from flour / make the material into a coat（“制作、制造”意义与of、from、into连用）
④介词 + the + 部位与动词的关系（=动词 + sb.’s + 部位，可换用）
strike him on the head(“击，拍，碰，摸”意义与on连用)
catch him by the arm(“抓，拉，拿，扯”意义与by连用)
hit the boy in the face（“肚，胸，眼，脸”等人体前部与in连用）
⑤prevent(stop, keep)sb. from doing sth.(“阻止，禁止”意义与from连用)
⑥persuade(advise, warn)sb. into doing sth.（“说服，建议”意义与into连用）
⑦buy sb. for sth.(leave、get、win、gain、lose等“得失”意义与for连用)
⑧tell sth.to sb.(show、teach、sing、write、read等“告知”意义与to连用)
⑨give sth. to sb.（give、allow、promise、pass、hand等“授予”意义与to连用）
注意：⑦⑧⑨可换成buy sb.sth.双宾结构。
⑩say to sb.(suggest、explain、apologize、murmur、whisper与“对象”连用必须用to)不可说suggest sb.sth.。
同一动词与不同介词搭配意义不同。
for（寻找） to sth. of(听说) on(拜访)
look to (眺望) agree with sb. hear call for(需要)
at（看） on sth. from(收到信) in(请)
同一介词与不同动词搭配，意义各异。
reply to the letter回信，sing(dance)to the music和……唱（跳），amount to 达到，加起来有……，devote to把……贡献给，drink to为……干杯，object to反对，look forward to 渴望，come to苏醒，belong to属于，search for搜……，ask … for … 寻找，use … for用作，leave for前往，take … for误以为，call of倡导，wait for等待，care for喜欢，make up for弥补损失，turn to求助（救）于，help oneself to随意，agree to同意，compare … to把……比作，send for派人去请（拿）……，sail for驶向，航向，set out for动身去，go in for爱好……。
（2）常见“形容词 + 介词”搭配。
of担心…… about / at sth.
afraid angry
for 替……而担心 with sb.
for sth.渴望…… different from与……不同
amxious
about sth. / sb担心…… different to … 不关心…… of讨厌 with sb.
tired strict
from/ with因……疲倦 in sth.要求严格
at擅长 with sb.受……欢迎
good for对……有益 popular in some place流行在……
of sb. to do so友好 for … 因……而流行
with + 名词或what从句
pleased helpful to对……有帮助
at + 抽象名词（听 / 看到……而高兴）
to sb.为人所知
known for因……而出名 be familiar with熟悉
as作为……出名 be familiar to为……熟知（悉）
sorry for … 替……后悔 disappointed at sth.失望
from缺席
rich in富有…… absent
in离开此地去了……
worthy of值得的，glad about sth. for sb.为某人某事高兴，far from离……远，grateful for sth. to sb.为某事感激某人，free from没有……（免除……），proud of(take pride in)自豪，satisfied with (by)满意，sure of / about确信，fond of喜欢，fit for适合，busy with sth.(in doing sth.)忙着干某事，full of充满，ready for准备，similar to相似，wrong with不对；有毛病……
（3）“名词 + 介词”要注意习惯搭配和意义区分。
the absence of water缺水
the hope of success成功的希望
have a chance of (for) entering college上大学的机会
take pride in them为他们感到骄傲
the key to the question问题的答案
a medicine for cough治咳嗽的药
the ticket for tomorrow明天的票
in Beijing去了北京
his abesence
from Beijing不在北京
to study学习方法
the way
of studying maths学习教学的方法
3、核心介词用法归纳与辨析
（1）表示时间的介词in的用法如下。
表示在某一较长时间内，如世纪、年、月、季、周等一般用介词in，
如：in the 1990s, in the year, in January, in(the) winter / summer / fall / spring, in the first week of May。
还可以用时段名词组成固定短语或词组。如：in a while, in no time, in the daytime, in a short while, in time, in the morning (afternoon, evening)。但要注意：
①at night / at noon, in the day(在白天),in the night（大夜间）。
②in five days（weeks, months, years）中in意思是“在……以后”。
③in和during表一段时间内两词可互用。如：in the night, during the night, in the war, during the war。但略有区别：当接表示“活动”的抽象名词时多用during，接“活动”的动名词及短语时用in。如：
during the discussion in discussing the problem
during her stay in Hubei in playing basketball
during the course of in digging the tunnel
（2）在具体的某一天或某天上午、晚上、前夕，常用on。
on Sunday(s).on Tuesday morning
on Christmas Day(但at Chrismas),on Christmas Eve, on
Children’s Day
on March 8, on the morning (afternoon, evening)of Oct.1
early on the morning of Oct.1(区别：in the late / early morning of Oct.1)
on a rainy night, on warm winter days
(3)表示某一时刻或某一点时间用at,如小时、分钟等。
at breakfast(supper, lunch),at six
at noon (sunrise, sunset, midday, night, midnight, dawn)
at the age of 15, at the time of war,但in time of danger/ trouble。
注意：有些时间名词前不接介词。如：
next day、last Sunday、that morning、these years
one、each、any、every、some、all修饰时,一般不用介词,如some day
one day、yesterday / afternoon,the night before
（4）till、until、to的用法。
①till(until)与持续动词连用一般用于肯定句中，与短暂动词连用一般用在否定句中。如：
He waited for me till twelve o’clock.
He didn’t get up till(until) 10 a.m.(不可用to).
但注意：在句首出现或强调句型中一般不用till而用until。如： Not until 9 a.m.did Mr.Smith come back to school.
②to表“终结”时常用和from连用，但要注意不与from连用时的意
义。如：from July to September, from six to(till)eight（从……到……为止），但from morning till night（从早到晚），不能用to。from … to常构成习惯搭配，不可换用其他介词。（A）表持久连续、传递、转移的含义。from time to time(不时，有时)，from day to day (天天),from hand to hand(不断传下去)，from place to place（处处，到处），from side to side(左右摇摆)，from door to door（家家户户），from house to house（挨家挨户），from shop to shop（一个商店接一个商店）。(B)表起始终止的全过程或程度加深、状态变化。from beginning to end(从头到尾，自始至终)（from the beginning to the end of…）;from hand to mouth(仅能糊口)，from bad to worse(越来越糟)，from head to foot(从头到脚),
from top to bottom（整个地，彻底地），from top to toe(全身)，from start to finish（自始至终，从头到尾）。（C）from one + 名词 + to another表示“依次”。如from one car to another（顺着车厢依次地）。（D）名词 + by + 同一单数名词，表示“一个一个地”，要与from … to短语区别开：one by one 一个一个地；little by little(bit)一点一点地；step by step 一步一步地，逐渐地（但by and by 不久以后）；sentence by sentence逐句地；day by day一天一天地；side by side(with…)(和……)并肩，一起；shoulder to shoulder肩并肩地，齐心协力；hand in hand 手拉手，紧紧地;face to face面对面。
（5）in、after、later
①in + 一段时间：表示说话时为起点一段时间之后，与一般将来时连用；但表示“在……之内”时，用于各种时态。
②一段时间 + later(later是副词)：表示某一具体时间或某一方面具体时间算起的一段时间后。
③after + 一段时间表示：“在……之后”，用于一般过去时；但时间为点时间时，只能用after,即after + 点时间，用于各种时态。
The doctor will be with us in six minutes.
She graduated in 1981,and eight years later she became the manager of the factory.
He received her letter after four weeks.
另外，in + 一段时间 + ’s + time 与 within + 一段时间的用法如下：
in a week’s time = in a week
They will arrive in three days’ time.(与将来时连用)
My brother’s birthday is in two weeks’ time.（作表语）
I’ll finish the book within two weeks.(within = in less than…用于各种时态，不超出，在……之内)
（6）地点介词at、on、in、to、across、through、over、under、below。
①at 在较小的场所，in在较大的场所，on在……的平面上。如at the
door、at the airport、at the station、at 55 Park Street、in China、in the north、in Asia、on the desk、on the wall等。
②on、at、in还可以表示两地相对位置。若A地属于B地，用in;A地位于B地的外面且有边缘衔接用on；无边缘的衔接有to。如：
Japan lies to the east of China.(范围之外)
Taiwan lies in the southeast of China.（范围之外）
Hunan province lies on the west of Hubei province.(毗邻)
The island lies off the coast of China.(相隔一定距离)
③地点介词的引申、比喻意义：in the sun在阳光下，in the dark(ness)在黑暗中，in the dark不知道，in freezing weather在严寒天气中，in the mud在泥中，in the earth在地下,in the desert在沙漠中,in a heavy rain 在大雨中，in the snow / wind在雪/风中,in public 当众，in trouble 在困境中，get into trouble陷入困境，out of trouble摆脱困难，beyond hope绝望。
④across在物体表面“穿过”；through则表示在三维空间内部“穿过”。如：
They walked across the playground.
I walked through the forest.
⑤over / under / above / below。
over、above译作“在……之上”；under、below译作“在……的下面”，其区别在于over、under表示一种直接的、垂直的上下关系；而above、below则表示一般的“高于”或“低于”，不一定是垂直“在上”或“在下”。如：
A little boat is now under the bridge.
There is a bridge over the river.
The sun sinks below the horizon(地平线)
The window is well above the tree.
⑥表示地点介词的静态性和动态性
He walked to the station（静态，表示方向和目的地）
He walked towards the station.(动态，只表示方向)
He is kind to (towards)us.（两者通用）
He is at the station.(静态，表示地点)
They arrived at the station.(动态，表示地点)
He swam away from the ship.(动态“离开”)
He stood away from the shop.(静态“远离”)
He fell onto the floor.(动态“到地面”)
The city is on the Changjiang River.(静态“平面”)
Go off the road.偏离了道路（动态“离去”）
Come along the river.沿着河过来（线）
across the fields 跨过田野……，over the desert跨越沙漠
across the river横跨这条河……，over the hill翻过这座山
be in the house(静态，在这里……)stay out of the car(静态，在……外)
go into the house(动态，进入)fly out of the country(动态，离开)
（7）表示方式、手段、工具的介词
①by the year/hour/day按年/小时/天。如He rent a house by the year(day,hour).(按by+the+单位名称)但to the pound按磅算，to the ton按吨计。
②表泛指的方式、手段
by post/mail邮寄，by telephone(radio),但on the phone/on the radio/on TV(电讯器材)，by electricity用电，by machinery用电器，by hard work,learn sth.by heart,through the satellite,through practice,through his own efforts,through experience,through the telescop
③交通工具类
by bus/train/car/taxi(road)
by bike/bicycle,on horse back/on foot
by plane/jet/spaceship,by air
by ship/boat/lifeboat,by sea/by water
另外：by means of 用……方法，by way of 经由，取道于，用……方法，with the help (permission)of sb./with sb.’s help (permis-
sion)。
④表方式、手段的其他用法
He beat the dog with a whip.(with+工具机器)
One smells with his nose.(with+人体器官，但by hand“手工，用手”)
He stood up with pride.(with+情绪、情感、态度的名词)
注意：使用语言、材料、文字等用in。如in English(ink,pencil)。另外如：in high (good,low)spirits,in anger,in joy,in comfort,in sorrow,in safety,in danger,in need,in debt,in love,in fun,in pain,in tears,in surprise,in good(poor)health,in good order,in flower,in a way,in a low voice,in silence,in(with)satisfaction,in a hurry,in(with)words,live/feed on food,kneel on one’s knee,take(catch)sb.by surprise(出其不意)
（8）表示“除……之外”的几组常用介绍比较。
①besides 除……以外，（还有）。作副词时意思是“而且，更何况”。
Well all went to the cinema besides Shaw.除了肖外，我们都去了电影院。
It was too late to see a film, and besides, I was tired.
②except除去，除……之外（不再有）。
We all went except John.我们都去了，约翰没有。
在否定句中，两词可以换用，如：
He has no other hats except / besides this one.
③except for除了……（对句子主题进行细节校正或附加说明）后接名词、代词或what从句，此时与except that + 句子意思相同。
He was very clever except for carelessness.
④except that … 除了……一点以外。
He has not changed except that he is wearing dark glasses.
⑤but与except
but和except在表示“除了……以外”时可以通用，但应注意以下三点：
①前面有不定人词、疑问代词在意义上对称时，多用but。
All but one are here.
Nobody but I likes making model ships.
②后接不定式短语为排除对象时，多用but。
He has nothing to do but wait.（前有do,后省to）
③but与一些固定结构连用。
have no choice but to do sth.只得做某事，can not but do sth.不得不,can not help but do sth.不得不……，but for … 如不是……
（9）between与among.
between通常指两者之间。也可以用于三者以上的两者之间。如：
Ann is between Tom and Bill.
Switzer land lies between France, Germany, Australia and Italy.
They soon finished the work between themselves.(共同，合作)
She was busy between cooking, washing, sewing and looking after the baby.(表示接连不断地，一个接一个地忙这忙那)
A horse can be seen between trees now.
among表示三者以上之间。如：
The story is said to have happened in a village among the hills.
He was happy to be among friends again.
We must agree among ourselves.(一起，共同)我们必须达成共识。
London is among the largest cities.( = one of与最高级连用)
（10）表原因的介词for、because of、due to。
He didn’t come to the meeting because of his illness.
The reason for his coming late is that he was ill.
He was praised for his bravery and courage.
The accident is due to your careless driving.
(11)不定式复合结构中的for、of。
这里所说的不定式复合结构形式指的是for 或of加上人或事，作动词不定式逻辑主语的结构。
①It is clever of you to answer it like that.
②It is quite hard for me to explain why.
注意：两句中的of和for的使用，表语形容词能够说明不定式逻辑主语的性质、特征与面貌时用of,如果说明不定式行为本身的性质、状态等则用for。
（12）兼作连词和副词的介词。
①after、since、till / still、before这些词既是介词，又是连词。
The children went home at once after school.
They went to bed after they had finished the job.
②in、on、along、down、up、after、before、along、beyond等介词可兼作副词。
He ran down the hill.（介词）
Can you lift that box down from the shelf for me ?(副词)
③有的介词可以兼作连词和副词。
All the students got to school before me.(before为介词)
We do want to buy something now before prices go up.(连词)
Haven’t I seen you before?(before为副词)
（13）介词的省略。
①表示时间的介词on、at 、in的省略。在next、last、yesterday、tomorrow、each、one、any、every、all等词之前，可以省略，也可以不省略。如（at）last weekend、（on）that day等。
②介词for表示时间的省略要求。（A）以all开头的名词短语，for要省略。如：I stayed with her all he morning.（B）表示一段时间的短语之前，for可以省略，也可以不省略。如：I have been waiting hereI (for) more than three hours.（C）否定句中，表示时间的短语前的for不能省略。如：I haven’t seen you for thirty years.(D)时间状语在主句之前，for不能省略。如：For the whole morning,the old man kept reading.
③某些动词短语之后的介词可以省略。
Nothing can prevent me(from)doing the job.
She spent nearly two hours(in)translating it.
（14）某些名词与介词构成的固定搭配。
①要求接to的名词有：key、answer、visit、entrance、apology、introduction、road等。
②要求接in 的名词有：interest、satisfaction、expert等。
He is expert in teaching small children.
(15)几个常用的并列连词。
①both … and, either … or, neither … nor
both … and“双方都”，连接句子的两个主语时，其后谓语动词通常用使用复数形式。either … or与neither … nor注意采取“就近原则”。
②not only … but also, as well as
注意：两者强调对象不同，not only … but also强调的是but also之后部分，而as well as则强调其前面的部分。not only … but also采取“就近原则”，而as well as只是一个插入语，采取“就远原则”。如：
Mr.Smith, as well as his wife and children, has come to Nanjing for a visit.
not only … but also结构中的not only可用于句首，连接两个分句时，第一个从句主谓要倒装。
Not only is he clever ,but also he is hard working.
（16）几个常用的从属连词。
①when、while、as都表示“当……时候”，when引导的从句的动作与主句的动词可同时发生，也可先后发生；as、while引导的从句则强调主句和从句的动作同时发生。如：
When I go to the station, the train had already left.
He sang merrily as he was working.
②till、until均表示“到……时候止”，肯定句中的谓语必须是延续性动作。如：I worked till late at night.若主句谓语是终止性动词，则主句要用否定形式，意为动作“到……才……”开始发生。如：
She didn’t get up until her mother came in.
注意：till和until通常情况下可以互换，只是在句首时until比till更常用。
③though、although均引导让步状语从句，意为“虽然……”，although较正式，though最常用。如：
Thouth (Although)he was tired,he kept on working.
注意：though、although引导的从句不能与but、however连用，但可以与yet、still连用。though还可以与别的词结合使用，如even though、
as though,而although则不能这样搭配。
④no sooner … than、hardly … when、as soon as三者都表示“一……就”，“刚刚……就”的意思。（A）as soon as 置于主句前后都可以，而且有备各种时态。如：As soon as she gets here I’ll tell her about
it. Mary left as soon as the finished the work.(B)hardly … when、no sooner … than不能表示将来的事，其主句的谓语动词一般用过去完成时，从句用过去时。若将hardly或no sooner放在句首，句子要倒装。如：No sooner had he arrived than he went away again.
⑤某些表示时间的名词（词组）也可用作从属连词。它们是：the moment, the minute,the instant, the day, the time, the first(second, third …)time, the spring (summer, autumn,winter),every(each,next,
any) time(day),by the time,都可引导时间状语从句。如：
His mother died the spring he returned.
Call me up the minute he arrives.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The home improvements have taken what little there is _________my spare time.(NMET 2001)
A.from B.in C.of D.at
解析：答案为C。本题考查句子结构中介词of的有法。what引导的从句作谓语have taken的宾语，而从句中的基本句型为“there is little of …”,表示“……有很少”，what 修饰little提到了从句句首。注意正确把握句子结构和介词用法，要明白of my spare time和in my spare time的区别。
2. ____________ production up by 60%, the company has had another excellent year.(NMET 2000)
A.As B.For C.With D.Through
解析：答案为C。本题考查with的复合结构作状语的用法。“with + 名词 + 不定式/分词/名词/形容词/介词短语等”可在句中作伴随、时间、原因、条件等状语。本题中with的复合结构作伴随状语。
3. The changes in the city will cost quite a lot, ___________they will save us money in the long run.（2000春季高考题）
A.or B.since C.for D.but
解析：答案为D。本题考查并列连词or、for、but和从属连词的意义和用法。并列连词or通常表示选择关系；for表示因果关系；but表示转折关系；从属连词since表示原因。通过比较前后两个分句意思可知，它们是转折关系。
4. After she considered the problem, she got a tall box to stand ________.
A.on B.up C.above D.by
解析：答案为A。不定式“to stand + 介词”作定语修饰a tall box,其中被修饰词在逻辑意义上是不及物动词，只有加上吊尾介词，句子意思才完整。吊尾介词往往由于受到汉语的影响而缺少，吊尾介词使用的场合有：
（1）定语从句中，先行词被一个不及物动词所修饰，不及物动词后要接介词，先行词被“动词 + 介词”组成的短语动词所修饰，介词常在句尾。
He is the man I just spoke to.
(2)what、whose、who、whatever等引导的宾语从句，宾语从句出现吊尾介词。
I can’t imagine what it is like.
(3) 强调句型，特殊疑问句中由于被强调部分和疑问词位置变更，常出现吊尾介词。
It was the poor boy that we gave the books to.
What for? Where to? Who with?
(4)不及物动词的不定式修饰表“涉及对象、场合、工具、方式、材料”等意义的名词时常带吊尾介词。
a room to live in, a bench to sit on
There is nothing to worry about.
She is a good girl to work with.
(5)某些形容词后接不定式或“动词 + 介词”型短语，动词的不定式形式表“反射”，常用吊尾介词。
①fit、easy、hard、comfortable、difficult、heavy等形容词后。
②The river is good to swim in.
The box is too heavy to carry.
③be worth doing sth.,be worthy of being done / to be done, want/
require / need doing
介词与连词
1．We offered him our congratulations his passing the college entrance exams．
A．at B．0n C．for D．of
2．Let’s walk over——the sun．
A．in B．to C．under D．by
3．We’re all going to the games．Why don’t you come ?
A．up B．across C．along D．to
4．If you are worried about the problem，you should do something it．
A．about B．for C．against D．with
5．I wanted two seats Madame Curie for Friday night，so I rang the cinema to see if I could book two tickets．
A．of B．about C．to D．for
6．He thought the jar made of earth little value and 1et me have it only one dollar．
A．with；for B．of；for C．of；by D．with；by
7．We can’t feel that we are going forward as everythjng us is moving the same speed．
A．around；at B．around；with C．before；at D．with；in
8．The two rings are so alike that it is difficult to tell one the other．
A．very；to B．much；to C．much；from D．very；from
9．It’s so nice to go out for a walk a cool nice summer evening．
A．in B．on C．for D．a
10．He decided to the matter himself．
A．look through B.look into C．look after D．look up
11．I ran an old friend of mine yesterday，whom I hadn’t seen for ages．
A．across B．cross C．after D．for
12．The scientist is well known us his great achievement．
A．to；for B．by；for C．by；as D．to；in
13．This article is quite me．There are too many new words
A．above B．against C．upon D．beyond
14．Does John know any other foreign languages French？
A．except B．but C．besides D．beside
15．She thought I was talking about her daughter， ，in fact，I was talking about my daughter．
A．whom B．where C．which D．while
16．They were surprised that a child should work out the problem they themselves couldn’t．
A．once B．then C．while D．if
17．My name is Robert， most of my friends call me Bob for short．
A．then B．instead C．however D．but
18．—I don’t like reading watching TV．What about you?
—I don’t like reading all day， I 1ike watching TV plays．
A．and；but B．and；and C．or；and D．or；but
19．It was raining hard， ，the peasants went on with their work．
A．but B．and C．however D．although
20．—What do you want those old boxes?
—To put things in when I move to the new flat．
A．by B．for C．of D．with
介词与连词
1-5 BACAD 6-10 BACBB 11-15 AADCD 16-20 CDDCC
一、考点聚焦
1、形容词、副词的作用与位置
形容词是用来修饰名词的，常被放在名词前作定语，或放在系动词后面作表语。而副词则用来修饰形容词、动词，其他副词或者句子，一般位于形容词之前，动词之后或句子之首。以下属几种特殊情况，须牢记；
（1）形容词短语作定语，定语后置。
a language difficult to master, a leaning tower about 180 feet high
（2）表语形容词（afraid、alike、alone、asleep、awake、alive等）作定语，定语后置。如a man alive。有些表身体健康状况的形容词如well、faint、ill只作表语。sick既可作表语又可作定语，ill如作定语意为“bad”。
（3）用作定语，修饰由不定代词one、no、any、some和every构成的复合词如anything、something等时，通常后置。如：
I have something important to tell you.
（4）else常用作疑问代词和不定代词的后置定语。
（5）enough、nearby修饰名词前置或后置，程度副词一般位于形容词、副词前面，enough修饰形容词、副词时，必须后置。
（6）几个副词并列作状语时，其顺序较灵活，但一般是：方式→地点→时间。如：
We had a good time together outdoors last Sunday.
（7）频度副词如often、always、usually等在be动词后，行为动词前。（8）副词作定语，定语后置。如：
The person there is waiting for you.
（9）几个并列的形容词作定语，其语序通常为：限定语（The、A）+ 描绘性形容词 + size（大小）+ shape（形状）+ age（年龄、时间）+ color（颜色）+ origin（国籍、来源）+ material（材料）+ purpose（目的）+ 名词。如：
a heavy black Chinese steel umbrella,
the man’s first tow interesting little red French oil paitings
（10）以-ly结尾的词性辨析。
①下列单词以-ly结尾，但却是形容词而非副词：lively、lonely、lovely、deadly、friendly、ugly、silly、likely、brotherly、timely等。
②表愿意（无-ly）和引申意(有-ly)的副词：
deep深 wide宽广 high高 low位置低
deeply深入地 widely广泛地 highly高度地 lowly地位卑微
③有无-ly意义大不相同的副词：
dead完全，绝对be dead asleep
deadly非常be deadly tired
pretty相当be pretty certain that…
prettily漂亮地be prettily dressed
close近Don’t sit close.
closely密切地Watch closely!
late晚、迟arrive late, come late
lately最近I haven’t seen him lately(recently).
2、复合形容词的构成
（1）形容词 + 名词 + ed
kind-hearted好心的，white-haired白发的
(2)形容词 + 形容词
red-hot炽热的，dark-blue深蓝的
（3）形容词 + 现在分词
good-looking好看的，easy-going随和的
（4）副词 + 现在分词
hard-working勤劳的，fast-moving快速转动的
（5）副词 + 过去分词
hard-won得来不易的，newly-made新建的
（6）名词 + 形容词
life-long终生的，world-famous世界闻名的
（7）名词 + 现在分词
peace-loving爱好和平的，fun-loving爱开玩笑的
（8）名词 + 过去分词
snow-covered白雪覆盖的，hand-made手工的
（9）数词 + 名词 + ed
four-storeyed 4层楼的，three-legged 3条腿的
（10）数词 + 名词（名词用单数）
ten-year 10年的,two-man两人的
3、形容词和副词的比较等级
（1）原级的构成和用法。
构成：形容词、副词的原级即本身。
用法：表示双方在程度、性质、特征等某方面相等时，用“as + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构；表示双方不相等时，用“not so(as) + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构；表示一方是另一方的若干倍时，用“倍数 + as + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构。如： Xiao Wang is as tall as Xiao Yu.
This building looks not so (as)high as that one.
Miss Xu speaks English as fluently as you .
This room is three times as large as that one.
（2）比较级和最高级的构成。
掌握比较级和最高级的变化规则，熟记少数不符合规则的特殊形容词和副词。
（3）比较级的用法。
①对方比较，表示一方超过另一方时，用“比较级 + than”的结构表示。如：
This picture is more beautiful than that one.
②表示一方不及另一方时，用“less + 原级 + than”的结构表示。如：
This room is less beautiful than that one.
③表示一方超过另一方的程度或数量时，可在比较级前加表示程度的状语，如even、a lot、a bit、a little、still、much、far、yet、by fay等修饰。如：
He works even harder than before.
注意：英语的比较级前如无even、still或yet等时，译成汉语时可用“较”或“…一些”或不译出，一般不可有“更”。如：
She is better than she was yesterday
Please come earlier tomorrow.
另注意：by far通常用于强调最高级。用于比较级时，一般放在比较级的后面，如在前面，应在二者中间加“the”。如：
He is taller by far than his brother.
He is by far the taller of the two brothers.
④表示一方随另一方的程度而变化时，用“the + 比较级（主语 + 谓语），the + 比较级（主语 + 谓语）”的结构（意为“越……越……”）。如：
The harder he works, the happier he feels.
⑤不与其他事物相比，表示本身程度的改变时，用“比较级 + and + 比较级”的结构。如：
The weather is getting colder and colder.
The girl becomes more and more beautiful.
⑥某些以-ior结尾的形容词进行比较时，用to代替than。这些词有inferior（劣等的，次的）、superior（较好的，优于……）、junior（资历较浅的）、senior（资格较老的）、prior（在……之前）等。
He is superior to Mr.Zhang in chemistry.
⑦在比较从句中为了避免重复，我们通常用that(those)、one(ones)代替前面出现的名词。that指物,one既可指人又可指物。that可代替可数名词单数和不可数名词，而one只能代替可数名词。
The book on the table is more interesting than that(或the one)on the desk.
A box made of steel is stronger than one made of wood.
⑧倍数表达法。（A）A is three(four, etc.)times the size(height, length etc.)of B.这座新楼是那座旧楼的四倍大（高）。The new bui9lding is four times the size(the height)of the old one.这座新楼比那座旧楼大三倍（高三倍）。（B）A is three(four, etc.)times as big(high, long, etc.)as B. Asia is four times as large as Europe.亚洲比欧洲大三倍。（C）A is three (four, etc.)times bigger(higher, longer, etc.)than B. Your school is three times bigger than ours.你们的学校比我们的学校大三倍。用times 表倍数通常用于三倍以上，两倍可以用twice或double.
(4)最高级的用法。
①三者或三者以上相比，表示最高程度时，用“the + 最高级”的结构表示。这种句式一般常有表示比较范围的介词短语。如：
Zhang Hua is the tallest of the three.
He works(the)hardest in his class.
②最高级可被序数词以及much、by far、nearly、almost 、by no means、not quite、not really、nothing like等词语所修饰。如：
This hat is by far / much / nearly / almost / not nearly / by no means / not quite / nothing like the biggest.
How much did the secon most expensive hat cost?
③表示“最高程度”的形容词，如excellent、extreme、perfect等，没有最高级，也不能用比较级。
④形容词最高级修饰作表语或介词宾语的名词、代词时，被修饰的词往往省略。如：
He is the tallest(boy)in his class.
⑤作状语的副词最高级前可以不加定冠词。如：
Of all the boys he came(the)earliest.
(5)形容词和副词前面使用冠词的情况。
①形容词最高级前一般要加定冠词，副词最高级前可不加冠词。
②形容词最高级前有时加不定冠词，或不加冠词，不表比较，表示“非常”。如：
He is a most clever young policeman.(a most=very)
The film is most interesting.(most=very)③表示两者间“较……的一个”比较级前加the。如：
who is the older of the tow boys?
④在“the + 比较级…，the + 比较级…”结构中。
⑤在same前一般要加the。
⑥有些形容词前加the 成为名词。如the poor、the rich 等。
（6）由as / so组成的形容词或副词短语。
① as much as + 不可数名词数量。
Each stone weighs as much as fifteen tons.
She could earn as much as ten dollars a week.
②as many as + 可数名词数量 多达
I have as a many as sixteen referrence books.
③as early as早在
As early as the twelfth century the English began to invade the island.
④as far as远到；就……而知（论）
We might go as far as (走到)the church and back.
As far as I know（就我所知），he has been there before.
⑤may (might, could)as well不妨、不如
Then you might as well stay with us here.
⑥as … as can be到了最……的程度，极其
They are as unreliable as they can be.他们极其不可信。
⑦as … as one can
He began to run, as fast as he could.
⑧as … as possible
Just get them to finish up as quickly as possible.
(7)几组重要的词语辨析。
①very 和much的区别。（A）可分等级的形容词和副词前使用very不用much。(B)表示状态的过去分词前用very。a very frightened boy, a very tired child, a very complicated problem, 一般的情况下，以-ing、-ed结尾的分词多用much、very much / greatly等修饰。如：We were greatly shocked by the news about Tom. I was much amused by Jack’s attitude。(C)已转化为形容词的现在分词前用very。如：very interesting / worrying / exicting。（D）too前用much或far,不用very。You are much / far / a lot too nice.另外，在too many / much, too few / little前用far。 There’s far too little opportunity for adventue these days.We’ve got far too many eggs and far too few egg cups.（E）关于原级形容词要记住下列固定的修饰结构：（a）修饰绝对意义的形容词，一般不用very,而用quite completely、well、entirely。如：quite wrong(mistaken, sure)、completely dead、quite impossible、quite perfect等。（b）修饰以a-开头的形容词，多有特殊的修饰词：quite alone, very much alone, wide awake, fast asleep, very much afraid。(c)修饰一些特殊形容词的修饰语有：be well worth, much the same, freezing cold, quite different, terribly cold / frightening。
②so … that … 与such … that … 的区别。
so + 形容词 / 副词 + that …
so + 形容词 + a（n）+ 单数可数名词 + that …
so + many / much / little / few + 名词 + that …
such + a(n)+ 形容词+单数可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 复数名词 + that …
注意：下列结构中只能用so不可用such,当名词前有many、much、little、few等表示“多、少”的词修饰时，如 so much progress、so many people、so little food、so few apples等。但当little表示“小”时用such。如：These are such little boys that they can’t dress themselves.下列so的用法是错误的：so a diffcult problem,so difficult problems, so hot weather。
③其他几组词的辨析。（A）ago、before:ago表示以现在为起点的“以前”；before指以过去或将来的某时刻为起点的“以前”。泛指“以前”用before而不用ago。（B）already、yet、still:already表示某事已经发生；yet表示期待某事发生；still表示某事还在进行，主要用于肯定句。
(C)too、also、either:too和also用于肯定句，too多用于口语，also多用于书面语，either用于否定句。(D)good、well:与good不同的是，well作形容词，只能在系动词后作表语，表示“身体状况好”，也作副词修饰动词。(E)quick、fast:作形容词皆表“快”。fast多指运动的物体，含持续的意思。quick多指一次动作的敏捷、突然，而且持续的时间较短。(F)real、true:形容词表“真的”。real强调真实存在的而不是幻想的，在句中常作定语；true指与事实标准和实际情况相符合，在句中作表语或定语。(G)hard、difficult:均表“困难”，但hard通常指体力上困难；difficult则指智力或技能上的困难，困难程度大于hard。它们都可作定语和表语。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. It is generally believed that teaching is ___________it is a science.（NMET 2001）
A.an art much as B.much an art as
C.as an art much as D.as much an art as
解析：答案为D。本题可从考查形容词的同级比较点入手。在同级比较as…as句式中，如果as后面的形容词作定语且其所修饰的名词前有不定冠词时，该冠词须置于形容词之后，即形成“as + 形容词 + a / an + 单数可数名词 + as”结构。这道题在名词专题中也有解析，不同的是观察视角不同，应注意培养发散思维。
2. It is always difficult being in a foreign country, __________if you don’t speak the language.(NMET 2000)
A.extremely B.naturally C.basically D.especially
解析：答案为D。本题考查副词的词义辨析。注意掌握词语的准确含义，结合语境进行分析。A项意为“极端地”；B项意为“自然地”；C项“基本上”；D项“尤其，特别地”。根据句意“如果你不会讲（它的）语言，在国外你就总会困难重重”可知答案。
3. Professor White has written some short stories, but he is ______known for his plays.(NMET 1998)
A.the best B.more C.better D.the most
解析：答案为C。本题考查副词的比较级和最高级。要把握句式之间的联系，抓住句子的隐藏信息，结合语境进行分析。根据句意，句中but后应有一词组be well known for…。同时，应注意到前后两个分句把professor White的短篇小说和戏剧进行了对比，故应用well的比较级。
形容词与副词
1．If we had followed his plan，we could have done the
job better with money and people．
A．1ess；less B．fewer；fewer C．1ess；fewer D．fewer；less
2．It is impossible for so workers to do so work in a single day．
A．few；much B．few；many C．1ittle；much D．little；many
3．—If you don’t like the red coat，take the blue one．
—0K，but do you have size in blue?This one is a bit tight for me．
A．big B．a bigger C．the big D．the bigger
4．After the new technique was introduced，the factory produced tractors in 1988 as the year before．
A．as twice many B．as many twice C．twice as many D．twice many as
5．—How did you find your visit to the museum?
—I thoroughly enjoyed it．It was than I expected．
A．far more interesting B．even much interesting
C．so more interesting D．a lot much interesting
6．If there were no examinations，we should have at schoo1．
A．the happiest time B．a more happier time C．much happiest time D．a much happier time
7．On the river there is bridge．
A．an old fine stone B．a fine new wood
C．a stone fine old D．a new wood fine
8．If I had ，I’d visit Europe，stopping at all the small interesting places．
A．a long enough holiday B．an enough long holiday
C．a holiday enough long D．a long holiday enough
9．It Was raining heavily．Little Mary felt cold，so she stood to her mother．
A．close B．closely C．closed D．closing
10．The means of getting from place to place in
the city is the bus．
A．most commonly useful public B．most commonly public used
C．public used more commonly D．most commonly used public
11.Alice is going camping with girls．
A．1ittle two other B．two other little
C．two 1ittle other D．1ittle 0ther two
12.Where have you been days?
A．all last these few B．these all last few
C．1ast all few these D．all these last few
13.He has made progress that all of us want to learn from him．
A．such a good B．so good a
C．a so good D．such good
14.All the people at the party were his supporters.
A．present B．thankful C．interested D．important
15.This kind of apple tastes and sells
A．well；well B．good；good C．good；well D．well；good
16．The storm kept me all through the night．
A．awake B．awoke C．awaked D．awaken
17．My brother was still studying into the night while I was asleep．
A．1ate；sound B．1ately；wide C．deeply；far D．far；late
18．The temperature of a person is about 37℃．
A．formal B．normal C．common D．usual
19．I’m always very when I was asked to recite the text in class．
A．curious B．nervous C．mysterious D．sad
20．It Was impossible for her to get the 9 o’clock train，I know she got up at
9：15．
A．quite B．very C．too D．much
形容词与副词
1-5 CABCA 6-10 DBAAD 11-15 BDDAC 16-20 AABBA
最常用于表示替代关系的词语有it, that, which, one, so等，近几年高考试题中均对这些词的用法进行了考查，可见这几个替代词的用法非常重要。下面归纳它们表示替代时的不同用法。
一、it的用法
1、it指代上文所提事物的本身（it表时间、强调等的用法此处不阐明），如果所代替的事物为复数，则应该用they或them表示。
2、it也可以用来代替上文所提到的一件事。
1.The Parkers bought a new house but _____ will need a lot of work before they can move in. (NMET2001,25)
A.they B.it C.one D.which
2.I am looking for a house. I’d like ____ with a brook around_____.
A.one,it B.it,it C.one,one D.it,one
3.Mary’s mother always told her to work hard, but______didn’t help.
A.one B.he C.she D.it
4. —Do you like these photos? — Yes, ____are very beautiful and I like____ very much.
A.they,those B.they,them C.ones,ones D.the ones, the ones
5.—Are you still using your old car? --No, I sold___the other day.
A.it B.one C.that one D.the one
6.Yesterday I lost my pen, but now I have found_____.
A.it B.them C.ones D.those
7.—Where are my books? --_____ are on the TV set.
A.Ones B.Those C.The ones D.They
8.Where have you put my shoes? I can’t find_____anywhere.
A.them B.those C.ones D.the ones
9.Where did you buy the watch? Would you please get____ for me?
A.it B.one C.the one D.them
10.Don’t read in the sun. ____ is bad for your eyes.
A.One B.The one C.It D.This
二、that的用法
1、that用来指前文中确定的非同一事物，常用来替代与定冠词或形容词性物主代词连用的单数可数名词或不可数名词，相当于“the+名词”，其复数形式为those。
2、that表替代时为始终是特指（作指示代词和关系代词用时另论），可指上文谈到的人、物或情况（均为单数），可代替可数名词和不可数名词。
3、若that所代替的内容为前置用法，即要代替的内容将出现在下文中，一般用this,these或the following表示。
1.—He was nearly drowned once
—When was_______?(NMET2002 Beijing spring)
—_____was in 1998 when he was in middle school.
A.that,It B.this,This C.this,It D.that,This
2.Equipped with modern facilities, today’s libraries differ from______ (2003 Shanghai spring,26)
A.those of the past B.the past C.which of the past D.those past
3.Few pleasure can equal __of a cool drink on a hot day. (NMET99,17; NMET99 Guangdong,29)
A.some B,any C.that D.those
4.The population of Sichuan Province is larger than ____of any province in China.
A.one B.it C.that D.the one
5.What I want to suggest is_____: Everyone should have another try. We needn’t only wait for help.
A.that B.this C.it D.one
6.You see, the accident happened like_____: The red car hit the bus and made all the traffic stop.
A.that B.this C.it D.one
7.Listen! ________ is about the lessons we will have to finish today.
A.It B.The one C.The following D.One
8.The climate here is quite different from____ of Shengyang.
A.that B.it C.one D.the one9.The study of idioms is as important as____ of grammar.
A.one B.that B.it D.this
10.My seat is next to_____ of my teacher.
A.that B.it C.this D.one
三、which的用法
1、在后置的非限制性定语从句中代替上文出现的事物或情况（单数或复数）。
2、在问句中作为疑问代词，在名词从句中作为连接代词用，其含义为“哪个、哪些”。
3、如果非限制性定语从句的先行词不是指主句内容，而是指具体的人、时间、地点，则不用which。
4、如果非限制性定语从句前置，则用as。
1.Dorothy was always speaking highly of her role in the play, _____, of course, made the others unhappy. (NMET2000,17)
A.who B.which C.this D.what
2.The result of the experiment was very good, which we hadn’t expected. (NMET2000 Beijing spring,10)
A.when B.that C.which D.what
3.China has its own English language newspaper, China Daily,______is published in Beijing.
A.that B.it C.which D.one
4.China Daily has plenty of advertisements, _____ help to cut the costs of making the newspapers.
A.that B.it C.which D.they
5._____ would you like better, the blue one or the red one?
A.Which B.What C.That D.How
6.I don’t know in_____ direction the thief ran away.
A.whose B.what C.which D.where
7.The old scientist went to the U.S.A in 1921, _____ he spent his last years.
A.which B.when C.where D.that
8.____we all know, China is developing at a great speed to catch up with the western countries.
A.Which B.That C.It D.As
9.At last we came to an old castle, _____ roof was in a bad state.
A.which B.what C.whose D.that
10.The man was standing behind the window, _____ he could see what was happening outside the house.
A.from which B.from where C.where D.which
四、one 的用法
1、 常用来代替与上文所提到人或物相类似的不确定的另一人或物（泛指），且被替代者为可数名词单
数形式。
2、 若下文替代者表示非特指含义，则用a/an—adj—one形式表示；若下文替代者为另一特指含义，
则用the one或the—adj—one表示；若下文替代时为复数含义，则用the—adj—ones 或the ones表示。
3、 one作替代词用时，其前可加某些形容词或限定词，如the,this,that,which,each,every,any，但一般不
能直接在其前加物主代词。
4、one被后置定语修饰表示特指时，前面应加the；被形容词修饰表示泛指时，其前应加a/an；被形容词修饰表示特指时其前应加the。
5、one作主语时，其对应的物主代词用 one’s或 his，反身代词用 oneself或 himself，重复主语用 one 或he。
1.I hope there are enough glasses for each guest to have_______ . (NMET95,21)
A.it B.those C.them D.one
2.—Why don’t we take a little break? —Didn’t we just have________? (NMET2000,23)
A.it B.that C.one D.this
3.Meeting my uncle after all these years was an unforgettable moment, one I will always treasure. (NMET2002,35)
A.that B.one C.it D.what
4. —Did a letter come for me? —Yes, there was _______for you this morning.
A.one B.it C.the one D.that
5.He has a blue pen and two red ______.
A.one B.ones C.those D.the ones
6.I brought a necklace to you that day, but it was________.
A. a different one B.different one C.the different one D.different ones
7.I don’t like this blue cat, I’d like______.
A. the red one B.red one C.a red D.that red
8.I don’t like this expensive cake, _______ is OK.
A.cheap one B.that cheap C.a cheap one D.a cheap
9.____should love____country.
A.One,her B.She,her B.One,one’s D.One,ones
10.Such a drug will make_____ find it hard to go without it.
A.it B.that C.one D.ones
11.Yesterday I lost my pen, but I’ve bought______.
A.it B.that C.one D.the one
12.Young people like seeing the film, but old_____ don’t.
A.those B.ones C.one D.them
13.This book is_____that is needed by all of us.
A.it B.one C.that D.the one
14.He is_____who gave us the talk yesterday.
A.that B.one C.the one D.himself
15.Is this museum_____they paid a visit to yesterday?
A.that B.where C.the one D.which
16.Your old bike is_____, it’s much better than_____
A.a good one,my new one B.good one,my one
C.a good,my new one D.one good,new my one
17.This advice is different from_____.
A.that one B.that C.it D.the one
18.The books on the table are more than____ on the bookshelf.
A.they B.them C.those D.ones
19.A cake made of wheat costs less than____ made of rice.
A.one B.it C.those D.that
20.Do you like red ink or_____?
A.blue one B.blue C.the blue one D.red ink
21.The step you’ve taken is_____ of much risk.
A.one B.that C.it D.ones
22.I’m told you’ve got some foreign stamps. Will you please give me_____?
A.one B.it C.that D.the one
五、so的用法
1、so表示替代常用来代替上文中出现的内容，尤其是上文内容在下文中以宾语从句形式出现时。
2、如果在下文被代替者为否定含义的宾语从句，常用否定动词+so或直接用not代替。如：
1. —The boys are not doing a good job at all, are they?
—______.(NMET2003 Beijing spring,22)
A.I guess not so B.I don’t guess C.I don’t guess so D.I guess not
2. —Do you think it’s going to rain over the weekend?
—_____.(NMET94,13)
A.I don’t believe B.I don’t believe it C.I believe not so D.I believe not)
3. —Do you think it’s going to rain again? —I _____, but I _____.
A.think not,hope so B.not think,so hope C.don’t think so,don’t hope so D.think not,hope not
4.—Do you think it’s going to be fine ? --Yes, and I______.
A.expect that B.expect so C.expect it D.expect them
5.—Will they come back again? --No, I_____.
A.don’t believe B.not believe C.believe not D.don’t believe that
1、动词时态考查要点简述
（1）一般现在时考点分析
①表示客观事实或普通真理（不受时态限制）
The geography teacher told us the earth moves around the sun.
Water boils at 100oC.
②表示现状、性质、状态时多用系动词或状态动词；表示经常或习惯性的动作，多用动作动词，且常与表频率的时间状语连用。
Ice feels cold.
We always care for each other and help each other.
③表示知觉、态度、感情、某种抽象的关系或概念的词常用一般现在时：see、hear、smell、taste、feel、notice、agree、believe、like、hate、want、think、belong seem等。如：
I know what you mean.
Smith owns a car and a house.
All the students here belong to No.1 Middle School.
④在时间、条件状语从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。但要注意由if 引导的条件状语从句中可以用shall或will表“意愿”，但不表示时态。
If you will accept my invitation and come to our party, my family will be pleased.如果你愿意接受并参加我们的舞会，我的家人会非常高兴。
⑤少数用于表示起止的动词如come、go、leave、arrive、fly、return、start、begin、pen、close、end、stop等常用一般现在时代替将来时，表示一个按规定、计划或安排要发生的动作。当be表示根据时间或事先安排，肯定会出现的状态，只用一般现在时。 The shop closes at 11:00 p.m. every day.
Tomorrow is Wednesday.
（2）一般过去时的考点分析（考核重点）。
①一般过去时的基本用法：表示过去的事情、动作或状态常与表示过去具体的时间状语连用（或有上下文语境暗示）；用于表达过去的习惯；表示说话人原来没有料到、想到或希望的事通常用过去式。如：
I met her in the street yesterday.
I once saw the famous star here.
They never drank wine.
I thought the film would be interesting,but it isn’t.
②如果从句中有一个过去的时间状语，尽管从句中的动作先于主句发生，但从句中的谓语动词连用过去式。如：
He told me he read an interesting novel last night.
③表示两个紧接着发生的动作，常由以下词语连接，用一般过去时。如：but, and, when, as soon as, immediately, the moment, the minute。
The moment she came in, she told me what had happened to her.
He bought a watch but lost it.
④常用一般过去时的句型：
Why didn’t you / I think of that?
I didn’t notice it.
I forgot to tell you I had been there with my brother before.
I didn’t recognize him.
（3）一般将来时考点分析。
①表示未来的动作或状态常用will / shall + 动词（常与表示将来的时间状语边用如tomorrow、next week等）。
②表示一种趋向或习惯动作。
We’ll die without air or water.
③表示趋向行为的动词如come、go、start、begin、leave等词常用进行时的形式表示将来时。
④be going to与will / shall, be to do, be about to do用法及区别：
be going to 表示现在打算在最近或将来要做某事，这种打算往往经过事先考虑，甚至已做了某种准备；shall / will do表示未事先考虑过，即说话时临时作出的决定。
be going to 表将来，不能用在条件状语从句的主句中；而will则能，表意愿。如：
If it is fine, we’ll go fishing.(正确)
If it is fine, we are going to go fishing.(错误)
be to do sth.表按计划、安排即将发生的动作，还可表示吩咐、命令、禁止，可能性等。
A meeting is to be held at 3:00 o’clock this afternoon.
be about to do sth.表示“即可，就要”，后面不能接时间状语或状语从句。
Autumn harvest is about to start.
（4）现在进行时考点分析。
①表示说话时正在发生着的一个动作；表示现阶段但不一定是发生在讲话时；表近期特定的安排或计划；go、come等起止动作可用进行时代替将来时。如： It is raining now.
He is teaching English and learning Chinese.
I am meeting Mr. Wang tonight.
We are leaving on Friday.
At six I am bathing the baby.(I start bathing the bady before six.)
The girl is always talking loud in public.(与always、often等频度副词连用，表经常反复的行动或某种感情色彩)
②下面四类动词不宜用现在进行时。（A）表示心理状态、情感的动作：like, love, hate, care, remember, believe, want, mind, wish, agree, mean, need。（B）表存在的状态的动词：appear, exist, lie, remain, seem belong to, depend on。（C）表示一时性动作的动词：allow, accept, permit, promise, admit, complete。（D）表示感官的动词：see, hear, notice, feel, smell, sound, taste, look。
（5）过去完成时考点分析（考核重点）。
①常用过去完成时的几种情况：（A）在by、by the end、by the time、until、before、since后接表示过去某一时间的短语或从句以前发生的动作。如：By the end of last year, we had produced 20,000 cars. The train had left before we reached the station. (B)表示曾实现的希望、打算、意图、诺言等。常用had hoped / planned / meant / intended/
though / wanted / expected等或用上述动词过去式接不定式完成式表示即：hoped / planned … + to have done。（C）“时间名词 + before”在句子中作状语，谓语动词用过去完成时；“时间名词 + ago”在句中作状语，谓语动词用一般过去式。如：He said his first teacher had died at least 10 years before. Xiao Hua left school 3 years ago.（D）表示“一……就”的几个句型：Hardly / No sooner / Scarcely had + 主语 + 过去分词 + when / than / before + 一般过去时。如：We had no sooner been seated than the bus started. = No sooner had we been seated than the bus started.
②在before或after引导的时间状语从句中用一般过去时态代替过去完成时。
After he (had)left the room, the boss came in.
We arrived home before it snowed.
（6）过去将来时考点分析。
参照一般将来时对比：用would do、was / were going to do sth.表过去将来；come、go、leave等过去进行时表过去将来时；was / were to do sth.和was / were about to do sth.表过去将来。
（7）过去进行时考点分析。
①过去某一时刻正在进行的动作或某一阶段内发生或频繁发生。
②某一动作发生时另一动作正在发生，其中一个在由when或while引导的时间状语从句中。
（8）现在完成时考点分析。
①现在完成时除可以和for、since引导的状语连用外，还可以和下面的介词短语连用：during / in /over the last(past)few years (months, weeks)、in recent years等。
②下列句型中常用现在完成时
It is (has been) + 一段时间 + since从句
This(That / It)is the first(second…)time that + 完成时
This(That / It)is the only … + that + 完成时
This(that / It)is the best / finest / most interesting … + that 从句 + 完成时
③在时间或条件状语从句中，现在完成时可以代替一般将来时。如：
I shall post the letter as soon as I have written it.
If you have done the experiment, you will realize the theory better.
Don’t get off the bus until it has stopped.
（9）注意几组时态的区别：
①一般过去时与现在完成时：时间上有差异：凡有过去时间的均用过去时态，不能用完成时态，如含有ago、last year、just now、the other day等。
结果上有差异：现在完成时强调的是对“现在”的影响和结果，动作到现在刚完成或还在继续；一般过去时强调的是动作发生在“过去”，和现在毫无关系。
②过去完成时与一般过去时：过去完成时强调的是“过去的过去”；如出现同一主语连续几个动作（“连谓”）形式则只用一般过去时即可。
2、被动语态考查要点简述
被动语态的构成方式：be + 过去分词，口语只也有用get / become + 过去分词表示。被动语态的基本用法：不知道或没必要提到动作的执行者是谁时用被动语态。强调或突出动作的承受者常用被动语态（by短语有时可以省略）。
（1）使用被动语态时应注意的几个问题。
①主动变化被动时双宾语的变化。看下列例句。
My friend gave me an interesting book on my birthday. An interesting book was given to me(by my friend)on my birthday.
I was given an interesting book (by my friend)on my birthday.
②主动变被动时，宾补成主补（位置不变）；（作补语的）不定式前需加to。
The boss made him work all day long.
He was made to work all day long(by the boss)
③短语动词变被动语态时，勿要掉“尾巴”。
The children were taken good care of (by her).
Your pronunciation and spelling should be paid attention to.
④情态动词和be going to、be to、be sure to、used to、have to、had better等结构变被动语态，只需将它们后面的动词原形变为be +过去分词。
⑤当句子的谓语为say、believe、expect、think、know、write、consider、report等时，被动语态有两种形式：（A）谓语动词用被动语态，动词不定式作主补。（B）用it作形式主语，真正的主语在后面用主语在后面用主语从句来表示。如：
People say he is a smart boy.
It is said that he is a smart boy.
He is said to be a smart boy.
People know paper was made in China first.
It is known that paper was made in China first.
Paper was known to be made in China first.
类似句型有：It is said / known / suggested / believed / hoped/ thought that …
（2）不能用被动语态的几种情况。
①所有的不及物动词或不及物动词词组不能用于被动语态之中。
②表示状态的谓语动词，如：last、hold、benefit、contain、equal、fit、join、mean、last、look like、consist to等。
③表示归属的动词，如have、own、belong to等。
④表示“希望、意图”的动词，如：wish、want、hope、like、love、hate等。
⑤宾语是反身代词或相互代词时谓语动词用主动语态，不能用被动语态。
⑥宾语是同源宾语，不定式、动名词等谓语动词不用被动语态。
⑦有些动词以其主动形式表示被动意义，特别是当主语是物时，常见的动词有sell、write、wash、open、lock等。
（3）主动形式表被动意义。
①当feel、look、smell、taste、sound等后面接形容词时；当cut、read、sell、wear、write等词带状语修饰语时；当动词表示“开始、结束、关、停、转、启动”等意义时。
This kind of cloth washes easily.这种布易洗。
These novels won’t sell well.这些小说不畅销。
My pen writes smoothly.我的钢笔写起来很流畅。
The door won’t lock.门锁不上。
The fish smells good.鱼闻起来香。
②当break out、take place、shut off、turn off、work out等动词表示“发生、关闭、制定”等意思时。
The plan worked out successfully.
The lamps on the wall turn off.
③want, require, need后面的动名词用主动表示被动含义。
④be worth doing用主动形式表示被动含义。
⑤在“be + 形容词 + to do”中，不定式的逻辑宾语是句子的主语，用主动代被动。
This kind of water isn’t fit to drink.
The girl isn’t easy to get along with.
另外：be to blame(受谴责)，be to rent（出租）也用主动形式表被动。
（4）被动形式表示主动意义的几种情况。
①be seated坐着
He is seated on a bench.（He seats himself on a bench.）坐在凳子上。
②be hidden躲藏
He was hidden behind the door.(He hid himself behind the door.)他藏在门后。
③be lost迷路
④be drunk喝醉
⑤be dressed穿着
The girl was dressed in a red short skirt.
（5）被动语态与系表结构的区别
被动语态强调动作；系表结构表主语的特点或状态。如：
The book was sold by a certain bookstore.(被动语态)
The book is well sold.(系表结构)
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. Visitors ________not to touch the exhibits.(NMET 2001)
A.will request B.are requested
C.are requesting D.request
解析：答案为B。此题的时态是不难判断的，因为说的是一条规定，所以用一般现在时，而visitor与request之间是动宾关系，即request visitors not to touch the exhibits,究竟是谁要求他们这样做呢？不清楚，也不必知道，因此需要用被动语态。分析visitors与request之间的关系是此题的解题关键。
2. Selecting a mobile phone for personal use is no easy task because technology __________ so rapidly.(NMET 2001)
A.is changing B.has changed
C.will have changed D.will change
解析：答案为A。此题考查现在进行时态的用法。句意为“选择一部移动电话不是一件容易的事，因为科技发展得十分迅速。”本句的主句一般现在时表达的是目前的情况，而“科技发展迅速”也是现阶段正存在的一种状态，不是在过去，也不是在将来，因此只能用现在进行时表达。
3. All the preparations for the task ___________, and we’re ready to start.（2000年春季高考）
A.completed B.complete
C.had been completed D.have been completed
解析：答案为D。现在完成时表示过去年做的事对现在的影响。从and we’re ready to start句意可知，一切准备工作已经就绪，可以开始工作了。complete是及物动词，与句子的主语是被动关系，所以需要用被动语态表达。注意①分清complete与主语之间的关系；②结合语境选择正确时态。
动词的时态与语态
1．—We could have walked to the station．It was so near．
—Yes．A taxi at all necessary．
A．wasn’t B．hadn’t been C．wouldn’t be D．won’t be
2．When I got to the cinema，the film for the minutes．
A．has begun B．had begun C．had been on D．was on
3．If city noises from increasing，people shout to be heard even at the dinner table．
A． are not kept；will have to B．are not kept；have to
C．do not keep；will have to D．do not keep；have to
4．In some parts of the world，tea with milk and sugar.
A．is serving B．is severed C．serves D．served
5．—Do you like the material?
—Yes，it vety soft．
A．is feeling B．felt C．feels D．is felt
6．I don’t really work here．I until the new secretary arrives．
A．just help out B．have just helped out C．am just helping out D．will just help out
7．—You haven’t been to Beijing，have you?
— ．How I wish to go there!
A．Yes．I have B．Yes，I haven’t C．No．I have D．No，I haven’t
8．It is reported that by the end of this year，another school will ．
A．be built B．have built C．have been built D．have be built
9．—Hey，look where you are going!
— ——0h，I’m terribly sorry． ．
A．I’m not noticing B．1 wasn’t noticing C．I haven’t noticed D．I don’t notice
10．—How are you today?
— ——Oh，I as ill as I do now for a long time．
A．didn’t feel B．wasn’t feeling C．don’t fee D．haven’t felt
l1．Old McDonald gave up smoking for a while，but soon to his old ways．
A．returned B．returns C．was returning D．had returned
12．All the preparations for the task ，and we’re ready to start．
A．completed B．complete C．had been completed D．have been completed
13．He to the lab than he set out to do the experiment．
A．has no sooner got B．was supposed to
C．will no sooner get D．have no sooner got
14．The train arrive at 11：30 but it was an hour late．
A．would suppose B．was supposed to C．is supposed to D．supposed to
15．He stepped into the office， down and began to fill in the forms．
A．sitting B．to sit C．sat D．having sat
16．The little girl her heart out because she her toy bear and believed she wasn’t ever going to find it．
A．had cried；1ost B．cried；had lose
C．has cried；has lost D．cries；has 1ost
17．Both my brothers work at the power station that at my home town．
A．has set up B．has been set up C．was set up D．is set up
18．Linda has 1ost her passport again．It’s the second time this ．
A．has happened B．has been happened C．happened D．happens
19．—Sorry，I forgot to post the letter for you.
—Never mind， it myself tonight．
A．I’m going to post B．I’d better to post
C．I’ll post D．I’d rather post
20．He his leg when he in a football match against another schoo1．
A．broke；played B．was breaking；was playing
C．broke；was playing D．was breaking；played
21．—Where the recorder? I Can’t see it anywhere．
—I it right here．But now it’s gone．
A．did you put；have put B．have you put put
C．had you put；was putting D．were you putting；have put
22．Hello! I you in London．How long have you been here?
A．don’t know；were B．hadn’t known；are
C．have known；are D．didn’t know；were
23．—Come on，Peter．I want to show you something．
—Oh，how nice of you! I you to bring me a gift.
A．never think；are going B．never thought；were going
C．didn’t think；were going D．hadn’t thought；were going
24．All the teachers in this schoo1 are ．
A．clean dressing B．cleanly dressing C．clean dressed D．cleanly dressed
25．When I was at college I three foreign languages，but I all except a few words of each．
A．spoke；had forgotten B．spoke；have forgotten
C．had spoken；had forgotten D．had spoken；have forgotten
26．—Have you moved into the new house?
—Not yet．The rooms ．
A．are being painted B．are painting C．are painted D．are being painting
27．—Excuse me，sir．Would you do me a favor? of course．What is it?
—I if you could tell me how to fill out this form．
A．had wondered B．was wondering C．would wonder D．did wonder
28．—We haven’t heard from Jane for a long time．
— What do you suppose to her?
A．was happening B．to happen C．has happened D．having happened
29．I wonder why Jenny us recently．We should have heard from her by now．
A．hasn’t written B．doesn’t write C．won’t write D．hadn’t written
30．Mary a dress when she cut her finger．
A．make B．is making C．was making D．makes
31．—Do you know our town at all?
—No，this is the first time I here．
A．was B．have been C．came D．am coming
32．The last time I Jane she cotton in the fields．
A．had seen；was picking B．saw；picked
C．had seen；picked D．saw；was picking
33．Tom into the house when no one ．
A．slipped；was looking B．had slipped；looked
C．slipped；had looked D．was slipped；looked
34．We were all surprised when he made it clear that he office soon．
A．1eaves B．would leave C．1eft D．had left
35 The pen I I is on my desk，right under my nose．
A．think；lost B．thought；had lost
C．think；had lost D．thought；have 1ost
36．—Can I join the club，Dad?
—You can when you a bit older．
A．get B．will get C．are getting D．will have got
37．—I’m sorry to keep you waiting．
—0h，not at a11．I here only a few minutes．
A．have been B．had been C．was D．will be
38．You don’t have to describe her I her several times．
A．had met B．have met C．met D．most
动词的时态与语态
1-5 ACABC 6-10 CDCBD 11-15 ADDBC 16-20 BBACC 21-25 BDBDB 26-30 ABCAC
31-35 BDABB 36-38 AAB
1、语法形式上的一致
主语为单数形式，谓语动词用单数形式；主语为复数形式，谓语动词也用复数形式。
The number of students in our school is 1,700.
Mary and Kelly look alike.
2、意义上一致
（1）主语形式虽为单数，但意义为复数，谓语动词用复数。
The crowd were runing for their lives.
单数形式代表复数内容的词有people、police、cattle等。
（2）主语形式为复数，而意义上却是单数，谓语动词用单数。The news is very exciting.
形复意单的单词有new、works（工厂）、means和以ics结尾的学科名称physics、poli-tics、economics等。
3、就近原则。即谓语动词的单复数形式取决于最靠近它的词语。如果连词or、either … or、neither … nor、not only … but also等连接的并列主语，如果一个是单数，一个是复数，谓语动词与靠近它的主语一致。
Either you or I am mad.
4、应注意的若干问题
（1）名词作主语。
①某些集体名词如family、team等作主语时，如果作为一个整体看待，谓语用单数，反之用复数。
My family is going out for a trip.
The whole family are watching TV.这类词常有audience、class club、committee、company、crew、crowd、enemy、government、group、party、public、team等。
Population和“a group(crowd)of + 复数名词”也适用于这种情况，强调整体用单数，强调各个部分用复数。
②某些集体名词如people、police、cattle、oxen只当复数看待，谓语动词必须用复数。
③单、复数同形的名词作主语时，谓语动词应根据意义决定单、复数。
A sheep is over there. Some sheep are over there.
④名词所有格之后的名词被省略，这种情况一般只指商店、工场、住宅等；作主语时，动词一般用单数。My uncle’s is not for from here.
常见的省略名词有the baker’s 、the barbar’s、the Zhang’s等。
表示店铺的名词一般作集体名词看待，但用作主语时，谓语动词往往用复数。如：
Richardson’s have a lot of old goods to sell.
⑤当名词词组中心词为表示度量、距离、金额、时间、书名等复数名词时，往往可以根据意义一致的原则，把这些复数名词看作一个整体，谓语用单数。
Thirty years has passed.
Five minutes is enough to finish the task.
⑥不定代词each、every、no所修饰的名词即使以and或逗号连接成多主语时，谓语动词仍用单数形式。如：
Each boy and each girl in my class has a dictionary.
⑦如果主语有more than one … 或many a … 构成，尽管从意义上
看是复数内容，但它的谓语动词用单数形式。
More than one student has seen the play.
Many a boy has bought that kind of toy.
但是，“more + 复数名词 + than one”结构之后，谓语用复数。
⑧一些由两个部分构成的名词表示衣物或工具作主语时，谓语通常用复数形式。如glasses、clothes、trousers、shoes、compasses、chopsticks、scissors等。
但如果主语用a kind of、a pair of、a series of等加名词构成时，谓语动词一般用单数形式。
A pair of shoes was on the desk.
⑨this kind of book = a book of this kind(这种书)，其谓语动词；短语this kind of men = men of this kind = these kind of
men(口语)（这一类人），但this kind of men的谓语用单数，men of this kind和these kind of men的谓语用复数，all kinds of后跟复数名词，谓语用复数形式。如：
This kind of men is dangerous.
Men of theis kind/sort are dangerous.
⑩复数形式的单、复数同形名词作主语时，按意义一致的原则，用作单数意义时，谓语用单数，反之，谓语用复数。这类名词有means、works、species(种类)、Chinese、Japanese等。当它们的前面有 a、such a、this、that修饰时，谓语用单数；有all、such、these、those修饰时，谓语用复数。
○11如果名词词组中心词是all、most、half、rest等词语，所指是复数意义，谓语动词用复数形式，反之用单数。 All of my students work hard.
All of the oil is gone.
○12在主谓倒装的句子中，谓语动词的数应与其后的主语一致。如：
Between the two windows hangs an oil painting.
（2）由连接词连接的名词作主语。
①用and或both … and 连接并列主语，谓语动词通常用复数形式。但如果并列主语指的是同一个人，同一事物或同一概念时，谓语动词用单数形式，这时and后面的名词没有冠词。
Truth and honesty is the best policy.
To love and to be loved is the great happiness.
Going to bed early and getting up early is a good habit.
A knife and fork is on the table.
②当主语后面跟有as well as、as much as、no less than、along with、with、like、rather than、together with、but、except、besides、including、in addition to等引导的词组时，采取“就远原则”。
③以or、either … or、neigher … nor、not only … but also等连接的词作主语时，采取“就近原则”。
（3）代词作主语。
①名词型物主代词连接的动词，既可以用单数，也可以用复数，这取决于它所代替的是单数还是复数。
Ours (Our Party) is a great Party.
Your shoes are white, mine (= my shoes) are black.
②such、the same起指示代词作用时，应根据其所指的内容来决定单、复数。
Such is our plan. Such are his last words.
③关系代词who、that、which等在定语从句中作主语时，其谓语动词的数应与句中先行词的数一致。
④疑问词who、what、which作主语时，谓语动词可根据说话人所要表达的意思决定单、复数。
Who lives next door? It is Xiao Liu.
Who lives next door? It is Wang and Li.
⑤不定代词any、either、neither、none、all、some、more等作主语时，要注意下列情况：
（A）单独作主语时，视其在文中的意义，动词可用单数或复数形式。Now all has been changed. All are present.（B）其后接of时，若of的宾语为不可数名词，动词用单数形式；若of的宾语为复数名词或代词时，动词可以是单数，也可以是复数；在正式文体中，单数形式的动词更常用。Do (es) any of you know about the accident? None of us has
(have) seen the film.
（4）分数、量词作主语。
①“分数或百分数 + 名词”构成的短语以及由“a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a large quantity of, a heap of, heaps of, half of + 名词”构成的短语作主语时，其谓语动词要与短语中of后面的名词的数保持一致，这是因为短语中后面的名词是中心词，而短语中前面的量词是修饰语。如：
Lots of damage was caused by flood.
A number of students have gone to the countryside.
A large quantity of people is needed here.
Quantities of food (nuts) were still on the table.
②a great deal of、a large amount of修饰不可数名词，其短语作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数；large amounts of修饰不可数名词，其短语作主语时，谓语动词通常用复数。
③表示数量的one and a half后，名词要用复数形式，但是其短语作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。
One and a half apples is left on the table.
④half of、(a)part of修饰可数名词单数及不可数名词时，谓语动词用单数，修饰可数名词复数时，谓语动词用复数。
(5)名词化的形容词作主语。
如果主语由“the + 形容词（或分词）”结构担任时，谓语通常用复数。这类词有the rich、the poor、the brave、the injured、the living、the wounded等。如表抽象的也可以用单数，如the unknown、the beautiful等。
（6）从句作主语。
①由what引导的主语从句，谓语动词通常用单数，但所指的具体内容是复数意义时，谓语动词一般用复数形式。
What we need is more money.
What we need are more people/teachers.
②在“one of + 复数名词 + who/that/which”引导的从句结构中，关系代词who/that/which的先行词是靠近它的复数名词而不是one，因此从句中的谓语动词也应该是复数形式。如one前有the only则用单数形式。
This is one of the most interesting stories that have been told by my father.
She was the only one of the girls who was late for class today.
（7）不定式、名动词（短语）作主语用单数形式；There be句型中be的单复数取决于be后的第一个词的数。There is a book, two pens on the desk.
There are two pens, a book on the desk.
5、倒装句的要点复习
（1）在以there、here、now、then、such引导的，引起人们注意的招呼句要倒装。
There goes the bell. Here comes the bus.
（2）表示动态的状语，置于句首时，句子要倒装。
Off went the horse. In came the boss.
From the speaker comes the doctor’s voice.
（3）表示地点的词语置于句首或强调地点概念时。
South of the town lie two steel factories.
Between the two buildings stands a tall tree.
注意：句子的主语为人称代词时，句子不倒装。
Here it is. Away they went.
（4）否定词never、seldom、hardly、scarcely、barely、rarely、little、not、nowhere、by no means、at no time、neither、nor等放在句首时，句子常倒装。如：
By no means shall we give up.
Never have I been to the USA.
Seldom does she get up late in the morning.
（5）在not only … but also … no sooner … than …、hardly … when …、scarcely … when …、not until …、so … that …、such … that …句型中，主句倒装，从句不倒装，但要注意：neither … nor … 连接的句子前后两个分句都要倒装。
Not only is she smart but also she is beautiful.
Such great progress did he make that he was praised.
So heavy is the box that I can’t carry it.
Neither has he a pencil, nor has he a pen.
（6）Only + 状语或状语从句 +其他（only在句首时要倒装）。
Only then did I realize the importance of learning English.
（7）so、neither、nor放在句首时，表示前面的情况也适用于另一个人或物时，用部分倒装。
（8）表语或状语或动词原形 + as/though + 主语 + 其他时，句子要倒装。（在让步状语从句中）
（9）虚拟语气中用倒装代替if。
Were I you, I would go there at once.
Had you come yesterday, you could have helped us.
（10）在一些表示祝愿的句子中。
Long live China!
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.—Each of the students, working hard at his or her lessons, _________to go to university.
—So do I .(上海 1998)
A.hope B.hopes C.hoping D.hoped
解析：答案为B。本题考查主谓一致中的意义一致原则，不定代词either、neither、each、one、the other、another以及所有的复合不定代词作主语时，谓语动词应根据意义一致的原则采用单数形式，排除A。选项C是非谓语动词的一种，不能单独作谓语，亦应排除。根据答语中的时态又可排除选项D。
2.The number of people invited _________ fifty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.（NMET 1996）
A.were; was B.was; was C.was; were D.were; were
解析：答案为C。本题考查the number of和a number of 的区别。“the number of + 复数名词/代词”结构中的中心词是number,“a number of + 复数名词/代词”结构中的中心词是of后的复数名词或代词，故谓语动词分别用单、复数。解题关键在于仔细区分哪个是真正的主语。
3.—David has made great progress recently.
—_______, and __________.(上海 1997)
A.So he has; so you have B.So he has; so have you
C.So has he; so have you D.So has he; so you have
解析：答案为B。 本题考查倒装知识。“So + 主语 + 助动词”表“确实如此”，“So + 助动词 + 主语”表“也一样。”
主谓一致
1．His Selected Poems first published in 1965．
A．were B．was C．has been D．have been
2．Twenty dollars enough for the coat．
A．is B．are C．has D．have
3．Learning about Travel News and Sports News in China Daily his great interest．
A．is B．are C．cause D．gives
4．His family very big and all of his family music．
A．are；1ove B．are；1oves C．is；have D．is；1oves
5．It Jack and Frank who been murdered．
A．are；have B．is；are C．is；have D．is；has
6．Writing stories and articles what I enjoy most．
A．is B．have been C．was D．were
7．The poor woman with her two children in a street corner．
A．was seen beg B．were seen beg
C．Was seen bagging D．were seen begging
8．—Is there anybody in the classroom?
—No,the teacher as well as the students to the playground．
A．go B．went C．has gone D．have gone
9．Three-fourhs of the land by forest and grass．
A．has covered B．has been covered
C．have been covered D，are to be covered
10．—Have you heard about the new school?
—No,when and where to build the new one
A．is not decided B．aren’t decided
C．has not decided D．haven’t been decided
11．E-mail，as well as telephones， an important part in daily communication．
A．is playing B．have played C．Was playing D．play
12．Not even one of the hundred students who took the test passed．
A．has B．have C．is D．are
13．The worker and poet to the party the other day．
A．is invited B．was invited C．had invited D．invited
14．There a driver and a number of broken wine bottles beside the high way when the police arrived．
A．were B．was C．had been D．would be
15．Books of this kind well．
A．sell B．sells C．are sold D．is sold
16．Three fifths of the cattle sold abroad in the city．
A．has B．has been C．have D．have been
17．Three-quarters of the land covered with
green grass whikthe rest——covered with pine trees．
A．is；is B．is；are C．are；is D．are；are
18．Three million tons of coal in this district every year.
A．is exploited B．are exploited C．has exploited D．have exploited
19．I，not you， in the wrong．Not I but he been invited．
A．were；have B．were；has C．was；has D．was；have
20．Every boy and every girl that each day and each hour brings duty．
A．know；their B．knows；their C．knows；its D．know；its
主谓一致
1-5 BACCC 6-10 ACCBA 11-15 AABBA 16-20 DAACC
省略与倒装
1．If Bob’s wife doesn’t agree to sign the papers， .
A．neither he will B．neither won’t be C．neither will be D．he Won’t neither
2．Hardly the people ran toward it．
A．had the plane landed when B．had the plane 1anded than
C．the plane had landed when D．the plane Was landing than
3．Not until Mr．Smith came to China what kind of country she is．
A．did he know B．he knew C．he did know D．didn’t he realize
4．0nly by practising a few hours every day be able to master the language．
A．you can B．can you C．you will D．will you
5．Jenny is a beautiful girl and she likes dancing very much， ．
A．so is Mary B．so does Mary C．so Mary does D．so it is with Mary
6．Never before our country as strong as it is today．
A．has；been B．不填；has been C．has been；不填 D．is；不填
7．0nly by taking a taxi on time．
A．you can arrive there B．arrive there you can
C．can you arrive there D．therer you can arrive
8．Not only polluted but crowded．
A．was the city；were the streets B．the city was；were the streets
C．was the city；the streets were D．the city was；the streets were
9． got into the room telephone rang．
A． He hardly had；than B．Hardly had he；when
C．He had not；than D．Not had he；when
10．Not until over back to his lab．
A．Was the war；the scientist went B．the war was； went the scientist
C．was the war；did the scientist go D．the war was；did the scientist go
11．—Listen，there ．
— Oh，yes．There ．
A．goes the bell；it goes B．goes the bell；goes it
C．the bell goes；it goes D．the bell goes；goes it
12． then he wouldn’t have made such a mistake．
A．If he followed your advice B．Were he to follow your advice
C．Had he followed your advice D．He had followed your advice
13．Only after set free able to go on with his research work．
A．he was；was he B．was he；was he C．was he；he was D．he was；he was
14． do we go for picnics．
A．Sometimes B．Certainly C．Seldom D．0nce
15．No sooner had she seen her father she ran to him．
A．than B．when C．as D．that
l6．Nowhere else in the World cheaper tailoring than in Hong Kong．
A．a tourist can find B．can a tourist find
C．a tourist will find D．a tourist has found
17． ，the football game has been decided not to be put off．
A．Heavily as did it rain B．As it rained heavily
C．Heavily as it rained D．As heavily as it could
18．Now here else in this city ．
A．can such cheap things be found B．Can find so cheap a thing
C．such cheap things can be found D．you can find sucn cheap things
19．Not the parents their daughter to marry a rich merchant．
A．and；want B．but；wants C．but；want D．yet；want
20．—Can you tell me where my uncle is?
—Yes，of course， ．
A．here your uncle comes B．here comes your uncle
C．comes your uncle here D．your uncle here comes
21．So 1oudly that even people in the street could hear him．
A．he spoke B．did he speak C．he did speak D．spoke he
22．The door burst open and ，shouting with anger.
A．in rushed the crowd B．rushed in the crowd
C．the crowd in rushed D．in the crowed rushed
23．On the top of the hill where the old man once lived．
A．a temple stands there B．a temple standing
C．does a temple stand D．stands a temple
24．The soil is a part of the earth， is the atmosphere．
A．that B．such C．so D．it
25．Not until I shouted at the top of my voice his head．
A．that he turned B．he had turned C．he didn’t turn D．did he turn
省略与倒装
l-5 CAABD 6-l0 ACCBD 11-15 ACACA 16-20 BCABB 21-25 BADCD
1、虚拟语气用于条件状语从句中
（1）表示与现在事实相反的假设，条件状语从句中的谓语动词用“过去式（be动词的过去式用were）”，而主句中的谓语动词用“would / should/ could / might + 动词原形”。如：
If I were a boy, I would join the army.
If the had time, she should go with you.
（2）表示与过去的事实相反，条件状语从句中的谓语动词用过去完成时，主句中的谓语动词则用“would / should / might / could + have +过去分词”。如：
If he had taken my advice, he would have succeeded in the competition.
（3）表示与将来事实相反，条件状语从句中的谓语动词一般过去时或should(were to) + 动词原形，而主句中的谓语动词则用would / should/
could might + 动词原形。如；
If it were to rain tomorrow, the football match would be put off.
（4）当条件状语从句表示的行为和主句表示的行为所发生的时间不一致时，动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间作相应调整。如：
If they had worked hard, they would be very tired.(从句说的是过去，主句指的是现在)
以下表格是虚拟语气用于条件状语从句中时，主句和从句谓语动词的形式：
条件状语从句 主 句
与过去事实相反 had + 过去分词 should /would/could/might + have + 过去分词
与现在事实相反 一般过去时(be用were) would/should/could/might + 动词原形
与将来事实相反 一般过去时或should(were to) + 动词原形 Would/should/cold/might + 动词原形
有时侯在使用时可省略if,句子则可换成下列形式，即“were / had / should +主语”。如：
Were I a boy, I would join the army.
Had he taken my advice, he would have succeeded.
Were it not for the expense, I would go to Britain.
2、虚拟语气用于名词性从句
（1）虚拟语气在宾语从句中的运用。
①“wish + 宾语从句”表示不能实现的愿望，译为“要是……就好了”等。表示现在不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用一般过去时；表示将来不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“would/could + 动词原形”；表示过去不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“had + 过去分词”或“could(should) + have + 过去分词”。如：
I wish it were spring all the year round.
I wish I had known the answer.
I wish I could fly like a bird.
②在表示建议、要求、命令等的动词suggest、advise、propose、demand、require、insist request、command、order等后的宾语从句中，谓语动词用should + 动词原形或是动词原形。如：
She suggested we (should)leave here at once.
The doctor ordered she should be operated.
（2）虚拟语气在同位语从句和表语从句中的运用。
作表示建议、要求、命令等的名词advise、idea、order、demand、plan、proposal、suggestion、request等的表语从句和同位语从句，从句中的谓语动词用“（should） + 动词原形”。如：
His suggestion that we (should)go to Shanghai is wonderful.
My idea is that they (should)pay 100 dollars.
（3）虚拟语气在主语从句中的运用。
在主语从句中，谓语动词的虚拟语气用“should + 动词原形”的结构，表示惊奇、不相信、理应如此等。如：
It is necessary(important, natural, strange, etc.)that we should clean the room every day.
It was a pity (a shame, no wonder, etc.)that you should be so careless.
It will be desired(suggested, decided, ordered, requested, proposed, etc.)that she should finish her homework this afternoon.
注意：这种从句表示的是事实。如果说人对这种事实表现出惊奇的情感，就可用虚拟语气。反之，如果不表示惊奇等情感，that从句也可用陈述句语气。如：
It is pity that you can’t swim.
3、虚拟语气在其他场合的运用
（1）虚拟语气在as if/as though、even if/even though等引导的表语从句或状语从句中，如果从句表示的动作发生在过去，用过去完成时；指现在状况，则用一般过去时；指将来状况则用过去将来时。如：He did it as if he were an expert.
Even if she were here, she could not solve the problem.
（2）虚拟语气用于定语从句中。
这种从句常用于句型“It is (high)time (that) … ”中，定语从句的谓语动词用一般过去时(be用were)或should + 动词原形，意思是“(现在)该……”。如：
It’s time that I picked up my daughter.
It’s high time we were going.
（3）虚拟语气用在if only引导的感叹句中。如：
If only I were a bird.
If only I had taken his advice.
（4）虚拟语气在一些简单句中的运用。
①情态动词的过去式用于现在时态时，表示说话人谦虚、客气、有礼貌或语气委婉，常出现在日常会话中。如：
It would be better for you not to stay up too late.
Would you be kind enough to close the door?
②用于一些习惯表达法中。如：
Would you like a cup of tea?
I would rather not tell you.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it _______. (NMET 95)
A.breaks B.has broken C.were broken D.had been broken
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是as if 引导的让步状语从句中的语气问题，as if引导的状语从句如果与事实一致，不用虚拟语气，如果与事实相反，应用虚拟语气。题中“当铅笔的一部分浸在水中，铅笔看上去好像断了”。而实际上铅笔并未断，与事实相反，前半部分陈述是一般现在时，因而本句是对一般现在时的虚拟，用were broken。
2. I didn’t see your sister at the meeting. If she ___________, she would have met my brother.(NMET 94)
A.has come B.did come C.came D.had come
解析：答案为D。本题考查的是if条件句中的虚拟语气。题意是：我在会议上没看到你姐姐，故你姐姐没来。因此如果“她来了”与事实相反，前面一句交代了虚拟语气的时态是一般过去时的虚拟，所以if从句中用had+过去分词。
3. —If he ___________, he ________that food.
—Luckily he was sent to the hospital immediately.(NMET 93)
A.was warned; would not take
B.had been warned; would not have taken
C.would be warned; had not taken
D.would have been warned; had not taken
解析：答案为B。本题考查的是条件状语从句与主句表示与事实相反时虚拟语气的用法。根据下一句语境可知，他事先并没有得到警告，表示过去时间的虚拟语气，故选B。
虚拟语气
1．I enjoyed the movie very much．I wish I the book from which it was made．
A．have read B．had read C．should have read D．am reading
2．You are late．If you a few minutes earlier,you him．
A．came；Would meetB．had come；Would have met
C．come；Will meet D．had come；would meet
3．I can’t stand him．He always talks as though he everything?
A．knew B．knows C．has know D．had known
4．His doctor suggested that he short trip abroad．
A．will take B．would take C．take D．took
5．We might have failed if you us a helping hand．
A．have not given B．would not give C．had not given D．did not give
6．The law requires that everyrone his car checked at least once a month．
A．has B．have C．had D．will have
7．He was busy yesterday，otherwise he to the meeting．
A．would come B．would have been C．could have been D．would be
8．If there were no subjunctive mood，English much easier．
A．will be B．would have been C．could have been D．would be
9． the fog，we should have reached our schoo1．
A．Because of B．In spite of C．In case of D．But for
10．—What will you do during winter vacation?
—I don’t know，but it’s about time something?
A．I decided B．I’ll decide C．I’d decided D．I’m deciding
11．He was very busy yesterday，otherwise，he to your birthday party．
A．would come B．came C．would have come D．should come
12．The two strangers talked as if they friends for years．
A．should be B．had been C．have been D．were
13．Look! What you’ve done!You have been more careful．
A．should B．may C．ought D．would
14．Without electricity，what ?
A．will the world be like B．would the world be like
C．the world will be like D．the World Would be like
15．With your ability，you out the puzzle within a few minutes．
A． could have worked B．need have worked
B． C．ought have worked D．must have worked
16．My suggestion is that the sick boy to hospital as soon as possible．
A．is taken B．must be taken C．be taken D．has to be taken
17．If we had not missed the bus，we lunch at home now．
A．would have had B．would have C．must be having D．would be having
18． here yesterday，he would attend the lecture with us today．
A．Had he been B．If he were C．Were he D．Should be he
19．His tired face suggested that he really tired after the 1ong walk．
A．had been B．was C．be D．should be
20．Do you feel that I the problem in a different way the other day?
A．should come B．should have solved C．have solved D．solved
21．0ur chairman hasn’t come yet．If he on time，we would have to put off the meeting．
A．should come B．would come C．shouldn’t come D．doesn’t come
22．He insisted that he really very tried and that he to have a rest．
A．was；be allowed B．was；must be allowed
C．should be；must be allowed D．should be；be allowed
23．He did his best in everything； he would not have been what he was．
A．and B．but C．otherwise D．but that
24．I do I could give you a hand．
A．hope B．wish C．expect D．think
25．I Would rather she tomorrow than today．
A．come B．came C．should D．has come
26．The guard at the gate insisted that everybody the rules．
A．obeys B．obey C．will obey D．Would obey
27．I her if I thought she would understand．
A．would tell B．will tell C．Would have to1d D．told
28．The teacher requires Rose by heart 15 English words each day．
A．1earn B．to learn C．must learn D．1earning
29．—If he ，he that food．
—Luckily he was sent to the hospita1 immediate1y．
A．Was warmed；would not take B．had been warmed；wou1d not have taken
C．would be warmed；had not taken D．would have been warmed；had not taken
30．Without electricity human life quite different today．
A．is B．will be C．would have been D．Would be
虚拟语气
l-5 BBACC 6-10 BBDDA 11-15 CBABA 16-20 CDABBD 21-25 CACBB 26-30 BCBBD
1、名词性从句中连接词的运用
名词性从句中的连接词有连词that / whether / as if，连接代词what / who/ which / whose / whatever / whoever / whomever / whichever，连接副词where / when / why / how / wherever / whenever。
（1）that的用法。
①主语从句、表语从句、同位语从句中用that但不能省略。如：
That they are good at English is known to us all.
The problem is that we don’t have enough money.
She expressed the hope that they would come to China one day.
②宾语从句中的连接词that有时可省有时又不可省，在以下几种情况中that不能省略：（A）当that从句和主句谓语动词之间有插入词语或者从句主语之间有插入语时，that不可省略；（B）当that 从句与另一名词性从句并列作宾语时，that不能省；（C）当that作介词宾语时，that不可省掉。如：
He judged that,because he was a child, he did not understand
wine
Everyone knew what happened and that she was worried.
The reason lies in that she works harder than the others do.
③that从句作主语和宾语时，可以用it 来替换成以下几种结构表达。
(A)It is clear/certain/likely/true/surprising that… （B）It is a pity/shame/good idea/no wonder that ...（C）It is said/reported/ believed/known/thought/suggested that … （D）It seems/happens that。如：
It happened that I went out last night.
It is said that China will win in the World Cup.
④that和what的区别。
that 引导名词性从句时，在主从句中不以当任何句子成分，也没有任何含义；而what引导名词性从句时，在主从句中都要充当一定的句子成分，what可以分解成定语从句中的先行词 + 关系代词即常说的先行词 + that。如：
It’s shame that he has made such a mistake. Do what he says.
⑤同位语从句与定语从句中that的区别。
同位语从句中的连词that只起连接作用，在从句中不担当任何句子成分；而定语从句中的关系代词that在句中做宾语或主语，宾语与先行词有修饰关系。如果句子是同位语从句，就应用连词that而不能用which.同位语从句一般放在表具体含义的名词后解释名词的含义或内容，如以下名词：news、fact、suggestion、truth、plan、belief、doubt、possibility、idea等，而定语从句只是对先行词的限定和修饰。如：
They expressed the hope that they would come to visit China again.(同位语从句)
The hope she expressed is that they would come to visit China again.（定语从句）
（2）whether和if的用法。
①whether和if在宾语从句中可以互换，但是作介词宾语时连接词一般用whether。如：
It all depends on whether they will come back.
②后面直接跟or not 时用whether。如：
I didn’t know whether or not he had arrived in Wuhan.
③主语从句表语从句中只能用whether。如：
Whether the meeting will be put off has not been decided yet.
The question is whether they have so much money.
④whether可以引导同位语从句，用以说明前面的名词的内容，if不能。如：
We ought to discuss carefully the question whether we can do
it or not.
⑤whether常与or连用表示一种选择，if不能这样用；whether也可与动词不定式连用但if不能。如：
The question of whether they are male or female is not impor-
tant.
I have not decided whether to go or not.
⑥间接引语位于句首时或者是间接引语提前时用whether不用if。如：
Thank you, but whether I’ll be free I’m not sure at the moment.
⑦whether可引导一个让步状语从句表示“不管”、“无论”，而if不能。如：
Whether he comes or not, we will begin our party on time.
（3）疑问词 + ever和no matter + 疑问词的区别。 ①疑问词 + ever可引导名词性从句，在主从句中要充当一定的部分。如：
Whoever breaks the rule must be punished.
You can choose whatever you like in the shop.
②疑问词 + ever还可引导让步状语从句。如：
Whoever breaks the rule, he must be punished,
Whatever you do, you must do it well.
③no matter + 疑问词只能引导让步状语从句。如：
No matter what you do, you must do it well.
No matter who breaks the rule, he must be punished.
（4）when和where引导的同位语从句与定语从句的区别。
when 和where前面的名词若是表示时间、地点的名词，则when和where引导的是定语从句，否则则为同位语从句。如：
They put forward the question where they could get the money.
This is the place where the accident happened.
2、名词性从句中主句和从句的时态一致
（1）宾语从句中主句和从句的时态保持一致，但如果从句中表示提示的是客观现象，虽然主句是过去时态，从句仍用一般现在时。如：
Hello,I didn’t know you were in London. How long have you been here?
The teacher told us that light travels at a very high speed.
（2）主语从句作主语相当于单数第三人称作主语，谓语动词用单数，如果由and 连接两个或两个以上的主语从句作主语时，谓语动词用复数；由两个或多个连接词引导一个主语从句，谓语动词用单数。如：
When the meeting will begin has not been decided yet.
When they will start and where they go have not been decided yet.
When and where the meeting will begin has not been decided.
3、名词性从句的词序
名词性从句在句中要用陈述句语序。如：
He asked me what was the matter with me.
We’ve heard the news that we’ll move into the new house.
Whatever you say will interest us all.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. A computer can only do ________ you have instructed it to do.(NMET 2001)
A.how B.after C.what D.when
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是名词性从句作宾语的用法。此句的引导词既作连词又在宾语从句中充当一成分，故what最合适。
2. —I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week..
—Is that _________ you had a few days off ? (NMET 99)
A.why B.when C.what D.where
解析：答案为A。此题考查的是从句的用法。根据题意“我上周开车去珠海看航空展去了。”下面一句接着问：“那就是你为什么离开的原因吗？”故用why引导表语从句表示原因。
3. I hate __________ when peope talk with their mouths full.(NMET 98)
A.it B.that C.these D.them
解析：答案为A。本题考查的是形式宾语的用法。题意为“我讨厌人们谈话时嘴里塞满东西”。该空白处没有任何含义，而且已经用了when连接该宾语从句，所以此处只填一个形式宾语it。
名词性从句
l．_ the 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing makes the nation very excited．
A．Whenever B．If C．Whether D．That
2．The headmaster made a suggestion that the sports meet until next Sunday．
A．Will be put off B．will put off C．put off D．be put off
3． is a fact that English people and American people share a lot of customs．
A．There B．This C．That D．that
4．Dr Black comes from either 0xford of Cambridge,I can’t remember ．
A．where B．there C．which D．that
5． he said at the meeting astonished everybody present．
A．What B．That C．The fact D．The matter
6．I remember this used to be a quiet village．
A．when B．how C．where D．what
7．Can you tell me the railway station?
A．how I can get to B．how can I get to
C．where I can get to D．where can I get to
8．We all took for granted that he would agree with us．
A．it B．him C．that D．what
9．It worried her a bit her hair was turning grey．
A．while B．that C．if D．for
10． leaves the room last ought to turn off the 1ights．
A．Anyone B．The person C．Whoever D．Who
11． they are most interested in is they can produce more and better cars．
A．That；how B．What；how C．What；that D．That；that
12．The reason she gave for not being present was the heavy snow prevented her coming．
A．why；because B．why；whether C．that；that D．how；that
l3． I have will be yours sooner or later．
A．No matter what B．No matter how C．Whatever D．However
14．Word came I was wanted at the office．
A．which B．why C．that D．whether
15．The town is no longer it was ten years ago．
A．which B．that C．what D．when
16．It is generally considered unwise to give a child be or she wants．
A．however B．whatever C．whichever D．whenever
17．Please tell me you would like to have your coffee—black or white?
A．what B．where C．when D．how
18．—Do you remember be came?
—Yes，I do．He came by car．
A．how B．when C．that D．if
l9． we can’t get seems better that we have．
A．What；what B．What：that C．That；that D．That：what
20．—I drove to Zhuhai for the Air Show last week．
—Is that you had a few days off?
A．why B．when C．what D．where
21．You can take measures you think good to deal with the problems．
A．whatever B．however C．whichever D．those
22．— has made our city Dalian she is taday?
—It is the Party’s policy that has made it take on a new look．
A．What；that B．That；what C．there；so D．That；that
23．It was at the very beginning Mr White made
the decision we should send more firefighters there．
A．that：that B．when；which C．there；what D．where；what
24．It was he worked out the maths problem that we wanted to know．
A．what B．how C．that D．which
25．There will be a special price for buys things in large numbers here．
A．who B．whom C．whoever D．whomever
26．—I rang you about ten，but there was no reply．
—0h，that was probably I was seeing the doctor．
A．when B．why C．what D．that
27．Maria has to baby-sit．That’s she can’t come out with us．
A．how B．why C ．when D．what
28． surprised me most was they had finished the work so quickly．
A．What：what B．That；that C．What：that D．That；what
29．You can’t imagine when they received these nice Christmas presents．
A．how they were excited B．how excited they were
C．how excited were they D．they were how excited
名词性从句
1-5 DDDCA 6-10 CAABC 11-15 BCCCC 16-20 BDAAA 21-25 ACABC 26-29 ABCB
1、时间状语从句
（1）as、when、while用法一览表。
类别 作 用 例 句
as as表示“当……的时候”，往往和when/ while通用，但它着重强调主句与从句的动作或事情同时或几乎同时发生。 She came up as I was cooking.(同时)
The runners started as the gun went off.(几乎同时)
when (at or during the time that )既可以表示在某一点的时候，又可表示在某一段时间内，主句与从句的动作或事情可以同时发生也可以先后发生。 It was raining when we arrived.(指时间点)
When we were at school, we went to the library every day.(在一段时间内)
while while意思是“当……的时候”或“在某一段时间里”。主句中的动作或事情在从句中的动作或事情的进展过程中发生，从句中的动词一般要用延续性动词。在when表示a period of time时，两者可以互换。 Please don’t talk so loud while others are working.
He fell asleep while/when reading. Strike while the iron is hot.(用as或when不可，这里的while意思是“趁……”)
（2）引导时间状语从句的连接词除上述外还有：
①till, not … until …, until, before, since
Don’t get off the bus until it has stopped.
He waited for his father until(till)it was twelve o’clock.
It will be five years before he returns from England.
②hardly / scarcely … when, no sooner … than, as soon as once
表示“一……就”
As soon as I have finished it , I’ll give yu a call.
Once you show any fear, he will attack you.
We had hardly got / Hardly had we got into the country when it
began to rain.
No sooner had he arrived / He had no sooner arrived than she started complaining.
③directly, immediately, the moment, the minute that… 一……就
He made for the door directly he heard the knock.
④each time, every time, by the time
Each time he came to my city, he would call on me.
注意：表示未来情况，主句用将来时，从句用现在时。
2、让步状语从句
（1）although与though可以引导让步状语从句，不能与but连用，但可以与yet连用。
Although they are poor,(yet)they are warm-hearted.
（2）even if或even though引导让步状语从句，表示“即使”，“纵然”，用来使人注意下文所强调内容的性质。
I’ll get there even if(though)I have to sell my house to get enough money to go by air.
（3）no matter后接上who、what、where、how等疑问词，也可以在这类疑问词后面加上ever构成whoever、whatever、wherever、however等。
Don’t trust him, no matter what / whatever he says.
Whoever breaks the law will be published.
No matter how hard the work is, you’d better try to do it well.
（4）as也可以引导让步状语从句。要用倒装。
Child as(though)he is, he knows a lot.
Much as I like it, I won’t buy.
Try as he would, he couldn’t lift the heavy box.
3、原因状语从句：because, for, as, since, now that
（1）表示不知道的原因时用because,即说话人认为听话人不知道，因此because从句是全句最重要的部分，通常它被置于主句之后。
You want to know why I’m leaving? I’m leaving because I’m full.
for虽然表示不知道的原因，但其语气较because要弱得多，是可说可不说的话，它只能置于主句之后，这时，for是并列连词。如果不是因果关系，而是对前面主句的内容加以解释或推断时，只能用for。如：It’s morning now, for the birds are singing.（很显然，鸟叫不可能是“现在已是早上”的原因。）
（2）表示已经知道的原因时用as或since,即某种原因在说话人看来已经很明显，或已为听话人所熟悉，因此它是句中不很重要的部分。since要比as正式一些，它们通常被置于语句之前，但有时却相反。 Seeing all of the children already seated, he said,“Since everyone is here, let’s start.”
(3)下列情况下只能使用because:
①在回答why的问句时；
②在用于强调句型时；
③被not所否定时。
4、地点状语从句：where, wherever
Make a mark wherever you have any questions.
We will go where the Party directs us.
5、目的状语从句：that, so that, in order that
注意：目的状语从句的谓语动词常与情态动词连用，否则可能是结果状语从句。不可置于句首。
6、结果状语从句：that, so that, so … that, such … that …
注意：so + 形容词/副词 + that从句；such + 名词 + that从句。
7、方式状语从句：as, as if(though)
I’ll do as I am told to.
It looks as if it is going to rain.
8、比较状语从句：than, as
9、条件状语从句：if, unless, so (as) long as, in case, once, a far as, on condition that.
注意if与unless的区别：不能用and连接两个unless从句，即不能有… unless …,and unless … 。但if … not and if … not却不受此限。
You won’t lose your weight unless you eat less and unless you exercise more.(×)
但可以说 … unless you eat less and exercise more.
10、注意状语从句中从句的省略现象
（1）连接词 + 过去分词
Don’t speak until spoken to.
Pressure can be incrased when needed.
Unless repaired, the washing machine is no use.
（2）连词 + 现在分词
Look out while crossing the street.
（3）连词 + 形容词/其他
常见的有it necessary、if possible、when necessary、if any等。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ____________.
(NMET 2000)
A.as last B.in case C.once again D.in time
解析：答案为B。句意为“带些钱以防万一”，只能选择in case。引导的条件状语从句，后面省略了I should need it。
2. The WTO can’t live up to its name _________ it doesn’t include a country that is home to one fifth of mankind.（NMET 2000）
A.as long as B.while C.if D.even though
解析：答案为C。本题考查状语从句的用法。句意为“假如世贸组织不包括占世界人口五分之一的中国的话，那它就名不副实”。as long as语气过于强烈，while和even though不符合句意。
3、Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but they hung up_________I could answer the phone.(NMET 2000)
A.as B.since C.before D.until
解析：答案为C。题意为：半夜里有人打来电话，我没来得及就挂了。but暗示在接话前就挂了。
状语从句
1． ，Mother will wait for him to have dinner together．
A．However 1ate is he B．However he is late
C．However is he late D．However late he is
2．Go and get your coat．It is you left it．
A．there B．where C．there where D．where there
3．I won’t forgive her unless she ．
A．Will apologize B．apologized C．would apologize D．apologizes
4．Why do you want a new job you’ve got such a good one already?
A．that B．where C．which D．when
5．If you go to Xi’an，you’1l find the palaces there more magnificent than commonly ．
A．supposing B．supposed C．to suppose D．suppose
6．Although he is considered a great writer， ．
A．his works are not widely read
B．but his works are not widely read
C．however his works are not widely read
D．still his works are not widely read
7．When you read the book，you’d better make a mark you have any questions.
A．at which B．at where C．the place where D．where
8． the days went on，the weather got worse．
A．With B．Since C．While D．As
9． you go， be honest and modest．
A．Wherever；do B．Wherever；must C．Where；do D．Where；should
10． ，it was finished on time．
A．As was the work difficult B．Difficult as was the work
C．Difficult as the work was D．As the work was difficult
11． everybody is here，let’s begin our meeting．
A．When B．For C．Because D．Since
12．It was he was ill that he was absent yesterday．
A．now that B．since C．as D．because
13．Put the medicine you can easily get it．
A．so that B．where C．which D．there
14．The earth goes around the sun the moon goes around earth．
A．so that B．just like C．as how D．just as
15．No sooner finished my work the boss come
A．had I；when B．I had；when C．had I；than D．I had；when
16． rich one may be，there is always something one wants．
A．Whatever B．Whenever C．However D．Wherever
17．—What was the party like?
— Wonderful．It’years I enjoyed myself so much．
A．after B．before C．when D．since
18．Mother was worried because little Alice was ill．Especially father was away in France．
A．as B．that C．during D．if
19．We won’t give up we should fail 10 times．
A．even if B．since C．whether D．unti1
20．Please let me know you have any more information．
A．the moment B．unless C．as far as D．until
21．Jack and Jim had to wait two more weeks the manager came back．
A．before B．until C．unless D．when
22．Please put back the books you took them．
A．where B．in which C．which D．there
23． you have mentioned it，I’ll remember to look after your dog when you go traveling．
A．Before B．If C．Now that D．Until
24．—What are you going to do this afternoon?
—I’ll probably go for a walk later on it stays fine．
A．as far as B．so long as C．even if D．as if
25．I was about to go to bed there was a knock at the door．
A．whlie B．when C．as D．suddenly
26．He asked me so many questions at a time I didn’t know how to answer．
A．when B．that C．as D．as if
27． again and again，but he didn’t tell me the truth．
A．Having been asked B．Being asked
C．He had been asked D．Though he was asked
28．—Would you like to come to the dinner party here on Saturday?
——Thank you．I’d love to， I’ll be out of town at the weekend．
A．because B．and C．so D．but
29． you want me to fire you，I suggest you stop wearing sports clothes at office．
A．If B．Since C．Unless D．Until
状语从句
1-5 DBDDB 6-10 ADDAC 11-15 DDBDC 16-20 CDAAA 21-25 AACBB
1、功能：相当于形容词，修饰名词或代词，在句中作定语
2、位置：定语从句置于被修饰词之后
Those who are willing to attend the party, sign here please.
3、先行词：被定语从句修饰的词称为先行词
（1）先行词一般是名词和不定代词，如:some-, any-, every-和no与-boy, -thing的合成词；或all、none、any、some、that、those等代词。数词也可以作先行词，人称代词也同样可作先行词。
（2）先行词与关系词是等量关系。必须注意两点：
①先行词在从句中作主语时，从句谓语动词的数由先行词而定。
This is the place which is worth visiting.
②关系词在从句句子中充当了成分，其意思就是先行词的意义，所以在从句中不能重复其意。
There are many places we can visit（them）in China.
4、关系词：引导定语从句的都称关系词
关系代词：who, whom, which, that, whose, as。
关系副词：when, where, why。that偶尔也作关系副词。
5、确定关系词的步骤
（1）先找关系词，看先行词指的是什么。
（2）看关系词在从句中所充当的成分。
6、在定语从句中，当先行词指物时，下列情况的关系词宜用that而不用which
（1）先行词被①形容词最高级 ②序数词 ③数词几种词修饰或被 ④only、any、few、little、no、all、one of等修饰时。
（2）先行词为all、much、little、none、few、one、something、anything等不定代词时。
（3）先行词中既有人又有物时。
He was looking pleasantly at te children and parcels that filled his bus.
（4）先行词在主句中作表语关系词在从句中作表语时。
The village is no longer the one that was 5 years ago.
（5）当主句中含有疑问词which时。
Which are the books that you bought for me ?
7、宜用which而不用that的情况
（1）在非限制性定语从句中
（2）在关系词前有介词时
（3）当先行词本身是that时
（4）当关系词离先行词较远时
8、关系词who与that指人时，也有不同情况分别用不同的关系词
（1）当主句是there be句型时，关系词用who。
（2）先行词是为anyone、those、someone、everyone、one等词时，关系词用who。
（3）当主句是who作疑问词时，关系词用that。
Who is that girl that is standing by the window?
（4）whom在从句中只作宾语，可被who取代。
9、whose作关系词既指人又指物，在从句中作定语。如：
Do you know Mr.Smith whose story is very moving ?
There is a room, whose window faces the river.
There is a room, the window of which faces the river.
10、关系代词as,在从句中作主语、宾语和表语。
（1）先行词被such和the same修饰，或句型as many（much）中，从句都用as 引导。
Such books as you bought are useful.
The school is just the same as it was 10 years age.
注意：区别①such … that … 引导的结果状语从句。They are such
lovely children that we love them much.②the same … that … 引导定语从句。I want to use the same tool that you used just now.
（2）无先行词的定语从句用as和which引导。
区别：①意义上：as 含有“这点正如……一样”。②位置上：as 从句可置句首，也可在另处。
He didn’t pass the exam, as we had expected.
There is lots of air in loose snow, which can keep the cold out.
As is known, the earth is round, not flat.
11、关系副词when与where、why、that
when 指时间 = in / at / on / during which
where指地点 = in / at / from / which
why指原因 = for which
当先行词为way、day、reason、time时，可用that作关系副词。（非正式场合） I don’t like the way that / in which / he talks.
当time作先行词时，关系词可以省掉。
This is the first time I have given you a lesson in French.
12、必须注意的问题
（1）关系词作主语时，从句中谓语的数。
（2）注意区别定语从句与强调句。
①定语从句中关系词作从句成分，复合句。
②强调it无意义，that / who不是引导词。
③强调it is / was和that / who后如果句子意思讲得通则是强调句，讲不通则不是。
It is the museum that / which we visited last year.(定语从句)
It was in the hotel that we stayed last night.（强调句）
（3）定语从句与同位语从句的区别。
①定语从句引导词被称为关系词，that充当主语、宾语、表语。有时可省略。
②同位语从句引导词被叫做连词，that不能充当任何成分，不可省。
Word came that their army was defeated.(同位语)
We expressed to them our wish that was the same as their.(定语)
（4）关系词在从句中省略的情况。
①关系词作宾语，前无介词时。
②关系词作表语。
（5）限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句的翻译。
（6）关系词前有介词或复杂介词，关系词只能是which和whom。
（7）几个特殊的定语从句句型：
①He is the only one of the students who has got very good marks
in the match.（句中one为先行词）
He is one of the students who have got good marks in the match.（句中students为先行词）
②Is this place the one (that) we visited yesterday?
Is this the place(that / which)we visited yesterday ?
③He stood at the window, from where he could see what was happening.
④It may rain, in which case the match will be put off.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The film brought the hours back to me _________ I was taken good care of in that faraway village.（NMET 2001）
A.until B.that C.when D.where
解析：答案为C。本题考查分隔定语从句的关系词的选择。作好本题的关键是要能辨认出该定语从句的先行词the hours和关系词被介词短语to me所分隔。定语从句的先行词是表时间的名词hours, 并且关系词在从句中用作状语，故应选择表示时间的关系副词when。
2. ___________ is known to everybody, the noon travels around the earth once every month.(NMET 2001)
A.It B.As C.That D.What
解析：答案为B。本题考查as引导的非限制定语从句。as作“正如……”解时，引导的非限制性定语从句来修饰整个句子。当as在从句中作主语时，常用于下列短语：as is known、as is said、as is reported、as is announced等。要注意掌握作关系代词引导定语从句的用法。
3. After living in Pairs for fifty years he returned to the small town ___________ he grew up as a child.(NMET 1996)
A.which B.where C.that D.when
解析：答案为B。本题考查限制性定语从句中关系词的选择。定语从句的先行词是表示地点的名词短语the small town, 且关系词不作定语从句中的主语和宾语而作地点状语，因此定语从句必须用关系副词where引导。要注意分清先行词在从句中充当的成分，然后选择适当的关系词。
定语从句
1．I can still remember the sitting room my mother and I used to sit in the evening．
A．what B．which C．that D．where
2．The man was a friend of mine．
A．that you just talked to B．whom you just talked to him
C．who you just talked to him D．you just talked
3．1’ll never forget the place I visited ten years ago.
A．where B．that C．in which D．what
4． We all know，oil and water don’t mix up．
A．That B．What C．Which D．As
5．All is needed is a Supply of oil．
A．the thing B．that C．what D．which
6．Last night we went to Ann’s party， we enjoyed very much．
A．when B．that C．which D．where
7．There is a mountain the top is always covered with snow．
A．of that B．of which C．its D．that
8．This is the only dictionary he often turns to for help．
A．which B．that C．what D．one
9．I hope you will find this valley a beautiful place you may spend your weekend．
A．that B．w hich C．when D．where
lO．Football， is a very interesting game，is played all over the world．
A．that B．which C．it D．who
11． has already been pointed out，grammar is not a set of dead rules．
A．As B．It C．That D．Which
12．Alice received an invitation from her boss, came as a surprise．
A．it B．that C．which D．he
13． leaves the room last is asked to turn off the lights．
A．Anyone B．Who C．Everyone D．Whoever
14．The wolves hid themselves in the place couldn’t be found．
A．that B．where C．in which D．in that
15．We will be shown around and city；schools，museums，and some other places， other visitors seldom go．
A．what B．which C．where D．when
定语从句
1-5 DABDB 6-10 CBBDB 1l-15 ACDAC
1、 情态动词的基本用法
(1)can、be able to 和could
①can和be able to都表示能力，意思上没多大区别。但can只有现在和过去时，而be able to则有更多的形式。但当成功地完成某一具体动作时，通常不用could而用was/were able to来表示。这时was/were able to 相当于managed to，表示经过一番努力，终于能够完成某事。如：
Can you use chopsticks?
The wounded man still was able to get to the village and was saved in the
end.
②can和could
can和could都可以表示能力、技能、许可、建议或请求和可能性。但比较委婉客气地提出问题或陈述看法，一般用could，回答时则用can。如：
Could you help me carry the bag?
Can I help you?
(2)may/might
①may/might表示可能，但may比might可能性大。如：-Why isn’t he in class?
He may be sick.(生病的可能性较大)
—
He might be sick.(生病的可能性较小)
②may/might表示“允许”，may用于现在时或将来时，might常用在间接引语中表过去时，但might也可用于现在时间，表示比较委婉的语气，回答用may。如：
He says we may leave.
He said we might leave.
③may / might 表示建议或请求，但might比may 更客气，意思更肯定而无过去时态的含义。
Yes, you can / may.
—May / Might I use your bike? —
No, you mustn’t
（3）must
①must表示必须，应该，没有时态变化。如：
You must do everything as I do.
②must表示肯定的推测。如：
The light is still on, so he must be at home.
③mustn’t 表示禁止做某事。如：
You mustn’t smoke in the office.
（4）have to
have to 表示“必须、不得不”，是由于某种外界（客观）原因而“必须”，“不得不”做某事，也可表示经常的或习惯性的事“必须”做。have to的否定形式表示不必。have to可用于多种时态中。如：
You will have to clean your own boots when you join the army.
I have to be at my office every evening.
（5）should / ought to
①should和ought to表示应当、应该，前者比后者语气轻。如：
You should / ought to work hard.
②should / ought to work hard.
Since she is not here, whe should / ought to be in the classroom.
③should / ought to的否定形式表示禁止之意。如：
Children shouldn’t smoke.
④should可表示陈述意见，推出建议或请求；而ought to可以表示劝告之意。如：
You ought to respect your parents.
He suggested that they should leave at once.
（6）will / would
①will 用于各种人称表示“意志”、“意愿”或“决心”等，否定式won’t + 动词。如：
I will tell you all about it.
Tom won’t do such a thing.
②will用于疑问句中，常用在第二称时表示说话人向对方提出“请求”或“询问”如：
Will you please tell her the news when you see her?
③will 表示习惯性的动作，有“总是”、“惯于”的含义。如：
Fish will die out of water.
④would 表示客气的请求、建议或意愿。如：
Would you please be quiet?
Would you like coffee?
⑤would 表示过去反复发生的动作。如：
When I passed my school I would see my teachers who taught me 5 years ago.
（7）need
need 作“必要”讲，既可作情态动词，也可作实义动词。作实义动词时后面的动词不定式要带to，其变化与一般动词相同。如：
I need to think it over.
—Need you go now? —Yes, I must./No, I needn’t
（8）dare
dare表示“敢”的意思。作为情态动词时，主要用在疑问句和否定句中。dare若作实义动词，后面可带to的不定式，此时to也可以省略。dare与need的用法相似。如：How dare you say that?
She doesn’t date(to)ask her father.
（9）used to
used to表示过去常常发生的动作或存在的习惯，但现在已不复存在了。如：
He used to smoke.
（10）shall
①shall作为情态动词用于第二、三人称，表示说话人的意愿，有“命令”、“警告、威胁、强制”和“允许”等意思。如：
We shall do as our teacher says.
You shall have the book as soon as I finish it.
②在疑问句中，shall用于征求对方的意见或请求指示，常用于第一、第三人称。如：
Where shall he wait for us?
Shall we go out for a walk?
2、情态动词表示推测或判断的用法
下表即是表示推测的情态动词使用的场合：
情态动词 对现在和未来的推测 对过去的推测 使 用 场 合
must must + 动词原形 must have done 肯定句
may / might may / might + 动词原形 May / might have done 肯定句、否定句
can /could can / could do Can / could have done 否定句、疑问名（could可用于肯定句）
should 用来表示一种估计的情况“按理会/估计会”should do/be should have done 肯定句、否定句、疑问句
例如：
It must have rained last night.
She may not be at home. = It is possible that she is not at home.
She can’t be at home. = It is impossible that she is at home.
They should be there right now.
3、情态动词在虚拟语气中的用法
情态动词用于虚拟语气中表示责备的感情色彩，用法如下：
（1）should have done表示“本来应该做某事而实际上未做”，而shouldn’t have done则表示“本不应该做某事而实际上做了”。如：
You should have told me about it earlier.
You shouldn’t have said such words to your parents.
（2）ought to have done也表示“本应该……”而ought not to have done则意为“本不应该……”。如：
You ought to have told me about it earlier.
You ought not to have said such words to your parents.
（3）needn’t have done表示“本无必要做某事而实际上做了”。如：
You needn’t have walked so quickly since time was enough.
（4）could have done表示“本来有可能……而事实上未做到”。如：
I could have come on time, but my car broke on the way.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. I was really anxious about you. You________home without a word.(NMET 2001)
A.mustn’t have B.shouldn’t have left
C.couldn’t have left D.needn’t have
解析：答案为B。本题考查的是情态动词在虚拟语气中的用法。题目给出的条件是“我确实非常担心你”，因此后面可知应是责备you不应该没说一句话就离开了。
2.—Are you coming to Jeff’s party?
—I’m not sure. I__________ go to the concert instead.(NMET 2000)
A.must B.would C.should D.might
解析：答案为D。本题考查情态动词的基本用法。由题目中“I’m not sure”,表明我可能去Jeff’s party，也可能去音乐会，故用might。
3. —Will you stay for lunch?
—Sorry, ____________. My brother is coming to see me.(NMET 99)
A.I mustn’t B.I can’t C.I needn’t D.I won’t
解析：答案为B。本题考查表示请求的英语口语，用will来向第二人称提问的疑问结构，是表示一种请求和意愿，是用疑问的形式来表达较为婉转的祈使语气，意思是“请你……，好吗”，对于这种问句的肯定回答是：Suree! Gertainly! Yes, of course. I’d be glad to 等；否定回答通常是：I’m sorry, I can’t. No, I’m afraid I can’t. I’m sorry, but … I’d like to, but …等。注意情态动词表客气的用法及其在一般疑问句中的问与答。
情态动词
1．I thought you 1ike somethjng to read，so I have brought you some books．
A．may B．might C．could D．must
2．There was plenty of time．She ． A．mustn’t have hurried B．couldn’t have hurried
C．must not hurry D．needn’t have hurried
3．The plant is dead．I it more water．
A．Will give B．would have given C．must give D．should have given
4．You return the book now．You can keep it till next week if you like．
A．can’t B．mustn’t C．needn’t D．may not
5．Tom ought not to me your secret，but he meant no harm．
A．have told B．tell C．be telling D．having told
6．He you more help，even though he was very busy．
A．might have given B．might give C．may have given D．may give
7．He at the meeting this morning．He was in hospital at the time．
A．couldn’t have spoken B．mustn’t have spoken
C．shouldn’t have spoken D．needn’t have spoken
8．He must be in the classroom， he?
A．mustn’t B．can’t C．isn’t D．can
9．—You were driving at 100 km an hour，sir．
—But officer，I ．My car can’t go more than 80．
A．may not have been B．couldn’t have been
C．wouldn’t have been D．needn’t have been
10．—Did you visit the famous museum?
—No．We it，but we spent too much time shopping．
A．could have visited B．must have viste
C．can’t have visited D．shouldn’t have visited
11．—When can I come for the photos? I need them tomorrow afternoon．
—They be ready by 12：00．
A．can B．should C．might D．need
12．You to the meeting this afternoon if you have something important to do．
A．needn’t to come B．don’t need come
C．don’t need coming D．needn’t come
13．Put on more clothes．You be feeling cold with only a shirt on．
A．can B．could C．would D．must
14．—There were already five people in the car but they managed to take me as well．
—It a comfortable journey．
A．can’t be B．shouldn’t be C．mustn’t have been D．couldn’t have been
15．I think all drivers seat belts．
A．should wear B．had better wear C．can wear D．have to wear
16．—Don’t forget to come to my birthday party tomorrow．
— .
A．I don’t B．1 won’t C．I can’t D．I haven’t
17．I to1d Sally how to get here，but perhaps I it out for her．
A．had to write B．must have written C．should have written D．ought to write
18．Peter come with us tonight，but he isn’t very sure yet.
A．must B．may C．can D．will
19．A computer think for itself；it must be told what to do．
A．can’t B．couldn’t C．need D．would
20．Jenny have kept her word．I wonder why she changed her mind．
A．must B．should C．need D．would
21．——Could I borrow your dictionary? Yes，of course you ．
A．might B．will C．can D．should
22．—I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter．
—It true because there was 1ittle snow there．
A．may not be B．won’t be C．couldn’t be D．mustn’t be
情态动词
1-5 BDDCA 6-10 AACBA 11-15 BDDDA 16-20 BCBAB 21-22 CC
1、非谓语动词的句法功能
名称 语 法 功 能
主语 宾语 宾语补足语 表语 定语 状语
不定式 √ √ √ √ √ √
动名词 √ √ √ √
现在分词 √ √ √ √
过去分词 √ √ √ √
2、动词不定式复心中应注意的几个问题
（1）不定式作表语与“be + to do sth.”的异同。不定式作表语说明主语的内容或性质。
His job is to guard.(说明内容)
be + to do sth.(表示按计划要做的事)
（2）带不定式作宾语的词语。
下列词语常不定式作宾语：afford、promise、refuse、expect、hope、learn、offer、wish、want、fail、plan、agree、forget、like、prefer、decide、manage、try、arrange、determine、desire等。
下列动词后可接疑问词+不定式：teach、decide、wonder、show、learn、forget、ask、find、out、advise、discuss等。
（3）如何理解和使用不定式作宾补。
①动词see、watch、notice、hear、listen to、observe、feel、taste、smell、make、let、have等的宾补用动词原形，变被动时要加to,此时的不定式就是主语补足语。
②常用带不定式作宾补的几种情况：
主语 + ask / require / tell / order / force / get / want / like + sb.to do sth.③主语 + think / judge / suppose / believe / consider /imagine/
consider / feel + sb. + to be/ to have done
④主语 + call on / upon / depend on / wait for / ask for + sb.+ to do sth.
（4）不定式作定语的特殊用法。
①下列词语后常接不定式作定语：chance、wish、right、courage、need、promise、time、opportunity、way、the first、the second、the last、the only等。
②不定式作定语和所修饰的名词在逻辑上有主谓关系。
There is no one to look after her.
③不定式与被修饰的名词在逻辑上有动宾关系。
She is now looking for a room to live in.
（5）不定式作状语的用法。
不定式作状语，修饰动词，在句中表示行为目的、结果、原因。only to do表示出人意料的结果。
We hurried to the classroom only to find none there .
in order(not)to,so as(not)to用来引导目的状语,enough,too, so… as to do, such + 名词… as to do作结果状语，如:The girl was so kind as to help the old man off the bus.
I’m not such a fool as to believe that.
（6）不定式的完成时的特殊用法。
①表示不定式中谓语动词发生的动作先于主句的谓语动词发出的动作。
The novel was said to have been published.
I regret to have been with you for so many years.
seem、appear、be said、be supposed、be believed、be thought、be known、be reported等动词常用于上面句型。
此外，glad、happy、satisfied、sorry、surprised、disappointed后也接完成时，但要注意与一般时的区别。
I’m sorry to keep you waiting for a minute.对不起，请稍等。（说话时还未等）
I’m sorry to have kept you waiting.对不起，让你久等了。（说话时已等了很久）
②不定式的完成时还可表示“过去本想做某事但未做”的虚拟语气。（A）should like to / would like to / would love to + 不定式的完成时。（B）was / were to + 不定式的完成时，表示该做某事或想做但未实现。（C）expect / hope / mean / promise / suppose / think / want/ wish + 不定式完成时，表示过去未曾实现的愿望。
（7）不定式的省略。
①同一结构并列由and或or连接。
I want to finish my homework and go home.
I’m really puzzled what to think or say.
特例：To be or not to be,this is a question.
He is better to laugh than to cry.(表示对比)
②不定式作表语，其前面的主语从句中含有do时，后面的to省略。
What he did was lose the game. ③句中含有动词do时，but、except、besides、such as等后面to可省略。即“前有do,后省to”。
Don’t do anything silly, such as marry him.
④主句含有不定式，后面有rather than, rather than后省to。
⑤Why not、had better、would rather、can’t but等词后省to。如：
He could not but walk home.
（8）不定式的替代。
多用在同一句或联系紧密的对话中，为了避免重复，作宾语或主补，宾补的不定式再次出现时，to后的内容常承前省略（只保留to即可）。但如果承前省略的不定式有助动用的have或be任何形式，后应该保留原形be或have。如：
Susan is not what she used to be.
—You came late last night. You ought to have finished your
homework.
—I know I ought to have.
常见的有：I’d like / love / be happy to.
3、动名词复习中应注意的几个问题
（1）动名词作宾语。
①下列动词后只能接动名词：suggest, finish, avoid, stop, can’t help, mind, enjoy, require, practise, miss, escape, pardon, advise, consider, imagine, keep, appreciate, eacape, permit。
②下列动词短语接动名词：leave off, put off, give up, look forward to, feel like, have trouble / difficulty(in) doing sth. devote to, get used to, pay attention to, be fond of, be worth。
③介词后要接动名词。what about、how about、without、be fond of、be good at等介词后接动名词。注意on / upon doing sth. = as soon as 引导的从中。作此意讲时on / upon后也可以接名词。如on his arrival…。
④动名词作宾语和动词不定式作宾语的区别：
begin, start, continue, like, love, dislike, hate, prefer, can’t stand
例 句 解 析
1. It began to rain. It began raining.
2. It was beginning to snow.
3. I love lying (to lie)on my back.
4. I like listening to music, but today I don’t like to.
5. I don’ t prefer to swim in the river now.
1. 意思无差别，但谓语动词用进行时，后面只跟不定式。
2. 表示一种倾向多接动名词作宾语，如果表示某一特定的或具体的行动，多接不定式。
remember, forget, regret, try
例 句 解 析
1. I remember to meet her at the station.
I remember seeing her once somewhere.
2. I forgot giving it to you yesterday.
I forgot to tell you about it. Now here it is.
3. I regret not having working hard.
I regret to hear of your sister’s death.
4. Try knocking at the back door.
We must try to get everything ready.
5. That will mean flooding some land.
I had meant to go on Monday. 1. remember to do sth.记住要做的事
remember doing sth.回顾过去发生的事
2. forget to do sth.忘记要做的事
forget doing sth.忘记做过的事
3. regret to do sth.对将要做的事抱歉
regret doing sth.对发生过的事后悔
4. try to do sth.设法……，试图
try doing sth.试试看，试一试
5. mean to do sth.打算做……，想要
mean doing sth.意味着，就是
want, require, need
例 句 解 析
These desks need repairing.
These desks need to be repaired.
The patient required examined
The patient required to be examined. 1. need doing 需要被做
need to be done需要被做
2. want doing
want to be done
3. require doing
require to be done
4、分词复习应注意的几个问题
（1）现在分词在句中作时间、原因、伴随、条件、结果等状语。
①时间状语（分词作状语前面可加when, while等）
Hearing the good news, he jumped with greatjoy.
Not having finished her work in time, the boss fired her.
②原因状语
Seeing nobody at home, he decided to leave them a note
③伴随状语
The girls came in, following their parents. ④结果状语
The poor old man died, leaving nothing to his children.
注意：现在分词作状语的几个特性。①时间性。与谓语动词同时发生，用一般时，如发生在谓语动作之前时则用完成式having done。②语态性。与句子的主语之间的关系，是主谓关系或动宾关系。遵循的规则“主动进行，被动完成”。③人称一致性。分词的逻辑主语就是句子的主语。
（2）分词作表语。
S. + be + 动词-ed表示被动，主语是人；S. + be + 动词-ing表示主动，主语是物。分词作宾补不定式作宾补的区别：
感官动词 动词原形→做了某事
S．+ + 宾语 + 现在分词→正在做某事
使役动词 过去分词→做了或被做
5、复习过去分词应注意的几个问题
过去分词作状语，相当于一个状语从句，有来说明原因、时间、条件等。
（1）过去分词作原因状语
Tired by the trip, he soon feel asleep.
= Because he was tired by the trip, he soon fell asleep.
Lost in thought , he almost ran into a car.
=As he was lost in thought, he almost ran into a car.
（2）作时间状语
Seen from the hill, the city looks like a garden.
=When the city is seen from the hill, it looks like a garden.
（3）作条件状语
Given more time, I would have worked out the problem.
=If I have been given more time, I would have worked out the problem.
（4）伴随状语
The teacher came in, followed by some students.
=The teacher came in and was followed by some students.
分词短语作状语时，通常与主句中的主语在逻辑上一致，但有时它也可以有自己独立的逻辑上的主语，这种结构称为独立主格结构。如：
Her grandfather being ill, she had to stay at home looking after him.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. __________such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.(NMET 2001)
A.Having suffered B.Suffering C.To suffer D.Suffered
解析：答案为A。本题考查分词短语作状语的用法。分词作状语，其逻辑主语必须是句子的主语，而本句的主语看似是it,其实它为形式主语，真正的主语为不定式，而不定式省略了逻辑主语for people，所以应用现在分词，又因already，应用完成时。
2. One learns a language by making mistakes and _______ them.(2001年春季高考)
A.correct B.correcting C.corrects D.to correct
解析：答案为B。本题考查动名词作介词宾语的用法。介词by意为“通过……，凭……”，后面常接动名词，形成“by+ v. –ing ”结构，表示通过做某事而得到某种结果。本题中只有correcting符合。
3. The picture _________ on the wall is painted by my nephew.(2000年春季高考)
A.having hung B.hanging C.hangs D.being hung
解析：答案为B。本题考查现在分词作定语的用法。根据句意“墙上挂的那幅画是我侄子画的”，可知空白处所填的动词形式在句中作定语，表说话时仍在进行的动作或所处的解题关键在于分析picture与hang之间的逻辑关系。
非谓语动词与动词辨析
1．—I’d like to buy an expensive sports car．
—Well，Mike，we have got several models ．
A．to be chosen from B．to choose C．to choose from D．for choosing
2．In the busiest season the farmers are seen their tractors from morning till night．
A．to have；working B．have；work C．have；working D．had；worked
3． the meeting room，he found all the parents a1ready there．
A．To enter；sitting B．Stepping into；to seat
C．Entered；seat D．Entering；seated
4．I spoke to my friend in a very 1ow voice by anybody else．
A．so as not to be heard B．so as to not to hear
C．so not to hear D．so as to not be heard
5．Did you notice anyone my room just now?
A．enter into；Nobody B．entering；None
C．to enter；None D．enter．N0 one
6．The boy pretended when his mother entered．
A．reading B．to read C．to be reading D．being read
7．When medicine，please follow these instructions carefully．
A．to take B．taking C．taken D．he takes
8．The classroom is so dirty that it needs badly．
A．clean B．to clean C．being cleaned D．cleaning
9．This is one of the experiments in our laboratory.
A．being made B．making C．to make D．having make
10．Do you remember me somewhere before?
A．to meet B．met C．meeting D．meet
11． more time，the job can be done better．
A．Given B．Giving C．To give D．To be given
12．The meeting this evening is of great importance．
A．holding B．held C．to hold D．to be held
13．In spite of his broken English，he can make himself
A．understood B．understanding C．understand D．to understand
14．The speech was very ，and we were to tears．
A．moved；moved B．moving；moving C．moving；moved D．moved；moving
15．Charles Babbage is generally considered the first computer．
A．to invent B．inventing C．having invented D．to have invented
16． ，I went to the railway station to see my friend off．
A．After eating quickly my dinner B．After my qujckly eating dinner
C．After eating my dinner quickly D．After eating my quickly dinner
l7．Mr Smlith wanted his daughter after drinking．
A．never to drive B．to never drive C．never driving D．never drive
18．My son isn’t feeling well，so I’ll get him in the hospital．
A．examined B．examining C．to examine D．examine
19．The secretary worked late into the night， a long speech for the president．
A．to prepare B．preparing C．prepared D．was prepared
20．I can hardly imagine Peter across the Atlantic 0cean in five days．
A．sail B．to sail C．sailing D．to have sailed
21．—How do you deal with the disagreement between the company and the customers?
—The key the problem is to meet the demand by the customers．
A．to solving；making B．to solving；made C．to solve；making D．to solve；made
22．John was made the truck for a week as a punishment．
A．to wash B．washing C．wash D．to be washing
23．Little Jim should love to the theatre this evening．
A．to be taken B．to take C．being taken D．taking
24．—I usually go there by train．
—Why not by boat for a change?
A．to try going B．trying to go C．to try and go D．try going
25．I would appreciate back this afternoon．
A．you to call B．you call C．your calling D．you’re calling
26． a reply，he decided to write again．
A．Not receiving B．Receiving not C．Not having received D．Having not received
27．“Can’t you read?”Mary said to the notice．
A． angri1y pointing B．and point angrily
C．angrily pointed D．and angrily pointing
28．How about the two of us a walk down the garden?
A．to take B．take C．taking D．to be taking
29．The computer centre， last year，is very popular among the students in this schoo1．
A．open B．opening C．having opened D．opened
30．The man on now is my brother．
A．to be operated B．being operated C．operated D．been operated
31．The visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with his talks， that he had enjoyed his stay here．
A．having added B．to add C．adding D．added
32．The first textbooks for teaching English as a foreign 1anguage came out in the
16th centry．
A．have written B．to be written C．being written D．written
33．Let the work as soon as possible．
A．was done B．be done C．to be done D．is done
34．The 0lympic Games， in 776 B．C，did not include women players until 1912．
A．first played B．to be first played
C．first playing D．to be first playing
35．When I got back home I saw a message pinned to the door， “Sorry to miss you；will call later．”
A．read B．reads C．to read D．reading
36．I’ve worked with children before．so I know what in my new job．
A．expected B．to expect C．to be expecting D．expects
37．The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see the next year．
A．carry out B．carrying out C．carried out D．to carrv out
38．Do you know such problems?
A．how to deal with B．what to deal with C．how to do with D．to do with
39 The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the ．
A．20 dollars remained B．20 dollars to remain
C．remained 20 dollars D．remaining 20 dollars
40．He spent me an E-mail， to get further information．
A．hoped B．hoping C．to hope D．hope
41．It is said in Australia there is more land than the government knows ．
A．it what to do with B．what to do it with
C．what to do with it D．to do what with it
42．Be careful when you cross this very busy street．If not，you may run over by a car．
A．have B．get C．become D．turn
43．We thought of selling this old furniture，but we’ve decided to it．It might be valuable．
A．hold on to B．keep up with C．turn to D．1ook after
44．—Mummy，can I put the peaches in the cupboard?
—No，dear．They don’t well．Put them in the bridge．instead．
A．keep B．fit C．get D．last
45．His mother had thought it would be good for his character to from home and earn some money on his own．
A．run away B．take away C．keep away D．get away
非谓语动词与动词辨析
l-5 CADAD 6-10 CBDAC 11-15 ADACD 16-20 CAABC 21-25 DAADC 26-30 CACDB
31-35 CDBAD 36-40 BCADB 41-45 CBADC
①She often has lunch at school, doesn’t she? ②You don’t like sports, do you?
使用反意疑问句要注意以下若干对应规则：
一、 反意疑问句中问句部分的动词与陈述部分的动词在语气上成相反的对应关系，即：
肯定+否定？ 否定+肯定？如：
①You can’t do it, can you? ②They are very late for the meeting, aren’t they?
二、 反意疑问句中问句部分的动词与陈述部分的动词种类要对应一致。如：
①He has supper at home every day, doesn’t he? （不能用hasn’t he?）
②They have known the matter, haven’t they? （不能用don’t they?）
三、 反意疑问句中问句部分的动词在时态上应和陈述部分的时态一致。如：
①They will go to town soon, won’t they?（不能用don’t they?或 aren’t they?）
②He works very hard, doesn’t he?（不能用didn’t he?或won’t he?）
四、 反意疑问句的陈述部分含有由un-, im-, in-, dis-, 等否定意义的前缀构成的词语时，陈述部分要视为肯定含义，问句部分用否定形式。如：
①Your father is unhappy, isn’t he?（不能用is he?）
②The man is dishonest, isn’t he? （不能用is he?）
③It is impossible to learn English without remembering more words, isn’t it?（不能用is it ?）
五、反意疑问句的陈述部分带有little, few, never, hardly, seldom等否定意义的词时，问句部分用肯定式。如：
①She never tells a lie, does she?（不用doesn’t she?）
②He was seldom late, was he?（不用wasn’t he?）
六、反意疑问句的陈述部分为I am……时，问句部分习惯上用aren’t I？表示。如：
I am a very honest man, aren’t I?
七、反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We) think(believe, suppose, consider) + that从句时，问句部分的动词及主语与that从句内的动词和主语保持一致。如：
①I think that he has done his best, hasn’t he?
②We think that English is very useful, isn’t it? （不用don’t we?）
八、反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We) don’t think(believe, suppose, consider)+ that从句时，从句为否定意义，问句部分的动词和主语仍与that从句保持一致且用肯定式。如：
①I don’t think that you can do it, can you? （不用do I?）
②We don’t believe that the news is true, is it? （不用do we?）
九、反意疑问句的陈述部分为非第一人称主语+ think(believe, suppose, consider) + that从句时，问句部分的动词和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：
①They all think that English is very important, don’t they? （不用isn’t it?）
②He didn’t think that the news was true, did he? （不用wasn’t/ was it?）
十、反意疑问句的陈述部分为主语+said( told, reported, asked……) + that从句时，问句部分的动词和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：
①They said that you had finished your work, didn’t they? （不用hadn’t you）
②Kate told you that she would go there, didn’t she? （不用wouldn’t she?）
十一、陈述部分的主语为不定代词something, anything, nothing, everything时，问句部分的主语用it。如：
①Something is wrong with the computer, isn’t it?②Nothing has happened to them, has it?
十二、陈述部分的主语为不定代词somebody(someone), anybody(anyone), nobody(no one), everybody(everyone)时，问句部分的主语用he或 they，这时问句动词的数应和he或 they一致。如：
①Someone has taken the seat, hasn’t he?②Everyone has done their best in the game, haven’t they?
十三、陈述部分为Let me……时，问句部分习惯上用shall I? 或will you?形式。如： Let me have a try, shall I?(will you?)
十四、陈述部分为Let us……时，问句部分习惯上用will you?形式。如：
Let us stop to rest, will you?
十五、陈述部分为Let’s……时，问句部分习惯上用shall we?形式。如：
Let’s go home together, shall we?
十六、陈述部分用上述情况以外的祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式表示请求，用won’t you？形式表示委婉请求或邀请。如：
①Do sit down, won’t you?/ will you? ②You feed the bird today, will you?
③Please open the window, will you?(won’t you?)
十七、陈述部分为否定祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式。如：
Don’t make any noise, will you?
十八、陈述部分为There (Here) + be + 主语时，问句部分用动词+there(here)?形式。如：
①There are two cakes on the plate, aren’t there? ②Here is a story about Mark Twain, isn’t here?
十九、陈述部分用had better +原形动词表示建议时，问句部分用hadn’t +主语？形式。
①You’d better tell him about the matter, hadn’t you?②We had better do it by ourselves, hadn’t we?
二十、陈述部分用used to +主语时，问句部分用didn’t + 主语？或usedn’t +主语？形式。
①He used to live in the country, didn’t he?/usedn’t he?
②They used to be good friends, didn’t they?/usedn’t they?
二十一、陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed表示推测时，若句中带有明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词用过去时形式。如：
①He might have forgotten his pen in the classroom yesterday, didn’t he?
（不用mightn’t he?/ hasn’t he?）
②You must have got up late this morning, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/haven’t you?）
二十二、陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed表示推测时，若句中没有带明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词用现在完成时形式。如：
①Everyone must have known the death of the waitress, haven’t they? （不用mustn’t they?）
②You must have worked there a year ago, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/ haven’t you?）
二十三、陈述部分的主语为从句时，问句部分的主语一般用it代替，如：
①What he said is true, isn't it? （不用didn’t he?）
②Where we will build the dam has not been decided yet, has it? （不用won’t we?）
二十四、陈述部分的主语为动名词或不定式时，问句的主语用it代替。如：
①To do one good deed is easy for a person, isn't it?②Skating is your favorite sport, isn't it?
反意疑问句专题练习
1.I think they will go to town tomorrow, ________?
A.do I B.don’t I C.will they D.won’t they
2.I don’t believe he can catch up with me, _________?
A.can he B.can’t he C.do I D.don’t I
3.I’m sure that I will be well again, __________?
A.am I B.aren’t I C.will I D.won’t I
4.I am afraid that he will not come, _______? A.am I B.aren’t I C.will he D.won’t he
5.They don’t believe you are wrong, _________?
A.are you B.aren’t you C.do they D.don’t they
6.He thought you were Beijing, _________?
A.didn’t he B.did he C.weren’t you D.were you
7.We told you that he would come tonight, _______?
A.didn’t we B.did we C.would he D.wouldn’t he
8.The reporter said the news was not true, _________?
A.wasn’t it B.didn’t he C.did he D.was it
9.They suggested that he should go to work at once, ________?
A.did they B.didn’t they C.should he D.shouldn’t he
10.Your brother has lunch at home, _________-?
A.hasn’t he B.doesn’t he C.has he D.does he
11.John has to get up early, ________? A.has he B.hasn’t he C.does he D.doesn’t he
12.She has got to get everything ready, _________? A.hasn’t she B.has she C.doesn’t she D.does she
13.She has never been to China, _________?A.has she B.hasn’t she C.doesn’t she D.does she
14.She had better tell you the news right now, _______?
A.had she B.hadn’t she C.did she D.didn’t she
15.They would rather not have done that last week,________?
A.would they B.wouldn’t they C.have they D.haven’t they
16.I’d rather stay here for a rest, ________?A.did I B.would I C.didn’t I D.wouldn’t I
17.You ought to do it again,_________?A.ought you B.oughtn’t you C.do you D.don’t you
18.You must do that again,_________?A.mustn’t you B.needn’t you C.do you D.don’t you
19.He must wait here, __________?A.mustn’t he B.doesn’t he C.shouldn’t he D.does he
20.He must be a good worker,________?A.mustn’t he B.needn’t he C.isn’t he D.doesn’t he
21.He must have been to China twice,_________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
22.He must have been ill last week,__________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
23.He must have known you during the war,__________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
24.He must have known the result already,_________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
25.There used to be a temple here,________?
A.didn’t there B.did there C.used there D.was there
26.They used to be good friends,________?
A.usedn’t they B.didn’t they C.used they D.both A and B
27.Mother usedn’t to dress the baby,______?
A.didn’t she B.did she C.used she D.usedn’t she
28.The students used to go to see him,_______?
A.usedn’t they B.didn’t they C.used they D.both A and B
29.Alice, you have a little more chicken,________?
A.haven’t you B.don’t you C.will you D.do you
30.Hi! Alice, you have bought a little chicken,_________?
A.haven’t you B.won’t you C.will you D.have you
31.You two had breakfast just now,__________?
A.hadn’t you B.didn’t you C.had you D.did you
32.You two had finished the breakfast,_________?
A.hadn’t you B.didn’t you C.did you D.had you
33.Neither you nor I was invited to the party,________?
A.were we B.weren’t we C.was I D.were you
34.Either he or she is to clean the window,__________?
A.are they B.aren’t they C.isn’t he D.isn’t she
35.It is Jiao Yulu who turned Lankao into a rich district,_______?
A.is it B.isn’t it C.did he D.didn’t he
36.It was you who never made such mistakes,________?
A.wasn’t it B.weren’t you C.did you D.didn’t you
37.The little child dared not climb the tree,________?
A.dared he B.did he C.was he D.does he
38.What he said is not wrong,__________? A.didn’t he B.did he C.is it D.isn’t it
39.That his parents were ill made him a little worried,_________?
A.weren’t they B.were they C.didn’t it D.wasn’t it
40.He dislikes what you have said,__________?A.does he B.doesn’t he C.have you D.haven’t you
41.(2003Shanghai spring)If you want help—money or anything,let me know,____you?
A.don’t B.will C.shall D.do
42.(2002Shanghai)Mrs. Black doesn’t believe her son is able to design a digital cameral,____?
A.is he B.isn’t he C.doesn’t she D.does she
43.(2002Shanghai spring)Brian told you that there wasn’t anyone in the room at that time,___?
A.was there B.wasn’t there C.didn’t he D.did he
44.(2001Shanghai)I don’t suppose anyone will volunteer,_____?
A.do I B.don’t I C.will they D.won’t they
45.(2000Shanghai)The news that they fialed their driving test discouraged him,___?
A.did they B.didn’t they C.did it D.didn’t it
46.(NMET99)—Alice,you feed the bird today,____? --But I fed it yesterday.
A.do you B.will you C.didn’t you D.don’t you
一、考点聚焦
1.可数名词单、复数变化形式
（1）规则变化。
①单数名词词尾直接加-s。如：boy — boys, pen — pens。
②以s、x 、ch 、sh结尾的单词一般加-es。如：glass — glasses,box— boxes, watch — watches, brush — brushes。
特例：stomach — stomaches。
③以“辅音字母 + y”结尾的变“y”为“i”再加“-es”。如：
baby — babies, lady — ladies, fly — flies。
④以“o”结尾的多数加-es。如：tomato — tomatoes, potato — potatoes, hero — heroes。但以两个元音字母结尾的名词和部分外来词中以o结尾的词只加-s。 如：radio — radios, zoo — zoos, photo — photos, piano — pianos, kilo — kilos, tobacco — tobaccos。
⑤以“f”或“fe”结尾的名词复数形式变“f”或“fe”为“v”，之后再加-es。如：wife — wives, life — lives, knife — knives, wolf— wolves, self — selves, leaf — leaves等。特例：handkerchief— handkerchiefs, roof — roofs, chief — chiefs, gulf — gulfs, belief — beliefs, cliff — cliffs。
⑥改变元音字母的。如：man — men, mouse — mice, foot — feet,
woman — women, tooth — teeth, goose — geese, ox — oxen。特例：child — children。 ⑦复合名词的复数形式。（A）在复合词中最后名词尾加-s。如：armchair — armchairs, bookcase — bookcases, bookstore — book-
stores。（B）man和woman作定语修饰另一个名词时，前后两个名词都要变成复数。如：man doctor — men doctors, woman driver — women dri-
vers。（C）与介词或副词一起构成的复合名词应在主体名词部分加-s。如：brother-in-law — brothers-in-law, passer-by — passers-by。
⑧有的名词有两种复数形式。如：zero — zeros 、zeroes, deer —
deers 、deer。penny的两种复数形式含义有所不同。如：pence（便士的钱数），pennies(便士的枚数)。
（2）不规则变化。
①单、复数同形。如：means, aircraft, deer, fish, Chinese,
Japanese, sheep, works（工厂）,cattle。
②合成名词的复数。如：boy-friend — boy-friends, go-between— go-betweens(中间人)，grown-up — grown-ups。
③有些名词通常只用作复数。如：glasses眼镜，clothes衣服，goods
货物，trousers裤子，belongings所有物,wages工资，riches财富, surroundings环境，ashes灰尘, campasses圆规，cattle家畜，congratulations祝贺，have words with sb. 同某人吵架，in high spirits以很高热情地，give one’s regards to sb.向某人问侯，in rags衣衫破烂，It is good manners to do sth.有礼貌做某事。
④集体名词的数。有些集体名词通常只用作复数，如：people,
cattle, police; 有些名词只用作单数，如：machinery, furniture, mankind, jewellery;有些名词既可用作单数又可用作复数，单数看做整体，复数看做集体的各个成员。如：The crew is large.船员人数很多（指整体）；The crew are all tired.船员们都累坏了（个体）。
2、不可数名词的数
（1）一般说来抽象名词为不可数名词，但当抽象名词表示具体的东西时，可用作可数名词且词义发生变化，主要类型如下：
①抽象名词表示具有某种特性、状态、感情情绪的人或事。如：
抽象名词（不可数） 具体化（个体名词，可数名词）
in surprise惊讶地 a surprise一件令人惊讶的事
win success获得成功 a success一个(件)成功的人(事)
win honor赢得荣誉 an honor一个(件)引以为荣的(事)
Failure(失败)is the mother of success a failure失败者
失败是成功之母。
by experience靠经验 an experience一次经历
youth青春 a youth一个青年人
have pity on sb.怜悯某人 a pity可惜的事情
with pleasure乐意 a pleasure乐事
②抽象名词与a(an)连用，淡化了抽象概念，转化为似乎可以体验到的动作、行为或类别。如： A knowledge of English is a must in international trade.
Would you like to have a walk(swim, bath, talk)with me?
It is waste of time reading such a novel.
She made an apology to her mother for her wrong doings.
(2)物质名词是不可数名词，但表示数量或种类之多时，可以用作可数名词。如：
①物质名词有形或数的相应物体，有单、复数。如：some coffee一些咖啡，a coffee一杯咖啡，three coffees三杯咖啡，some drink一些饮料, a drink一杯饮料，three drinks三杯饮料，his hair他的头发，a few grey hairs几根白发，glass玻璃，a glass一只玻璃杯。
②物质名词有前置后置修饰时，前面要使用不定冠词。
have breakfast The road is covered with snow.
have a wonderful breakfast They have a heavy snow every year.
Time and tide wait for no man.
We had a wonderful time last night.
(3)有复数形式的不可数名词
①有些抽象名词往往以复数形式出现，起到一种丰富语言感情色彩或强调某种特殊状态的作用。如：
Use your brains, please.
They have smoothed away the difficulties.
Have you made preparations for tomorrow’s meeting?
Many thanks for your kindness.
No pains, no gains.
After many failures, they finally succeeded.
②有些物质名词以复数形式出现，表示数量之多，范围之广。如：
The boy burst into tears at the bad news.
The rising waters did a lot of harm to the crops.
The stone bridge broke down in heavy rains.
3.名词所有格
（1）“’s”所有格的特殊表示形式有：
① 用于表示时间、距离、价格、重量等的名词后，如：today’s
newspaper,five minutes’walk(drive),five pounds’weight, tend
ollars’worth of coffee。
②用于表示国家、世界、城市等地方的名词后。如：the earth’s planet, the word’s population, China’s industry, New York’s parks。
（2）“of”所有格的特殊表示方式有：
①表示“部分”时，一般在所修饰的名词前有一个表示数量的词（a、two、several、some、no、many等），如：Some students of Mister Zhang’s have gone to college.张老师的一些学生已经上大学了。
②表示“其中之一，其中一部分”的意思时，用：a friend of Tom’s
汤姆的一个朋友（许多朋友中的一位）。
③表示赞扬、批评或厌恶等感情色彩时，应该用：that/this/these/
those + 名词（单、复数）of Mary’s/yours/his/hers。如：
That invention of hers belongs to the world. 她的那项发明是属于全世界的（表赞赏）。
4、名词作定语
英语中有些名词没有其对应的同根形容词，这些名词可以直接用来作定语修饰另一个名词。
（1）分类意义。
air pollution 空气污染 boy friend 男朋友
coffee cup咖啡杯 income tax所得税
tennis ball网球 song writer歌曲作家
body language身体语言 road accident交通事故
Nobel Prize诺贝尔奖
（2）时间、地点、称呼等。
Doctor Jack杰克医生 Professor Li李教授
evening school夜校 winter sleep冬眠
street dance 街舞 country music乡村音乐
village people村民 school education学校教育
China problem中国问题
（3）表目的、手段、来源，所属意义。
reception desk接待台 sports field田径场
stone table石桌 color TV彩电
weather report天气预报
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. It is generally believed that teaching is ___________it is a science.
(NMET 2001)
A.an art much as B.much an art as
C.as an art much as D.as much an art as
解析：答案为D。当名词前有what、so、as、too、quite等词修饰时，其形容词被这些词修饰，组成下列结构，如：What a nice book! This is too heavy a box for me to carry. He is not as honest a boy as Mike.等，应采取too/how + 形容词（副词）+ a(an) + 名词的形式。要记住一些类似的特殊结构，并加以分析。2. The police are offering a __________to anyone who can give information about the lost key.（NMET 1999）
A.price B.prize C.reward D.money
解析：答案为C。price 价格，价钱；prize奖金。Ｄ项是钱，属不可数名词，题中所要填的是“酬金，报酬”。注意正确理解名词的含义及其搭配是活用语言的基础，在复习备考中要熟练掌握考纲中一些名词的词义、搭配、习惯等，才能更好辨析名词，从而选择最符合句意的选项。
3.You’ll find this map of great _____________in helping you to get round London.（NMET 1998）
A.price B.cost C.value D.usefulness
解析：答案为C。本题考查特定语境中名词的词义及“be of + 抽象名词”结构。Price (价格)，cost（价钱，费用，成本）不符合题意，value作“quality of being useful or desirable”解时，常与of搭配，在句中作表语或补语，意为“有用，有价值”。故选择value。注意名词词义辨异及惯用法表达，题中“of + 抽象名词”相当于该名词的形容词形式。
冠词
一、考点聚焦
1.不用冠词的情况
（1）专有名词、物质名词、抽象名词、人名、地名等名词前，一般不加冠词。
China , America, Smith
Air is matter.
（2）可数名词前有物主代词、指示代词、名词所有格等限制时，不加冠词。
This dictionary is mine.
（3）季节、月份、星期、节日、假日、一日三餐名称前一般不加冠词。
March, May Day, National Day, Children’s Day, Women’s Day
Have you had supper?
Spring is the best season of the year.
（4）称呼语或指家用雇用的nurse、cook等名词前及表示头衔职务的名词作宾语、补语及同位语时，一般不加冠词。
What’s this, Father? We made him our chairman.
Ask nurse to put the child to bed. Professor Li.
（5）学科名称、球类、棋类名称前不加冠词。
Do you study physics?
He likes playing football/chess.
（6）复数名词表示泛指一类人或事物时前不用冠词。
They are peasants/ workers.
（7）在与by连用的交通工具名称前不加冠词。
by car, by bus,by bike, by train, by air/ water/ land
但：take a bus, come in a boat, on the train/ bus需注意。
（8）某些固定词组中不用冠词。
①名词词组中：
husband and wife, brother and sister, body and soul, day and night, knife and fork
②介词词组中：
to(at, from) school, in (to)class, in (to,at, from)university（college）,to（in, into, from）church, to(in,into, out of)prison(hospital, bed), to(at, from, out of)work, to(in, from) town,at (from)home, to(at)sea, at night(noon, midnight), by car (bus, bicycle, plane), on foot
注意：在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。
in hospital 住院（因病）
in the hospital在医院（工作、参观等）
in front of在前面，指某物体之外
in the front of在前部，指某物之内
in charge负责，主管 out of question没问题
in the charge由……负责 out of the question不可能
（9）as引导的让步状语从句中，作表语的名词不带冠词。
Child as she is, she knows a lot of French.
（10）系动词turn（作“变成”解）后作表语的单数可数名词前习惯不用冠词。
The young girl has turned writer.
= The young girl has become a writer.
（11）在单数名词 + after + 同一单数名词（表示“一个接一个”）结构中，单数可数名词前不加冠词。
She did experiment after experiment.
类似的还有：shop after shop, mistake after mistake
（12）形容词的最高级前、序数词前也有不用定冠词的情况。
①“most + 形容词原级”作“十分、非常、极”解时，前面不用定冠词。
Oh, it’s most beautiful.
②当两个形容词最高级并列修饰同一个名词时，第二个形容词前通常不用定冠词。
She is the tallest and fattest girl in our school.
③当形容词最高级作表语，不表示与其他人或物相比时，其前不用定冠词。
The market in the country is busiest in winter.
④形容词最高级前有名词所有格或物主代词时，不能用定冠词。
A wolf in a sheep’s skin is our most dangerous enemy.
⑤序数词前面一般加定冠词表示“第……”之意，但在second、third等词前加不定冠词表示“又一，再一”之意。
…why you took a second arrow
注意：下句中“a first”表示“第一名、冠军”。
He is a top student in our class, he often gets a first in maths.
（13）no与such连用时应放在such之前，such后面的名词不用冠词。
No such thing has ever happened in this village.
（14）never、ever置于作主语的名词前，这些名词前不用冠词。
Never did student study so hard.这个学生从未学得这么认真。
（15）有时为了节省空间、时间、金钱和精力，或为了引起注意力，省去a(n)或the,这主要用于新闻标题、工商业文件、广告、电报、公告、提纲、书名等。
Conference opens.会议召开了。
2.定冠词的使用情况
（1）使用定冠词的一般情况。
①特指或第二次提到。
②序数词前、最高级前、独一无二的东西前。
③用于表示发明物的单数名词前或某些专有名词前。
（2）定冠词使用特殊的场合。
① He hit him in the face.
beat sb. on the nose, take sb. by the arm, pat sb. on the head② the rich, the poor, the wounded 富人，穷人，伤员
③ the elder of the two, he more beautiful of the two两者中较年长的一位，较漂亮的一个
④ The sooner, the better.越快越好。
⑤ He got paid by the hour.他是按小时付工钱的。
by the yard/the dozen/the month/the year…
但：by weight按重量
⑥ in the 50s /in the 1870s（表示年代）
⑦ the Smiths/the Whites（表示一家人或夫妇俩）
⑧ in the water/field/light/shade/distance/middle/country/
rain
⑨ tell the truth/on the other hand/on the way home
⑩ 当抽象名词表示某一特定内容，特别是当它有一限定性修饰语时，
它与定冠词连用：
She is fond of music.
He is playing the music written by Beethoven.
Good advice is beyond price.
I’m sorry not to have taken the advice he gave.
3.不定冠词常用的几种情况
（1）表示“一”相当于“one”。I’ll return in a day or two.
（2）表示“每”相当于“per”。We have three meals a day.
（3）表示“同一性”相当于“the same”。The children are of an age.
（4）表示类指，表示“某类”。He wants to he a doctor.
（5）表示泛指，相当于“any”。A horse is a useful animal.
（6）表示某一个，相当于“a certain”。A Mr. Smith is asking to see you.
（7）与抽象名词连用，可以表示“一场、一次、一件”，如：a pleasure一件乐事，a surprise一件令人惊讶的事，a joy一件高兴的事，a pity一件遗憾的事，an honour一个（件）经以为荣的人(事)。
（8）与物质名词连用，表示“一种，一阵、一份”。
What a heavy rain!
What a good supper!
Please give me a black coffee!
4.冠词表类别的常见方式
（1）定冠词 + 单数可数名词，表示一个，代表一类。
The computer was invented in 1945.
The TV set was invented by Joan Baird.
The horse is a useful animal.
（2）不定冠词 + 单数可数名词（表示任意一个，某一个）。
A pen is a tool for writing.
A square has four sides.
A horse is a useful animal.
注意：man, woman表示泛指时，不用冠词，且常用单数。如：
Man is fighting a battle against pollution.
Man tries to be the protector of woman.
（3）可数名词或不可数名词，指类别（考虑到同类中的各个情况）。
Horses are useful animals.
Rice is a kind of food.
5.冠词位置问题
（1）不定冠词 + 副词 + 形容词 + 名词。
This is a very interesting story.
（2）such、what、both、all、quite、rather +不定冠词+形容词+名词。
I’ve never seen such a film!
Half a pound of pork,please!
What a good idea it is!
（3）as、so、too、how、however、enough+形容词+不定冠词+名词。
It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent.
I can’t finish the task in so short a time.
This seems not too long a distance.
We wonder how difficult a problem he worked out.
However low te price you paid,you waste your money.
He is brave enough a hunter to kill the bear.
（4）定冠词位置。
①half、twice、three times + the + 名词
He paid twice the price for it.
Their house is three times the size of yours.
②all、both、double + the + 名词
Both the blind men were mistaken.
All the students in our class are eager to know the secret.
I offered him double the amount, but he still refused.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.The warmth of ____________sweater will of course be determined by the sort of ___________wool used.（NMET 2001）
A．The ; the B．the ; / C．/; the D．/; /
解析：答案为B。第一空格为特指，交待the warmth的内容，第二空格为泛指，the sort of wool used所用羊毛的种类。此题有三点需注意：①正确理解sweater 这一句词在句中的类别。②掌握determine在句中作“决定”、“取决于”这个意思。③掌握定冠词表特指的基本用法。
2.Most animals have little connection with_________animals of___________different kind unless they kill them for food.（NMET 2000）
A．the … a B．/ … a C．the … the D．/ … the
解析：答案为B。名词复数表类别，其前不用冠词，故第一个空格不填冠词，表不定概念的“一种”，“某种”要用不定冠词a。要准确掌握冠词表类别的三种表达方式和不定冠词常用的几种情况，见前面要点考点聚
焦内容。
3.Paper money was in___________use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in __________thirteenth century.（NMET1999）
A．the … / B．the … the C．/ … the D．/ … /
解析：答案为C。题中in use是固定搭配，意为“在使用”，use为抽象名词，其前不用冠词。后者是序数词前用定冠词the。要牢记一些固定搭配如in use、under construction（在建设中）、in debt（欠债）、come to power（执政）、on fire（着火）、at table（用餐）、out of work（失业）等。
（一）名词
1．To the sea captain’s surprise，he found that travel could also be quite pieasant．
A．earth B．1and C．ground D．plain
2．Some famous singers live on the from their record sales．
A．salary B．value C．bill D．income
3．Many countries are increasing their use of nature gas，wind and other forms of ．
A．energy B．source C．power D．material
4．You can take as many as you like because they are free of ．
A．fare B．charge C．money D．pay
5．George always wants things done quickly．He’s got to .
A．idea B．means C．patience D．decision
6．Do you know the of the saying I just quoted?
A．source B．resource C．course D．cause
7．—Why did you refuse to move in the house?
—Because it was really in a poor and dirty ．
A．form B．kind C．shape D．state
8．His name was on the of my tongue，but I just couldn’t remember it．
A．end B．edge C．tip D．side
9．You shouldn’t let children play with ．It’s dangerous!
A．football B．watches C．matches D．chess
10．We’ll have PE this afternoon but I forgot to bring my .
A．sports clothes B．sport clothes C．clothes of sports D．sport’s clothes
11．Dark clouds are a of rain while a smile is a of friendship
A．gesture；sign B.mark；sign C.sign；gesture D.sign；mark
12．—Is the house very expensive，Dick?
—I don’t think it’s worth the they are asking．
A．price B．cost C．value D．money
13．These days I hire two in my house．
A．man servants B．men servant C．man servant D．men servants
14．The editor to1d the newsman to write report．
A．a two-thousand-words B．a two-thousands-words
C．a two thousand Word D．a two-thousand-word
15．The brook lies within of the train station．
A．ten-minute-ride B．ten minutes ride
C．ten minute’s ride D．ten minutes’ride
16．Though I spoke to him many times，he never took any of what I said．
A．remark B．observation C．attention D．notice
17． came that his should be kept secret．
A．A word；words B．The word；word C．Word：words D．Words；Word
18．We’ve missed the last bus．I’m aftaid we have no but to take a taxi．
A．way B．choice C．possibility D．selection
19．—How was your recent Visit to Qingdao?
—It was great．We visited some friends，and spent the days at the seaside．
A．few 1ast sunny B．1ast few sunny C．few sunny list D．1ast sunny few
20．We climbed higher up the mountain so that We could get a better ．
A．view B．idea C．point D．opinion
21．We have worked out a plan．But I’m not sure whether it will do in ．
A．fact B．practice C．deed D．time
22．—I’ve got an“A”in the examination．
——T11at’s a good .You’ll surely win a sec-ond．
A．result B．start C．news D．idea
23．The makes me feel sick．
A．sign B．sight C．scene D．look
24．— What a pleasant these trees give us!
——Why not stop here and have a rest in it?
A．shade B．shadow C．peace D．scene
25．They can never make good nurses，not having the necessary .
A．practice B．education C．exercise D．training
26．Mr Tong couldn’t keep pace with the others as they
marched along．He often stood out of ．
A．order B．sight C．mind D．line
27．I’m afraid that there is no for you in my car,because there are already five people．
A．place B．room C．need D．position
28． it is to go swimming on sueh a hot day!
A．What fun B．How fun C．What a fun D．How a fun
29．—Heavy trucks which run day and night are doing damage to our houses and shops of historical
A．scene B．period C．interest D．sense
30．The dress is nice but she doesn’t like the on the material．
A．sharp B．size C．model D．pattern
31．It is foolish to go to the of taking music lessons if you never practice．
A．expense B．sense C．pay D．money
32．For twenty years Gandhi p1ayed an important in working for equal rights fbr Indians．
A．action B．ro1e C．figure D．position
33．Last night the president made a speech on TV to the .
A.country B.state C.1and D.nation
34．The old house belongs to ．
A．Jack’s and his brother B．Jack’s and his brother’s
C．Jack and his brother’s D．Jack and his brother
35． will make a trip to China during the summer holidays．
A．The Evens B．The Even’s C．The Evenses D．The Evenses'
36．I’d like you to meet David’a cowboy．
A．dark，handsome and tall B．tall，handsome and dark
C．dark，tall and handsome D．tall，dark and handsome
37.The young student is as a writer．It’s to all his teachers．
A．success；surprise B．a success；sorprise
C．success；a surprise D．a success；a surprise
38.My mother’s is getting grey，but my father has only a few grey ．
A．hairs；hair B．hair：hair C．hair；hairs D．hair：hairs
39. unicle is going to pick them up at the airport this afternoon．
A．Jack’s and Joan’s B．Jack’s and Joan
C．Jack and Joan’s D．Jack and Joan
40.Many old houses are being pulled down to make for the apartment buildings．
A．room B．ground C．space D．area
41.Enough of it! Nobody here thinks what you are say ing hould make any ．
A．excuse B．sense C．use D．value
名词
1-5 BDABC 6-10 ADCCA 11-15 CADDD 16-20 DCBBA 21-25 BABAD 26-30 DBAC
31-35 ABDDC 36-40 DDCCA 41 B
冠词与数词
1．He has great interest in history，especially in history of Tang Dynasty．
A．a；the B．a；不填 C．不填；the D．不填；a
2．The party last night was success．we sang and danced until it came to end at twelve．
A．a；the B．the；an C．a；an D．不填；an
3．While Jane was cooking fish on open fire outside，her hair caught． fire．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．an；a D．an；不填
4．Young as he is，David has gained rich experience in society．
A．不填；不填 B．the；the C．a；不填 D．不填；the
5．People regard the wheel as invention of the
first importance in human history．
A．an；the B．an；不填 C．the；the D．the；不填
6．Mr Stock，who is in Mexico on ，runs small business．
A．business；a B．business；不填 C．the business；a D．business；不填
7．Fortunately he will go on holiday in place of Brown．
A．不填；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．the；不填
8．Zhang Hua is a student at ．
A．the University of Beijing B．the Beijing University
C．Beijing University D．University of Beijing
9．Many people are still in habit of writing silly things in public places．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．不填；the
10．Wouldn’t it be wonderful world if all nations
lived in peace with one another?
A．a；不填 B．the；不填 C．a；the D．the；the
11．Your uncle must have X- ray examination．
A．a B．不填 C．the D．an
12．I remember he lives in south，so we shouldn’t be walking to west．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；the D．the；不填
13．Where is ?
A．the manager office B．the office of the manager
C．the manager’s office D．the office of the manager’s
14．Five years ago her brother was university student of physics．
A．an；the B．a；不填 C．an；不填 D．a；the
15．—Do you know who invented telephone?
—No，but it is really most useful invention．
A．the；the B．a；a C．the；a D．a；the
16．Summers in south of France are for most part dry and sunny．
A．不填；a B．the；不填 C．不填；不填 D．the；the
17．The police have power to arrest bad people by 1aw．
A．the；the B．不填；the C．不填；不填 D．the；不填
18．—Do you like the novels?
—I don’t like either of them．Please show me third one．
A．a B．the C．不填 D．an
19．Keep away from the cage. lion is fierce animal．
A．The；the B．A；the C．A；不填 D．a；不填
20．Now the machine runs at double .
A．a speed B．speed C．the speed D．for speed
21．My mother is usually on duty in her office every few days．
A．the；a B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．a；不填
22．My brother likes to play football while my sister prefers to play violin．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．the；the
23．I came by sea and I had a 1ovely journey on Queen Elizabeth II．
A．不填；the B．the；不填 C．不填：不填 D．the；the
24．Cleaning women in big cities usually get paid
A．by a hour B．by an hour C．by the hour D．by hours
25．—I’m afraid I dare not speak in public．
—Just have try．
A．a；不填 B．不填；a C．the；a D．the；the
26．—What’s your elder sister?
—She is teacher and writer．
A．the；the B．a；不填 C．a；a D．the；a
27．She plays violin fairly well and makes a living by teaching violin．
A．the；不填 B．不填；不填 C．a；不填 D．a；a
28．These two rooms are of size．But another two rooms are three times size of them．
A．the；the B．a；the C．a；a D．the；a
29．He served in the army in when he was in
A．1940’s；his twenties B．the 1940s；the twenties
C．1940s’；his twenties D．the 1940’s；his twenties
30．This computer centre is larger than that one in the area．
A．one sixth B．four ninths C．fifth four D．two third
31．Paper produced every year is the world’s production of vehicles．
A．the three times weight of B．three times the weight of
C．as three tirues heavy D．three times as heavier as
32．The hero of the story is an artist in his ．
A．thirtieth B．thirty C．thirty’s D．thirties
33．Mr Smith me to buy several eggs for the dinner．
A．asked；dozen B．suggested；dozens of
C．had；dozen D．persuaded；dozens
34．—Tell me where you live，please．
—I live ．
A．in 123，King Street B．at 123，King Street
C．in King Street，123 D．at King Street，123
35．30％ of the cattle thin，but the rest fat．
A．are；are B．is；is C．is；are D．are；is
冠词与数词
1-5 ACDAB 6-10 ABCCA 11-15 DDCBC 16-20 DDADC 21-25 BAACB 26-30 BABDA
31-35 BDABA
一、考点聚焦
1、it的基本用法
（1）用作人称代词，代替前文提到过的事物。
The train has arrived. It arrived half an hour ago.
（2）用以代替提示代词this, that。
—What’s this? —It’s a knife.
—Whose watch is that? —It’s mine.
（3）起指示代词的作用，指一个人或事物。
—Who is knocking at the door? —It’s me.
（4）指环境情况等。
It was very noisy (quiet) at the very moment.
（5）指时间、季节等。
—What time is it? —It’s eight o’clock.
It often rains in summer here.
（6）指距离。
It is a long way to the school.
（7）作形式主语。
It is not easy to finish the work in two days.
It is no use crying over spilt milk.
It is as pity that you didn’t read the book.
（8）作形式宾语。
I think it no use arguing with him.
I found it very interesting to study English.
He made it clear that he was not interested in that subject.
（9）用于强调结构。
It was Xiaoming whom(that)I met in the street last night.
It was in the street that I met Xiaoming last night.
It ws last night that I met Xiaoming in the street.
It was I who met Xiaoming in the street last night.
2、含有“It is …”的句型
（1）It is time (for sb.) to do sth.
It is (high) time that sb. did sth.(虚拟语气)
（2）It is + 形容词（+of / for sb.）+ to do sth.
通常用 of的词有brave、clever、careful、hopeless、kind、good、naughty、nice、silly、stupid、foolish、wise等。
（3）It is + 形容词 + that + sb. + (should) do sth.（虚拟语气）
能用于这个句型的形容词有strange、wonderful、natural、good、proper、right、wrong、well、fortunate、important、necessary、useless、likely、probable、impossible等。有时可省去should而直接用动词原形。如：
It is important that we should pay close attention to grain.
It is natural that he（should）say so.
（4）It is no use/ good + doing sth.
It is no use trying again = It is of no use to try again.
（5）It is + 被强调部分 + that/who + …
Was it in the street that you met her?
Who was it that called him“comrade”?
It was not until yesterday that I met my old friend.
It is in a small factory that my brother is going to work.（注意上述各句均为强调句型的“考点”）
比较：It is a small factory where my brother is going to work.（定语从句）
（6）It is said/reported/announced/ (well) known … that…
（7）It is/was + 时间 + since … 从……已多久了。
It is three years since I met him in Beijing.
It was a long time since I (had) lived in that small mountain village with these farmers.（注意两句中的时态）
It is five months since I arrived in New York.我到纽约已经五个月了。
It is five months since I was in New York.我离开纽约已经五个月了。
（注意：终止性动词表示从动作发生时算起；如果是状态动词或持续性动词，则从动作或状态结束时算起。）
（8）It is + 时间 + before …
这个句型和上面句型中时间都是时间段，如long、years、months、weeks、five days、three hours、twenty minutes等。不过主句的时态多用一般将来时或一般过去时。
It will be several years before we meet again.
我们要过好几年才能再见面。
It was not long before they set out for the front.不久他们就出发去了前线。
（9）It is /was/will be the first/second/third … time that …
It is the first time that I have been here.
It was the second time that he had seen the film.
（10）It is up to sb. to do sth … 应由某人做某事。
It is up to you to decide whether we start or not.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. _________ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.(NMET 1995)
A.There B.This C.That D.It
解析：答案为D。本题考查作形式主语的用法。that引导的从句是真正的主语。为避免头重脚轻而平衡句子结构，将it置于句首作形式主语。
2. I hope there are enough glasse for each guest to have ________.(NMET 1995)
A.it B.those C.them D.one
解析：答案为D。本题考查替代词it和one的区别。it用于替代同类的、特定的、同一的事物；one替代同类的、泛指的人或物。根据题意“我希望有足够的杯子使每个客人有一个。”可知应用one泛指enough glasses中的一个。
3. Was __________ that I saw last night at the concert?
A.it you B.not you C.you D.that yourself
解析：答案为A。本题考查强调句型的疑问式。只须将句序变为陈述句便不难得出答案。
三、常见用法有以下几类：
1、it可用于代替上文中提到的那一个事物。
2、it可用于代替上文中说到的一件事。
3、it可用于代替不知情的人（尤其是不知身份、性别和姓名的人）。
4、it可用于表示时间、天气、距离、计算结果等。
5、it可用于代替不定式、动名词、从句等，充当形式主语。其常用句型为： It---be---adj./ n. / v-ed---to+V/ V-ing/ Clause
6、it 可用于代替不定式、动名词、从句，充当形式宾语，把真正宾语（不定式、动名词、名词或从句）置于句末。其常用句型为： S---Vt---it---adj./ n.---to+V / V-ing /n./ Clause
7、 it可用于构成强调句，把一个句子中除谓语以外的句子成分（如主语、宾语、表语、状语等）提到句首加以强调。其构成形式是：It is(was) + 被强调成分（不能改变被强调成分的数和格）+ that/ who+原句剩余部分
8、it常用于一些固定结构中，作无人称代词用，充当主语等。
it用法专题练习1：
1---What’s this? ---_______ a map of China
A.This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
2---Where is my pen? ---_____on the desk.
A.This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
3I was disappointed with the film. I had expected_____to be much better.
A.it B.this C.them D.one
4They often help us with our research. ______kind of them.
A.They are B.You are C.It is D.This is
5Tom’s mother kept telling him to work harder, but______didn’t help.
A.he B.she C.this D.it
6John passed the exam successfully and _____was more than we had expected.
A.he B.it C.this D.there
7---Who’s knocking at the door? ---_____ me.
A.It’s B.I’m C.That’s D.This is
8---Who’s the baby in the photo? ---_____ my brother.
A. This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
9_____ Sunday today. Let’s go for an outing.
A.There is B.It’s C.This is D.That’s
10_____ was raining heavily when the film was over.
A.Weather B.Sky C.It D.There
11______a long way from my home to the school.
A.It is B.This is C.There is D.There has been
12---What’s ten added to six? ---______ sixteen.
A.There is B.It is C.This is D.We have
13_____ important to learn English well.
A.This is B.That’s C.It’s D.There’s
14_______ great fun to play basketball after school.A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
15______ no use asking them for help.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
16_______a waste of money smoking a lot.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
17_____strange that he should say such words to you.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
18_____ said that only three people could understand Einstein at that time.
A.It has B.It is C.This is D.There has
19Einstein found _____ hard to get along with the other boys at school.
A.its B.it’s C.it D./
20They feel _____ a pity that they should miss the wonderful film.
A.its B.this C.it D./
21The dusty air makes _____ difficult to get a clear picture.
A.its B.it’s C.it D./
22I find _____no need going to town without any money on me.
A.its B.this C.it D./
23He thinks _____a duty to work for the people.
A.its B.this is C.it D./
24We feel _____a pity _____ we (should) miss the chance of going to the party.
A.its,that B.this,that C.it,that D.that,that
25____ was not until he got to the office _____ he remembered leaving the key home.
A.It,it B.It,that C.It,when D.That,when
26________ am ready to help you out of the danger.
A.It is I who B.it is me who C.It is me that D.This is me that
27_____English_____I will try to learn well.
A.It is,that B.This is,that C.That,which D.There is,which
28---I’m afraid I can’t do the job as you told me to. ---_______matter.
A.You don’t B.It doesn’t C.There isn’t D.This isn’t
29_____ years ______ I enjoyed myself so much.
A.It is,that B.There is,that C.It is,since D.There has,since
30_____ a year _____ I go to college.
A.It will be,before B.It will be,when C.This will be,when D.It has been,that
31_____won’t be long_____ he catches up with us.
A.It,before B.There,before C.That’s, when D.It, when
32______ doesn’t matter whether he comes or not.
A.He B.It C.She D.What
33_____ matter when he will come back home?
A. Does it B.Do you C.Does he D.Does this
it用法专题练习2
1.___is four years since I left my hometown.
A.It B.There C.This D.That
2.___is no good____ without doing anything.
A.This, talking B.It, to talk C.It, talking D.That, to talk
3.The people there felt___ not so difficult to work with him.
A.it B.this C.it’s D.that
4.How long____ to finish the work?
A.you’ll take B.will take you C.you’ll take it D.will it take you
5.____is a long way to school, which means____is a long way to go before we arrive.
A.It, there B.There, it C.It, it D.There, there
6.Mike’s mother was always telling him that he should not be lazy, but___ didn’t help.
A.she B.it C.he D.which
7._____ you met Jane?
A.Where was that B.Who was it that C.Where was it that D.Where it was that
8.Who was____ that called him “comrade”?
A.he B.that C.it D.one
9.They are all classmates. ____ is no wonder that they should help each other with
their studies.
A.There B.It C.This D.That
10.____ to all that Taiwan is the largest island in China.
A.As knows B.As we know C.It is known D.What is known
11.It was in the lab____ was taken charge of by Professor Black____ they did the
experiment.
A.that, where B.which, that C.whom, that D.which, where
12.____will be years____ we meet again.
A.There, since B.There, after C.It, that D.It, before
13.____ seems unlikely that he will catch the train.
A.It B.The man C.This D.That
14.____is easy to learn English, but ____is difficult to learn____ well.
A.It, it, this B.It, this, it C.It, it, it D.It, which, which
15.I don’t remember how many years ago_____ I last met you.
A.it was that B.that was it C.was it that D.that was when
16.---___ you left school? ---About a year ago.
A.When was that B.When was it C.When was it that D.How long was that
17.Will you see to____ that our gift is taken back?
A.me B.yourself C.it D.them
18.Was___because____ snowed last night that you didn’t come?
A.it, it B.that, it C.it, that D.it, why
19.___was only when I reread the poems again____I began to appreciate their beauty.
A.That, why B.It, that C.It, it D.That, that
20.I hate_____ when people talk with their mouths full.
A.it B.that C.these D.them
21.Was______ I saw last night at the cinema?
A.you it that B.it you C.that you it D.it you that
22.____ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.
A.There B.This C.That D.It
23.Does_____ matter if he can’t finish the job on time?
A.this B.that C.he D.it
24.I don’t think _____ possible to master a foreign language without much memory
work.
A.this B.that C.its D.it
25.Is_____ necessary to complete the design before National Day?
A.this B.that C.it D.he
26.I’m quite able to afford the suit. _____ is too cheap.
A.It B.Which C.Its D.There
27._____is a pity that he should be absent from the meeting today.
A.There B.That C.It D.He
28.---____is weeks since he was drunk. He hasn’t been drunk so much like this.
A.He B.It C.That D.There
一、考点聚焦
代词分为九类：人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、相互代词、指示代词/疑问代词、连接代词、不定代词、关系代词。大多数代词具有名词和形容词的作用。
1、人称代词
（1）人称代词作主语用主格，作宾语、表语用宾格，但应注意以下4中情况：
①作主语的人称代词如果孤立地使用于无谓语动词的句子中，或在这种句子中与动词不定式连用，常用宾格。
—Does any of you know where Tom lives?
—Me.
What! Me (to)play him at chess? No!
②句子中代词作宾语或宾语补足语时，与所替代的名词在人称、数、格在意义上一般要保持前后一致。
The thief was thought to be he.(the thief是主格，故用he代替)
They took me to be her.他们误以为我是她。（me是宾格，故用her
替代）
③作表语人称代词一般用宾格，但在强调句型中，被强调部分代词的格不变。
I met her in the hospital.→It was her who I met in the hospital.
④在比较级的句子中than、as后用主格、宾格都可以。如：He is taller than me(I).但在下列句中有区别。
I like Jack as much as her.=I like both Jack and her.
I like Jack as much as she.=I like Jack and she likes him, too. (2)两个以上的人称代词并列，其次序排列原则：
①在并列主语中，“I”总是放在最后，排列顺序为：二 三 一（人称）。宾格me也一样。
You ,she and I will be in charge of the case.
Mr.Zhang asked Li Hua and me to help him.
②第三人称，男女两性并用，男先女后。
He and she still don’t agree to the plan.
(3)几个人称代词的特殊用法。
①we/you(口语)常用来泛指一般人。
②she可以代表国家、船只、大地、月亮等。
The “Titanic”was the largest, wasn’t she?
2.物主代词
（1）名词和形容词性物主代词各自的语法功能。
（2）one’s own…=...of one’s own句式的转换。
（3）某些固定结构中常用定冠词代替物主代词。
如： take sb. by the arm, be wounded in the leg.
3.反身代词
（1）反身代词的语法功能：宾语、表语、主语或宾语的同位语。
（2）反身代词和某些动词连有，构成固定短语。
enjoy oneself, feel oneself, make oneself at home, make oneself understood
（3）反身代词还可用于某些成语中。
for oneself为自己或独立地，of oneself自然地，自动地
by oneself独自地，in oneself本身性质，beside oneself喜怒哀愁至极
This problem gets a chapter to itself.这个问题占了一章（独有）。
Just between ourselves, I don’t think much of him.私下地说我并不怎么看重他。
They were discussing about it among themselves.（相互共同）
Left to himself he began to write.别人走后只留下他，他写了起来。
I’m very angry with myself.生自己的气。
4.相互代词（each other, one another）
相互代词无人称、数和格的区别，在句中作宾语。其所有格分别为each other’s 、one another’s ,作定语。
一般来说，each other指两者之间，one another指三者或三者以上之间，但现在区分已不明显。
5.指示代词（this, that , these, those, such, same）
指示代词具有形容词和代词两种词性，在句子中可以作定语、主语、宾语或表语等。
（1）指示代词this和that的区别。
①this (these)一般指时间或空间上较近的人或物；that(those)常指时间或空间较远的人或物。
This is my desk and that is yours.
In those days they could not go to school.
②this常指后面要讲到的事物，有启下的作用；that则指前面讲到过的事物，有承上的作用。
I want to tell you this:the English party will be held on Saturday
afternoon. He hurt his leg yesterday. That’s why he didn’t come.
③为了避免重复，常用that或those代替前面已提过的名词。
The weather of Beijing is colder than that of Nanjing.
The ears of a rabbit are longer than those of a fox.
④this在电话用语中作自我介绍，that询问对方；this和that可以当副词用，意思相当于副词so。
（2）such和same的用法。
①such指“这样的”人或事，在句中作主语和定语。
Such was the story.
We have never seen such a tall building.
②same指“同样的”人或事，在句中作主语、表语、宾语和定语，same的前面要用定冠词the.
The same can be said of the other article.
另一篇文章也是同样的情况。（主语）
Whether he can do it or not,it is all the same to me.
他是否能做这事，对我来说都一样。（表语）
6、疑问代词（who,whom,which,what,whose）
疑问代词在句中作主语、宾语、定语和表语。
（1）who/what
①询问姓名或关系。——Who is he? ——He is my brother./He is
Henry.询问职业或地位。——What is he？ ——He is a lawyer/teacher.
②What/who 作主语时，谓语动词的数取决于说话人的视点，可单数也可复数。
What is /are on the table?
Who is/are in the library?
(2)which与who、what
which表示在一定范围内，而who、what则无此限制。
I found two books on the desk.Which is yours?
7.连接代词和关系代词
连接代词与疑问代词的形式相同，主要有who、whom、whose、what、which以及它们与ever合成的代词whoever、whomever、whatever、whichever等。它们用来引导主语从句，宾语从句和表语从句，即连接复合句中的主句和从句，并在从句中担任一定的句子成分，以连接代词引起的名词性从句前不能再加that.
关系代词是用来引导定语从句的代词，它们包括who、whom、whose、which、that等。这两类代词的用法详见“名词性从句”和“定语从句”部分。
8、不定代词
不定代词主要有：all、each、every、both、either、neither、one、none、little、few、many、much、other、another、some、any、no等。还有由some、any、no和every构成合成代词，不定代词具有名词和形容词的性质，并有可数和不可数之分，在句中可以作主语、表语、宾语、同位语、定语、状语等（every、no只能作定语）。下面介绍几组主要不定代词的用法与区别。
（1）some与any
一般用法：some、any可与单、复数可数名词及不可数名词连有。some一般用于肯定句，any多用于疑问、否定或条件句。
He has some Chinese paintings.(定语)
Some like sports,others like music.(主语)
Ask me if you have any questions.(定语)
Do you have any questions to ask?(定语)
I don’t know any of the students.（宾语）
特殊用法：
①any用于肯定句表示“任何”的意思。
Any child can do that.（定语）
You may take any of them.（宾语）
②some用于单数可数名词前表示“某一”。
Smith went to some place in England.（定语）
③在期待对方回答yes 时，some用在表示请求或邀请的问句中。
Would you like some bananas?（邀请）
Mum,could you give me some money?(请求)
④some 用于否定句表示部分否定。
I don’t know some of the students.（宾语）
some和any在句中还可作状语，作副词。some意为“大约”相当于“about”,而any则表示程度，意为“稍，丝毫”。如：
There are some 300 workers on strike.
Do you feel any better today?
(2)one,both,all
①one作定语、表语、主语或宾语，可以指人或物，表示“一个”的意思，其复数为ones,指人时，其所有格是one’s，反身代词是oneself.
One should try one’s best to serve the people.(主语、定语)
This is not the one I want.(表语)
one、ones可以代替上文提到过的名词，以免重复，one、ones前面分别可以用this、that、these、those或the、which等词修饰。如：
These books are more interesting than those ones.
Here are three pens.Which one is yours,this one or that one or the one in the pencil-box? ②both用作定语、宾语、主语和同位语，可以指人或指物，表示“两者都”的意思。
This maths problem can be worked out in both ways.(定语)
Both of the boys are here.(主语)
We both are students.(同位语)
注意：both用于否定句，表示部分否定；表示完全否定时，用neither。如：Both of us are not teachers.我们俩并不都是教师。
Neither of us is a teacher. 我们俩都不是教师。
both不能放在the、these、those、my等之后，而应放在它们的前面。如：Both my parents like this film.
Both the /these boys are tall.
③all用作主语、表语、宾语、定语、同位语，指“全部的”、“整个的”，可与可数或不可数名词连用，除少数情况外，一般不与单数可数名词连用，与复数名词连用时，表示“所有的”、“全部的”，指三个或三个以上的人或物。
He gave me all the money.他把全部的钱给了我。
All the schools are flooded.所有的学校都被淹了。
I told him all about it. 我把一切都告诉了他。
That’s all for today.今天就在这儿。
They have all been to Xi’an.他们都去过西安。
注意：all 用于否定句，表示部分否定，完全否定用none。如：
Not all the ants go out for food.(or:All the ants don’t go out for food.)并不是所有的蚂蚁都出去寻找食物。
None of the money is mine.这钱一分也不是我的。
（3）many和much
many和much都表示“许多”，但many修饰或代替复数可数名词，much修饰或代替不可数名词。它们在句中可作主语、宾语、定语。much有时用作状语。
（4）few, little; a few, a little
few和little表示没有多少，含否定意义；而a few 和a little表示有一些，有几个，含肯定意义。另外，few、a few 修饰可数名词；little、a little修饰不可数名词。它们在句中常用作定语、主语和宾语。
（5）no和none
no=not any,表示“没有”，用来修饰可数名词或不可数名词，通常作定语，none代替不可数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；代替可数名词作主语时，谓语动词可用单数也可用复数形式。none还可以在句中作宾语。
注意：none既可以指人又可以指物，no one只能指人。
（6）each和every
each（各个），指两个或两个以上的人或物，侧重个体，在句中作主语、宾语、定语和同位语。every（每个），指三个或三个以上的人或物，侧重整体，在句中只能作定语。
Every student it our class has a dictionary.(定语，强调班上“所有的人”)
Each student in our class has a dictionary.（定语，强调各个个体）
Each of them has been there.（主语）
The teacher gave each of the students a new textbook.（宾语）
We each got a ticket.（同位语）
（7）either和neither
either是“两者中任何一个”的意思，可修饰或代替单数可数名词，neither是“两者中没有一个”的意思，可以修饰或代替单数可数名词，它们可在句在作主语、宾语或定语。如：
Here are two pens. You may take either of them.(宾语)
Neither boy knows French.(定语)
注意：①either也作副词，其意为“也”，用于否定句的句末。He doesn’like tea, and I don’t either.（状语）②either与or构成连词，意为“不是……就是……”或“要么……要么……”。He is either Japanese or Chinese. ③neither用作副词，意为“也不”，即“not…either”。He can’t do it, neither can I. ④neither可与nor构成连词，意为“既不……也不”。Neither he nor you are a student.
（8）other和another, the others 和others
the other表示“两者中的另一个”；“the other + 复数可数名词”
表示“其余（他）的……”；the others表示“其他的人或物”。“others及other + 复数名词”泛指“其他的（别的）人或物”。这些词语在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。如：
He got two books; one is textbook, the other is a novel.
Five of the pencils are red, the others(the other pens)are yellow.
Some are singing, others are dancing.
another修饰或代替单数可数名词，意为“（三个或三个以上的）另一个”，不能指两者中的另一个，在句中可作宾语和定语。
This coat is too dark. Please show me another.(宾语)
Please give me another book.（定语）
注意：another修饰复数名词时，意为“再，又”。如：Please give me another ten minutes. one … another(a second)… a third…the other…意为“一个……一个……一个……一个”用于三者或三者以上的排列。some…others…others…，意为“一些……一些……一些”。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The Parkers bought a new house but__________will need a lot of work before they can move in.(NMET 2001)
A.they B.it C.one D.which
解析：答案为B。分析题意可知，they显然不合，which多引导从句，从此为并列句式，one表示泛指，而此处空格内容指代前面提到的the new house。要仔细区别代词的所指范围，是人还是物，单数还是复数，另应注意句式。
2．If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay_________$ 15.（NMET 2000）
A.another B.other C.more D.each
解析：答案为A。本题考查不定代词用于表示数量附加的用法。“another + 数字 + 复数名词”结构通常用来表示在原有数量上的附加。若选C，正确结构是“数词 + more + 复数名词”。掌握another和more与数字搭配的位置是此题关键。another放在数字前，more放在数字后。NMET 1995中第25小题命题思路与此题一致。
3. Few pleasures can equal ___________of a cool drink on a hot day.(NMET 1999)
A.some B.any C.that D.those
解析：答案为C。本题考查替代词that的用法。that通常在句中替代同类的、特定的但不是同一的事物。本句中that替代the pleasure。句意为“在炎热的夏天几乎没有任何乐趣能与饮一杯冷饮的乐趣相比”。that指代单数或不可数名词，复数用those，表示特指，以避免重复，在比较句型中较为常用，代替可数名词时可换用the one。
代词与it的用法
1.Not all these books are second-hand； of them are new．
A．all B．none C．some D．each
2.You can buy these maps at railway station．They all have them．
A．that B．any C．every D．each
3.I prefer a street in a small town to in such alarge city as Shanghai．
A．that B．it C．this D．one
4.1've only seen one copy of Gone with the wind in the bookshop opposite．Tom，g。and buy ．
A．one B．any C．other D．the others
5.At the time neither country allowed to open any companies on its land．
A．another B．the other C．other D．the others
6.Most of the housework was done by two members of the family，my sister and ．
A．me B．I C．myself D．mine
7. was thoughtful John to send me this present．
A．1t；for B．He；for C．It；of D．He；of
8.—We walked twenty miles today．
—I never guessed you could have walked far．
A．as B．this C．that D．such
9.—Have you read through the two books he lent you last week?
—No， of them is easy to read．
A．either B．none C．both D．neither
10.Meeting my uncle after all these years Was an uncom fortable moment， I will always treasure．
A．that B．one C．it D．what
11.The noise of the party prevented me from getting sleep．
A．some B．any C．no D．many
12.I hate when people talk with their mouths full．
A．it B．that C．those D．then
13.The class are busy preparing lessons for a test．
A．his B．her C．their D．its
14.—Would you care for tea or coffee?
— ，thank you．I’ve just had some tea．
A．Little B．Both C．Either D．Neither
15.It was in the house he used to 1ive that the exhibition was held．
A．where B．that C．as D．which
16.I make a rule to take a walk in the morning．
A．that B．this C．myself D．it
17. of them knew about the plan because it was k。pt a secret．
A．Each B．Any C．None D．No one
18.We couldn’t eat in a restaurant because of us had money on us．
A．all；no B．any；no C．none；any D．no one；any
19.There’re so many kinds of tape-recorders on sale that I can’t make up my mind to buy．
A．what B．which C．how D．where
20． we can’t get seems better than we have．
A．What；what B．What；that C．That；that D．That；what
21．Two ancient Chinese vases， worth$1，000，were sold at Sothebv’s last Monday．
A．which B．each C．every D．all
22．The computers we use today are much better than we used ten years ago．
A．one B．that C．ones D．those
23. of them are party members．Some 0f them are League members．
A．None B．Neither C．No one D．Not all
24．—Why don’t we take a 1ittle break?
—Didn’t we just have ?
A．it B．that C．one D．this
25．One of the sides of the board should be painted yellow，and ．
A．the other is white B．another white
C．the other white D．another is white
26．Some people would rather ride bike as bike riding has of the trouble of taking buses.
A.nothing B.none C.some D.neither
27．The two friends met by chance .
A．another day B．some day C．the other day D．other day
28．—Which of the two Italian films do you like better?
— ，because they are meaningless．
A．Both B．Either C．None D．Neither
29． don’t visit this part of the town．
A．The most tourists B．Most tourists C．Most of tourists D．Most the tourists
30．——Would you like some soft drink?
——Yes，but only ．
A．a few B．a little C．few D．1ittle
31．—Which coat would you prefer，sir?
—I’ll take ，to have a change sometimes．
A．all them B．them all C．both them D．them both
32．—Do you have at home now，mum?
—No，we still have to get scores of eggs and some vegetables．
A．nothing B．everything C．anything D．something
33．It was a great party． enjoyed it．
A．All of us B．Evervbody of us C．Everybody D．All
34．If this dictionary is not yours， can it be?
A．what else B．who else C．which else’s D．who else’s
35．—Have you finished your report yet?
—No，I’ll finish it in ten minutes．
A．another B．other C．more D．less
36．—Is here?
—No，Bob and Tim have asked for leave．
A．anybody B．somebody C．everybody D．nobody
37．Sarah has read lots of stories by American writers．
Now she would 1ike to read stories by writers from countries．
A．some；any B．other；some C．some；other D．other；other
38．Tom’s mother kept telling him that he should work harder，but didn’t help．
A．he B．which C．she D．it
39．They are good friends． is no wonder that they know each other so well．
A．This B．That C．There D．It
40．This bus service is very good．There’s bus ten minutes．
A．each B．any C．all D．every
41．Mr Zhang’s English is very fluent，but he speaks Chinese．
A．1ittle B．fewer C．few D．1ess
42．—What Would you like to eat?
—I don’t mind． — whatever you’ve got．
A．Something B．Anything C．Nothing D．Everything
代词与it的用法
l-5 CBDCB 6-10 ACCDC 11-15 BACDA 16-20 DCCBA 2l-25 BDDCC 26-30 BCDBB
3l-35 DBADA 36-40 CCDDD 41-42 AB
Composed by Chinephone Lew
独立主格结构是由一个相当于主语的名词或代词加上非谓语动词、形容词（副）词、或介词短语构成的一种独立成分。该结构不是句子，也不是从句，所以它内部的动词不能考虑其时态、人称和数的变化，它与其主句之间既不能通过并列连词连接也不能有从句引导词引导，常用逗号与其主句隔开。独立主格结构在很多情况下可以转化为相应的状语从句或其他状语形式，但很多时候不能转化为分词形式，因为它内部动词的逻辑主语与主句主语不一致。在做这类题目时一定要小心判断，不能粗心大意。
一、独立主格结构的构成形式
1、逻辑主语+V-ing
这种构成形式内部的逻辑主语是分词的动作执行者，分词表示的动作不是整句主语发出的动作，而是其逻辑主语发出的动作。如：
1.__________no bus, we had to walk home.
A.There being B.Being C.Having been D.There was
2._______no bus, we had to walk home.
A.As there being B.As there was C.Being D.There was
3._______Sunday, the library doesn't open.
A.Being B.There being C.It being D.Having been
4.______Sunday, the library doesn't open.
A.As it being B.Being C.It is D.As it is
2、逻辑主语+V-ed
该构成形式内部的逻辑主语是分词的动作承受者。如：
1._________, the train started.
A.The signal given B.Giving the signal B.The signal being given D.The signal giving
2.__________, the train started.
A.After having given the signal B.After the signal given C.Giving the signal D.After the signal was given
3._________, the text became easier for us to learn.
A.Explaining new words B.New words explained C.Being explained new words D.Having explained new words
4.______________, the text became easier for us to learn.
A. When new words were explained B.Explaining new words B.New words explaining D.Being explained new words
3、逻辑主语+形容词（副词）
该结构相当于一个未带动词的“主—系—表”结构。如：
1.___________, the patient can leave the hospital.
A.Better conditions B.Conditions better C.Conditions are better D.Being better conditions
2._________, the patient can leave the hospital.
A.If better conditions B.If conditions better C.If conditions are better D.Being better conditions
3.________, we’d like to go outing.
A.Being Sunday B.Sunday OK C.Sunday is OK D.If Sunday OK
4.___________, we’d like to go outing.
A.If Sunday is OK B.Sunday being OK C.Sunday OK D.A,B and C
5._________, you can wait a while.
A.The play being still on B.The play still on C Being still on the play D.A and B
6._________, so you can wait a while
A.The play is still on B.The play being still on C.As the play is still on D.The play still on
4、逻辑主语+介词短语
该结构相当于不带动词的“主—系—介词短语”结构。如：
1.The boy followed the nobleman here, ___________.
A.a sword in hand B.a sword in his hand B.Being a sword in hand D.sword in hand
2.The boy followed the nobleman here ___________.
A.with a sword in his hand B.with a sword in hand C.with a sword being in hand D.a sword being in hand
3.He left the office, __________.
A.tears being in eyes B.tears in eyes C.being tears in eyes D.with tears being in eyes
4.He left the office __________.
A.with tears being in eyes B.with tears in her eyes C.being tears in eyes D.tears being in eyes二、独立主格结构在整句中可作以下成分：
1、原因状语
该结构在句中作原因状语时相当于一个原因状语从句。如：
1.________ no bus, we had to walk home.
A.There being B.As there was C.There was D.A and B
2._________Sunday, the library doesn't open.
A.It being B.As it is C.Being D.A and B
3.____________, I had to ask for two days’ leave.
A.Mother being ill B.Bother ill C.As mother was ill D. A,B and C
4.____________, we have to work late into the night.
A.The exam near B.The exam being near C.As the exam is near D. A,B and C
2、时间状语
独立主格结构作时间状语时相当于一个由when, as soon as, after等引导的时间状语从句。如：
1.__________, the train started.
A.The signal given B.After the signal was given C.Given the signal D.A and B
2.__________, the text became easier for us to learn.
A. New words explained B.When new words were explained C.When teacher explained new words D.all above
3、条件状语
独立主格结构作条件状语时可以改为由if引导的条件状语从句。如：
1.___________, we'll go to visit the Great Wall.
A.Weather permitting B.If weather permits C.If permitting D.A and B
2._________, the patient will recover himself soon.
A.If the treatment is in time B.The treatment in time C.The treatment being in time D.A,B and C
4、伴随状语
独立主格结构作伴随状语时相当于一个介词短语或并列谓语。如：
1.We have lessons every day, ___________.
A.Sunday included B.Sunday including C.Sunday is including D.all the above
2.The boy fell asleep,___________.
A.cap on head B.with a cap on head C.a cap on was on head D. all the above
3.Father came home,_________
A.a dog following him B.a dog followed him C.being followed by a dog D.all the above
with + 复合宾语结构常见类型及其用法
Composed by Chinephone Lew
“with + 复合宾语”结构是指“with +宾语（名词或代词）+ 非谓语动词（分词、不定式）、介词短语、形容词或副词等”所构成的一种介词短语。该结构内部若是动词，则其非谓语形式的选用要注意三点：若内部动词表示将来（无论主动还是被动），则用不定式；若内部动词表示被动且属过去，则用过去分词；若内部动词表示持续主动动作，则用现在分词。该结构在句子中可以作以下几种成分：
1、原因状语
1.With the man ______ us ahead, we had no trouble finding the village.
A.To guide B.Guiding C.Guided D.To have guide
2.With a lot of work_____, she doesn’t have time to rest. A.to do B.to be done C.doing D.done
3.With the machine _____all the time, we finished harvesting crops in time.
A.to work B.worked C.working D.Being working
2、时间状语
1.The street looks more beautiful with all the lights _____.A.are on B.on C.to be on D.been on
2.With our problem ________, we all felt happy.
A.to settle B.to be settled C.settled D.being settled
3.With his work______, the secretary began to walk home. A.to do B.doing C.done D.to be done
3、伴随状语
1.She left the offices with tears ________.
A.in her eyes B.in eyes B.being in eyes D.to be in eyes
2.The man found the door with both his eyes ______.
A.to be closed B.being closed C.closed D.closing
3.We felt uncomfortable with two waitresses_______.
A. standing by B.to be standing by C.stood by D.being standing by
4.The murderer was brought in, with his hands________.
A.to be tied behind B. tied behind C.tying behind D.being tied behind
5.You can’t see well ________.
A. with the glasses on B.being on the glasses C.with the glasses to be on D.with the glasses4、后置定语
1.Do you know the man ______ a book in his hand? A.with B.having C.being D.A and B
2.Please offer your seat to the woman _____ a baby in her arms.A.carrying B.having C.with D.all the above
分词、独立主格和“with + 复合宾语”作状语的区别
分词结构、独立主格结构、with + 复合宾语结构在句中均可作状语，其区别是这样的：
一、分词在句中作状语时句子的主语是分词的逻辑主语，即主句主语是分词的动作执行者（用现在分词）或动作承受者（用过去分词或现在分词被动式）。这种情况下的分词短语可以改为相应的状语从句或并列谓语。
分词短语在句中常作以下状语：
1、原因状语
1._______late, we had to walk home. A.Being B.As we were C.We being D.A and B
2.______ busy, they had no time to play. A.As they were B.Being C.Because they were D.all the above
2、时间状语
1._______ the students' homework, the teacher found a lot of mistakes.
A.When he was correcting C.When he corrected C.Correcting D.all the above
2.________by your teachers, you are supposed to be modest.
A.When you are praised B.Praised C.When praised D.all the above
3、条件状语
1.______ more time, he is sure to finish his test paper. A.If he is given B.If given C.Given D.all the above
2._______ another chance, I'll do my job better.A.If I have B.If having C.Having D.all the above
4、伴随状语
1.Father came back, _______ a bag of money on his left shoulder.
A.carrying B.he was carrying C.and he was carrying D.all the above
2.Father came back, _______ by a monkey.
A.and he was followed B.followed C.and was followed D.all the above
二、独立主格结构和with + 复合宾语结构在句子中作状语时，这种结构内部的分词或介词短语的逻辑主语不是整句的主语，即主句主语与分词的逻辑主语不一致。如：
1.______, we’ll go fishing in the country.
A.Permitting weather B.Weather permitted C.Weather permitting D.Permitting
2._________, he finished playing the game of chess.
A.His eyes closing B.With his eyes closed C.Closing his eyes D.Closed his eyes
3._________, I couldn’t get the book I wanted.
A.Closed B.Library closed C.Closing library D.With library closing
三、使用分词短语、独立主格结构、with + 复合宾语结构分别在句子中作状语时要注意：它们与主句之间不应有从属连词（如when, if, as soon as, as, while等）或并列连词（如and, but, or, so等）。例如：
1.____________ the teacher told the class to go through the text
A.Checking the answers B.Checking the answers and C.When checking the answers and D.all the above
2._________a rainy day, so all the farmers had to stay inside.
A.It being B.Being C.It was D.all the above
3.As_______a little sick, he remained at the clinic.
A.feeling B.he felt C.he felling D.all the above
四、在使用独立主格结构、with +复合宾语结构、分词结构作句子的状语时，一定要看句子主语同这些结构的逻辑关系。
1、当句子主语与该状语内部动词之间有逻辑上的主谓或动宾关系时，该状语可用分词结构或从句表示。
1.______ in thought, he almost ran into the car in front of him.
A.Lost B.As he was lost C.He lost D.A and B
2._______for the bus at the stop, he suddenly caught sight of a thief.
A.Waiting B.When he was waiting C.As he was waiting D.all the above
2、若句子主语与状语内动词之间不存在逻辑上的主谓或动宾关系且状语内有自已的逻辑主语。则该状语不能用分词结构，只能用独立主格结构、with +复合宾语结构或从句。如：
1.The soldier fell asleep ___________.
A.with the candle burning B.burning the candle C.when he was burning the candle D.when burning the candle
2.__________, the Tiananmen Square looks more beautiful.
A.Being on B.When being on C.With all the lights on D.When it turns on all the lights
3.________ the notice, he had an idea.
A.When he was watching B.Watching C.When watching D.all the above
4.________ the notice, an idea came to his mind.
A.When he was watching B.Watching C.When watching D.all the above
一、考点聚焦
1、序号表示法
（1）单纯的序号，可在基数词前加number,简写为No.。如：No.1第一号
（2）事物名词的序号表达法有什所不同：
①对于一些小序号可有序数词也可用基数词表达，形式分别为：the +
序数词 + 名词；名词 + 基数词。如：第一次世界大战可以表示为the First World War或World War One。
②对于一些大序号我们通常只用一种表达法，即名词 + 数词。如：501号房间表示为Room 501, 538路公共汽车表示为Bus 538。
③可用a / the + number + 基数词 + 名词。如：a No.5 bus一辆五路公共汽车，the No.8 bus那辆8路公共汽车。
2、倍数的表达方式
一般情况下我们用以下三种倍数表达方式：
（1）倍数用在as + 形容词 / 副词（原级）+ as结构之前。如：
They have three times as many cows as we do.
（2）倍数放在形容词或副词的比较级之前或by + 倍数用在比较级之后。如：
This rope is four times longer than that one.
They produced more products in 2001 than those in 2000 by twice.
（3）倍数用在表示度量名词前，其基本结构为：倍数 + the + size / length / weight … + of + 表示比较对象的名词，也可用于倍数 + what引导的从句中。如：
This room is three times the size of that one.
The college is twice what it was 5 years age.
You can’t imagine that rats eat 40 to 50 times their weight.
3、大约数的表示方法
（1）用ten、dozen、score、hundred、thousand、million等数词的复数后加of短语来表示几十、几百、上千、成千上万等大约数概念。如：
The little boy buys dozens of pencils every term.
Thousands of people died in the earthquake.
Every year tens of thousands of people go to work in Guangdong Province.
（2）用、less than、under、below、almost、nearly、up to 等来表示小于或接近某数目。如：
He is good at English, so he can finish the paper in less than two hours.
（3）用more than、over、above、beyond、or more等来表示超过或多于某个数目。如：
Peking University has a history of more than 100 years.
（4）用or、or so、about、around、some、more or less等表示在某一数目左右。如：
About 50 people were present at that time.
（5）用to、from … to…、between … and表示介于两数词。如：
His salary rises from 20 dollars a week to 35 dollars a week.
（6）注意事项：dozen、score、hundred、thousand、million作数词表示确切数量时，不用复数。如：three score, five dozen, seven million等。
4、分数的表达方式
（1）分子用基数词，分母用序数词，分子大于1时，分母用复数。如：one-third三分之一，three-sevenths七分之三。
（2）分子与分母之间加in, 分子在前，分母在后，分子分母都用基数词。如：one in ten 十分之一，five in eight八分之五。
（3）分子与分母之间加out of , 分子在前，分母在后，分子分母都用基数词。如：one out of ten十分之一，five out of eight八分之五。
5、百分数的表示法
（1）表示百分数直接将数词放在单词percent前面即可，如：twenty percent百分之二十。
（2）分数和百分数后面不能直接接名词或代词，而用以下形式：分数/百分数 ＋of + 冠词 / 限定词 + 名词 / 代词 ，其谓语动词与of后的名词在人称和数上保持一致，如：
Two-thirds of the money was spent on food.
About seventy percent of the earth surface is covered by water.
6、小数的表示法
小数的表示法，小数点前的总值发同其他数词一样，小数点用point,小数点后面的数读成个位数，如：9.65表示为nine point six five。218.39表示为two hundred and eighteen point three nine。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. ____________ people in the world are sending information by E-mail every day.(2001年上海春季高考卷)A.Several million B.Many millions
C.Several millions D.Many million
解析：答案为A。本题考查的是million表示确切数量的用法。million前需用数表确切数量，而不用many这类词，但可说many millions of（上百万的），故本题中用Several million。
2. The number of people invited __________ fifty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.(NMET 96)
A.were ; was B.was ; was C.was ; were D.were ; were
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是the number of + 名词与a number of + 名词作主语时谓语的单复数问题。the number of是“……的数目”，作主语时谓语动词用单数，而a number of 后接可数名词的复数形式，作主语时谓语动词用复数形式，故此题最佳选项为C。
3. Shortly after the accident, two ___________ police were sent to the sport to keep order .(NMET 92)
A.dozens of B.dozens C.dozen D.dozen of
解析：答案为C。此题考查的是数词dozen表示确切数量时的用法，dozen表示确切数量时用其单数形式，当dozens的复数后接of时则表示不确切数量，本题答案为C。
冠词与数词
1．He has great interest in history，especially in history of Tang Dynasty．
A．a；the B．a；不填 C．不填；the D．不填；a
2．The party last night was success．we sang and danced until it came to end at twelve．
A．a；the B．the；an C．a；an D．不填；an
3．While Jane was cooking fish on open fire outside，her hair caught． fire．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．an；a D．an；不填
4．Young as he is，David has gained rich experience in society．
A．不填；不填 B．the；the C．a；不填 D．不填；the
5．People regard the wheel as invention of the
first importance in human history．
A．an；the B．an；不填 C．the；the D．the；不填
6．Mr Stock，who is in Mexico on ，runs small business．
A．business；a B．business；不填 C．the business；a D．business；不填
7．Fortunately he will go on holiday in place of Brown．
A．不填；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．the；不填
8．Zhang Hua is a student at ．
A．the University of Beijing B．the Beijing University
C．Beijing University D．University of Beijing
9．Many people are still in habit of writing silly things in public places．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．不填；the
10．Wouldn’t it be wonderful world if all nations
lived in peace with one another?
A．a；不填 B．the；不填 C．a；the D．the；the
11．Your uncle must have X- ray examination．
A．a B．不填 C．the D．an
12．I remember he lives in south，so we shouldn’t be walking to west．
A．the；the B．不填；不填 C．不填；the D．the；不填
13．Where is ?
A．the manager office B．the office of the manager
C．the manager’s office D．the office of the manager’s
14．Five years ago her brother was university student of physics．
A．an；the B．a；不填 C．an；不填 D．a；the
15．—Do you know who invented telephone?
—No，but it is really most useful invention．
A．the；the B．a；a C．the；a D．a；the
16．Summers in south of France are for most part dry and sunny．
A．不填；a B．the；不填 C．不填；不填 D．the；the
17．The police have power to arrest bad people by 1aw．
A．the；the B．不填；the C．不填；不填 D．the；不填
18．—Do you like the novels?
—I don’t like either of them．Please show me third one．
A．a B．the C．不填 D．an
19．Keep away from the cage. lion is fierce animal．
A．The；the B．A；the C．A；不填 D．a；不填
20．Now the machine runs at double .
A．a speed B．speed C．the speed D．for speed
21．My mother is usually on duty in her office every few days．
A．the；a B．不填；不填 C．不填；a D．a；不填
22．My brother likes to play football while my sister prefers to play violin．
A．不填；a B．不填；不填 C．the；不填 D．the；the
23．I came by sea and I had a 1ovely journey on Queen Elizabeth II．
A．不填；the B．the；不填 C．不填：不填 D．the；the
24．Cleaning women in big cities usually get paid
A．by a hour B．by an hour C．by the hour D．by hours
25．—I’m afraid I dare not speak in public．
—Just have try．
A．a；不填 B．不填；a C．the；a D．the；the
26．—What’s your elder sister?
—She is teacher and writer．
A．the；the B．a；不填 C．a；a D．the；a
27．She plays violin fairly well and makes a living by teaching violin．
A．the；不填 B．不填；不填 C．a；不填 D．a；a
28．These two rooms are of size．But another two rooms are three times size of them．
A．the；the B．a；the C．a；a D．the；a
29．He served in the army in when he was in
A．1940’s；his twenties B．the 1940s；the twenties
C．1940s’；his twenties D．the 1940’s；his twenties
30．This computer centre is larger than that one in the area．
A．one sixth B．four ninths C．fifth four D．two third
31．Paper produced every year is the world’s production of vehicles．
A．the three times weight of B．three times the weight of
C．as three tirues heavy D．three times as heavier as
32．The hero of the story is an artist in his ．
A．thirtieth B．thirty C．thirty’s D．thirties
33．Mr Smith me to buy several eggs for the dinner．
A．asked；dozen B．suggested；dozens of
C．had；dozen D．persuaded；dozens
34．—Tell me where you live，please．
—I live ．
A．in 123，King Street B．at 123，King Street
C．in King Street，123 D．at King Street，123
35．30％ of the cattle thin，but the rest fat．
A．are；are B．is；is C．is；are D．are；is
冠词与数词
1-5 ACDAB 6-10 ABCCA 11-15 DDCBC 16-20 DDADC 21-25 BAACB 26-30 BABDA
31-35 BDABA
一、考点聚焦
1、介词的分类与语法功能
（1）介词是虚词，不能单独作句子成分，必须与名词、代词（或相当于名词的其他词类、短语或从句等）构成介词短语，在句中充当一个成分。介词分为：简单介词，如at、in、for等；合成介词，如within、inside、onto、througout等；短语介词，如according to、out of、because of、by means of、in spite of、instead of等。双重介词，如from behind / above / under、until after等。分词介词，如considering、including、judging(from / by) 等。
常见的介词宾语：名词、代词、动名词、从句、不定式等。如：
①It is going to rain this afternoon according to the weather
forecast.
②He quarrelled with her yesterday.
③He succeeded in passing the final exam.
④I’m still thinking of how I can fulfil the task ahead of time.
⑤The professor will give us a talk on how to study English well.
（2）介词短语在句中可作表语、定语、状语和宾补等。如：
①This machine is in good condition.(表语)
②Where is the key to my bike?(定语)
③Nothing in the world could live without air or water.(状语)
④She always thinks herself above others.（宾补）2、介词搭配
（1）“动词+介词”搭配：注意特定搭配与同一介词与多个动词搭配意义不同的情况。
①rob sb. of sth. / clear the road of snow(“夺去、除去”意
义的动词与of 连用)
②supply us with food / fill the glass with wine（“供给”意义的动词与with连用）
③make a desk of wood / make bread from flour / make the material into a coat（“制作、制造”意义与of、from、into连用）
④介词 + the + 部位与动词的关系（=动词 + sb.’s + 部位，可换用）
strike him on the head(“击，拍，碰，摸”意义与on连用)
catch him by the arm(“抓，拉，拿，扯”意义与by连用)
hit the boy in the face（“肚，胸，眼，脸”等人体前部与in连用）
⑤prevent(stop, keep)sb. from doing sth.(“阻止，禁止”意义与from连用)
⑥persuade(advise, warn)sb. into doing sth.（“说服，建议”意义与into连用）
⑦buy sb. for sth.(leave、get、win、gain、lose等“得失”意义与for连用)
⑧tell sth.to sb.(show、teach、sing、write、read等“告知”意义与to连用)
⑨give sth. to sb.（give、allow、promise、pass、hand等“授予”意义与to连用）
注意：⑦⑧⑨可换成buy sb.sth.双宾结构。
⑩say to sb.(suggest、explain、apologize、murmur、whisper与“对象”连用必须用to)不可说suggest sb.sth.。
同一动词与不同介词搭配意义不同。
for（寻找） to sth. of(听说) on(拜访)
look to (眺望) agree with sb. hear call for(需要)
at（看） on sth. from(收到信) in(请)
同一介词与不同动词搭配，意义各异。
reply to the letter回信，sing(dance)to the music和……唱（跳），amount to 达到，加起来有……，devote to把……贡献给，drink to为……干杯，object to反对，look forward to 渴望，come to苏醒，belong to属于，search for搜……，ask … for … 寻找，use … for用作，leave for前往，take … for误以为，call of倡导，wait for等待，care for喜欢，make up for弥补损失，turn to求助（救）于，help oneself to随意，agree to同意，compare … to把……比作，send for派人去请（拿）……，sail for驶向，航向，set out for动身去，go in for爱好……。
（2）常见“形容词 + 介词”搭配。
of担心…… about / at sth.
afraid angry
for 替……而担心 with sb.
for sth.渴望…… different from与……不同
amxious
about sth. / sb担心…… different to … 不关心…… of讨厌 with sb.
tired strict
from/ with因……疲倦 in sth.要求严格
at擅长 with sb.受……欢迎
good for对……有益 popular in some place流行在……
of sb. to do so友好 for … 因……而流行
with + 名词或what从句
pleased helpful to对……有帮助
at + 抽象名词（听 / 看到……而高兴）
to sb.为人所知
known for因……而出名 be familiar with熟悉
as作为……出名 be familiar to为……熟知（悉）
sorry for … 替……后悔 disappointed at sth.失望
from缺席
rich in富有…… absent
in离开此地去了……
worthy of值得的，glad about sth. for sb.为某人某事高兴，far from离……远，grateful for sth. to sb.为某事感激某人，free from没有……（免除……），proud of(take pride in)自豪，satisfied with (by)满意，sure of / about确信，fond of喜欢，fit for适合，busy with sth.(in doing sth.)忙着干某事，full of充满，ready for准备，similar to相似，wrong with不对；有毛病……
（3）“名词 + 介词”要注意习惯搭配和意义区分。
the absence of water缺水
the hope of success成功的希望
have a chance of (for) entering college上大学的机会
take pride in them为他们感到骄傲
the key to the question问题的答案
a medicine for cough治咳嗽的药
the ticket for tomorrow明天的票
in Beijing去了北京
his abesence
from Beijing不在北京
to study学习方法
the way
of studying maths学习教学的方法
3、核心介词用法归纳与辨析
（1）表示时间的介词in的用法如下。
表示在某一较长时间内，如世纪、年、月、季、周等一般用介词in，
如：in the 1990s, in the year, in January, in(the) winter / summer / fall / spring, in the first week of May。
还可以用时段名词组成固定短语或词组。如：in a while, in no time, in the daytime, in a short while, in time, in the morning (afternoon, evening)。但要注意：
①at night / at noon, in the day(在白天),in the night（大夜间）。
②in five days（weeks, months, years）中in意思是“在……以后”。
③in和during表一段时间内两词可互用。如：in the night, during the night, in the war, during the war。但略有区别：当接表示“活动”的抽象名词时多用during，接“活动”的动名词及短语时用in。如：
during the discussion in discussing the problem
during her stay in Hubei in playing basketball
during the course of in digging the tunnel
（2）在具体的某一天或某天上午、晚上、前夕，常用on。
on Sunday(s).on Tuesday morning
on Christmas Day(但at Chrismas),on Christmas Eve, on
Children’s Day
on March 8, on the morning (afternoon, evening)of Oct.1
early on the morning of Oct.1(区别：in the late / early morning of Oct.1)
on a rainy night, on warm winter days
(3)表示某一时刻或某一点时间用at,如小时、分钟等。
at breakfast(supper, lunch),at six
at noon (sunrise, sunset, midday, night, midnight, dawn)
at the age of 15, at the time of war,但in time of danger/ trouble。
注意：有些时间名词前不接介词。如：
next day、last Sunday、that morning、these years
one、each、any、every、some、all修饰时,一般不用介词,如some day
one day、yesterday / afternoon,the night before
（4）till、until、to的用法。
①till(until)与持续动词连用一般用于肯定句中，与短暂动词连用一般用在否定句中。如：
He waited for me till twelve o’clock.
He didn’t get up till(until) 10 a.m.(不可用to).
但注意：在句首出现或强调句型中一般不用till而用until。如： Not until 9 a.m.did Mr.Smith come back to school.
②to表“终结”时常用和from连用，但要注意不与from连用时的意
义。如：from July to September, from six to(till)eight（从……到……为止），但from morning till night（从早到晚），不能用to。from … to常构成习惯搭配，不可换用其他介词。（A）表持久连续、传递、转移的含义。from time to time(不时，有时)，from day to day (天天),from hand to hand(不断传下去)，from place to place（处处，到处），from side to side(左右摇摆)，from door to door（家家户户），from house to house（挨家挨户），from shop to shop（一个商店接一个商店）。(B)表起始终止的全过程或程度加深、状态变化。from beginning to end(从头到尾，自始至终)（from the beginning to the end of…）;from hand to mouth(仅能糊口)，from bad to worse(越来越糟)，from head to foot(从头到脚),
from top to bottom（整个地，彻底地），from top to toe(全身)，from start to finish（自始至终，从头到尾）。（C）from one + 名词 + to another表示“依次”。如from one car to another（顺着车厢依次地）。（D）名词 + by + 同一单数名词，表示“一个一个地”，要与from … to短语区别开：one by one 一个一个地；little by little(bit)一点一点地；step by step 一步一步地，逐渐地（但by and by 不久以后）；sentence by sentence逐句地；day by day一天一天地；side by side(with…)(和……)并肩，一起；shoulder to shoulder肩并肩地，齐心协力；hand in hand 手拉手，紧紧地;face to face面对面。
（5）in、after、later
①in + 一段时间：表示说话时为起点一段时间之后，与一般将来时连用；但表示“在……之内”时，用于各种时态。
②一段时间 + later(later是副词)：表示某一具体时间或某一方面具体时间算起的一段时间后。
③after + 一段时间表示：“在……之后”，用于一般过去时；但时间为点时间时，只能用after,即after + 点时间，用于各种时态。
The doctor will be with us in six minutes.
She graduated in 1981,and eight years later she became the manager of the factory.
He received her letter after four weeks.
另外，in + 一段时间 + ’s + time 与 within + 一段时间的用法如下：
in a week’s time = in a week
They will arrive in three days’ time.(与将来时连用)
My brother’s birthday is in two weeks’ time.（作表语）
I’ll finish the book within two weeks.(within = in less than…用于各种时态，不超出，在……之内)
（6）地点介词at、on、in、to、across、through、over、under、below。
①at 在较小的场所，in在较大的场所，on在……的平面上。如at the
door、at the airport、at the station、at 55 Park Street、in China、in the north、in Asia、on the desk、on the wall等。
②on、at、in还可以表示两地相对位置。若A地属于B地，用in;A地位于B地的外面且有边缘衔接用on；无边缘的衔接有to。如：
Japan lies to the east of China.(范围之外)
Taiwan lies in the southeast of China.（范围之外）
Hunan province lies on the west of Hubei province.(毗邻)
The island lies off the coast of China.(相隔一定距离)
③地点介词的引申、比喻意义：in the sun在阳光下，in the dark(ness)在黑暗中，in the dark不知道，in freezing weather在严寒天气中，in the mud在泥中，in the earth在地下,in the desert在沙漠中,in a heavy rain 在大雨中，in the snow / wind在雪/风中,in public 当众，in trouble 在困境中，get into trouble陷入困境，out of trouble摆脱困难，beyond hope绝望。
④across在物体表面“穿过”；through则表示在三维空间内部“穿过”。如：
They walked across the playground.
I walked through the forest.
⑤over / under / above / below。
over、above译作“在……之上”；under、below译作“在……的下面”，其区别在于over、under表示一种直接的、垂直的上下关系；而above、below则表示一般的“高于”或“低于”，不一定是垂直“在上”或“在下”。如：
A little boat is now under the bridge.
There is a bridge over the river.
The sun sinks below the horizon(地平线)
The window is well above the tree.
⑥表示地点介词的静态性和动态性
He walked to the station（静态，表示方向和目的地）
He walked towards the station.(动态，只表示方向)
He is kind to (towards)us.（两者通用）
He is at the station.(静态，表示地点)
They arrived at the station.(动态，表示地点)
He swam away from the ship.(动态“离开”)
He stood away from the shop.(静态“远离”)
He fell onto the floor.(动态“到地面”)
The city is on the Changjiang River.(静态“平面”)
Go off the road.偏离了道路（动态“离去”）
Come along the river.沿着河过来（线）
across the fields 跨过田野……，over the desert跨越沙漠
across the river横跨这条河……，over the hill翻过这座山
be in the house(静态，在这里……)stay out of the car(静态，在……外)
go into the house(动态，进入)fly out of the country(动态，离开)
（7）表示方式、手段、工具的介词
①by the year/hour/day按年/小时/天。如He rent a house by the year(day,hour).(按by+the+单位名称)但to the pound按磅算，to the ton按吨计。
②表泛指的方式、手段
by post/mail邮寄，by telephone(radio),但on the phone/on the radio/on TV(电讯器材)，by electricity用电，by machinery用电器，by hard work,learn sth.by heart,through the satellite,through practice,through his own efforts,through experience,through the telescop
③交通工具类
by bus/train/car/taxi(road)
by bike/bicycle,on horse back/on foot
by plane/jet/spaceship,by air
by ship/boat/lifeboat,by sea/by water
另外：by means of 用……方法，by way of 经由，取道于，用……方法，with the help (permission)of sb./with sb.’s help (permis-
sion)。
④表方式、手段的其他用法
He beat the dog with a whip.(with+工具机器)
One smells with his nose.(with+人体器官，但by hand“手工，用手”)
He stood up with pride.(with+情绪、情感、态度的名词)
注意：使用语言、材料、文字等用in。如in English(ink,pencil)。另外如：in high (good,low)spirits,in anger,in joy,in comfort,in sorrow,in safety,in danger,in need,in debt,in love,in fun,in pain,in tears,in surprise,in good(poor)health,in good order,in flower,in a way,in a low voice,in silence,in(with)satisfaction,in a hurry,in(with)words,live/feed on food,kneel on one’s knee,take(catch)sb.by surprise(出其不意)
（8）表示“除……之外”的几组常用介绍比较。
①besides 除……以外，（还有）。作副词时意思是“而且，更何况”。
Well all went to the cinema besides Shaw.除了肖外，我们都去了电影院。
It was too late to see a film, and besides, I was tired.
②except除去，除……之外（不再有）。
We all went except John.我们都去了，约翰没有。
在否定句中，两词可以换用，如：
He has no other hats except / besides this one.
③except for除了……（对句子主题进行细节校正或附加说明）后接名词、代词或what从句，此时与except that + 句子意思相同。
He was very clever except for carelessness.
④except that … 除了……一点以外。
He has not changed except that he is wearing dark glasses.
⑤but与except
but和except在表示“除了……以外”时可以通用，但应注意以下三点：
①前面有不定人词、疑问代词在意义上对称时，多用but。
All but one are here.
Nobody but I likes making model ships.
②后接不定式短语为排除对象时，多用but。
He has nothing to do but wait.（前有do,后省to）
③but与一些固定结构连用。
have no choice but to do sth.只得做某事，can not but do sth.不得不,can not help but do sth.不得不……，but for … 如不是……
（9）between与among.
between通常指两者之间。也可以用于三者以上的两者之间。如：
Ann is between Tom and Bill.
Switzer land lies between France, Germany, Australia and Italy.
They soon finished the work between themselves.(共同，合作)
She was busy between cooking, washing, sewing and looking after the baby.(表示接连不断地，一个接一个地忙这忙那)
A horse can be seen between trees now.
among表示三者以上之间。如：
The story is said to have happened in a village among the hills.
He was happy to be among friends again.
We must agree among ourselves.(一起，共同)我们必须达成共识。
London is among the largest cities.( = one of与最高级连用)
（10）表原因的介词for、because of、due to。
He didn’t come to the meeting because of his illness.
The reason for his coming late is that he was ill.
He was praised for his bravery and courage.
The accident is due to your careless driving.
(11)不定式复合结构中的for、of。
这里所说的不定式复合结构形式指的是for 或of加上人或事，作动词不定式逻辑主语的结构。
①It is clever of you to answer it like that.
②It is quite hard for me to explain why.
注意：两句中的of和for的使用，表语形容词能够说明不定式逻辑主语的性质、特征与面貌时用of,如果说明不定式行为本身的性质、状态等则用for。
（12）兼作连词和副词的介词。
①after、since、till / still、before这些词既是介词，又是连词。
The children went home at once after school.
They went to bed after they had finished the job.
②in、on、along、down、up、after、before、along、beyond等介词可兼作副词。
He ran down the hill.（介词）
Can you lift that box down from the shelf for me ?(副词)
③有的介词可以兼作连词和副词。
All the students got to school before me.(before为介词)
We do want to buy something now before prices go up.(连词)
Haven’t I seen you before?(before为副词)
（13）介词的省略。
①表示时间的介词on、at 、in的省略。在next、last、yesterday、tomorrow、each、one、any、every、all等词之前，可以省略，也可以不省略。如（at）last weekend、（on）that day等。
②介词for表示时间的省略要求。（A）以all开头的名词短语，for要省略。如：I stayed with her all he morning.（B）表示一段时间的短语之前，for可以省略，也可以不省略。如：I have been waiting hereI (for) more than three hours.（C）否定句中，表示时间的短语前的for不能省略。如：I haven’t seen you for thirty years.(D)时间状语在主句之前，for不能省略。如：For the whole morning,the old man kept reading.
③某些动词短语之后的介词可以省略。
Nothing can prevent me(from)doing the job.
She spent nearly two hours(in)translating it.
（14）某些名词与介词构成的固定搭配。
①要求接to的名词有：key、answer、visit、entrance、apology、introduction、road等。
②要求接in 的名词有：interest、satisfaction、expert等。
He is expert in teaching small children.
(15)几个常用的并列连词。
①both … and, either … or, neither … nor
both … and“双方都”，连接句子的两个主语时，其后谓语动词通常用使用复数形式。either … or与neither … nor注意采取“就近原则”。
②not only … but also, as well as
注意：两者强调对象不同，not only … but also强调的是but also之后部分，而as well as则强调其前面的部分。not only … but also采取“就近原则”，而as well as只是一个插入语，采取“就远原则”。如：
Mr.Smith, as well as his wife and children, has come to Nanjing for a visit.
not only … but also结构中的not only可用于句首，连接两个分句时，第一个从句主谓要倒装。
Not only is he clever ,but also he is hard working.
（16）几个常用的从属连词。
①when、while、as都表示“当……时候”，when引导的从句的动作与主句的动词可同时发生，也可先后发生；as、while引导的从句则强调主句和从句的动作同时发生。如：
When I go to the station, the train had already left.
He sang merrily as he was working.
②till、until均表示“到……时候止”，肯定句中的谓语必须是延续性动作。如：I worked till late at night.若主句谓语是终止性动词，则主句要用否定形式，意为动作“到……才……”开始发生。如：
She didn’t get up until her mother came in.
注意：till和until通常情况下可以互换，只是在句首时until比till更常用。
③though、although均引导让步状语从句，意为“虽然……”，although较正式，though最常用。如：
Thouth (Although)he was tired,he kept on working.
注意：though、although引导的从句不能与but、however连用，但可以与yet、still连用。though还可以与别的词结合使用，如even though、
as though,而although则不能这样搭配。
④no sooner … than、hardly … when、as soon as三者都表示“一……就”，“刚刚……就”的意思。（A）as soon as 置于主句前后都可以，而且有备各种时态。如：As soon as she gets here I’ll tell her about
it. Mary left as soon as the finished the work.(B)hardly … when、no sooner … than不能表示将来的事，其主句的谓语动词一般用过去完成时，从句用过去时。若将hardly或no sooner放在句首，句子要倒装。如：No sooner had he arrived than he went away again.
⑤某些表示时间的名词（词组）也可用作从属连词。它们是：the moment, the minute,the instant, the day, the time, the first(second, third …)time, the spring (summer, autumn,winter),every(each,next,
any) time(day),by the time,都可引导时间状语从句。如：
His mother died the spring he returned.
Call me up the minute he arrives.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The home improvements have taken what little there is _________my spare time.(NMET 2001)
A.from B.in C.of D.at
解析：答案为C。本题考查句子结构中介词of的有法。what引导的从句作谓语have taken的宾语，而从句中的基本句型为“there is little of …”,表示“……有很少”，what 修饰little提到了从句句首。注意正确把握句子结构和介词用法，要明白of my spare time和in my spare time的区别。
2. ____________ production up by 60%, the company has had another excellent year.(NMET 2000)
A.As B.For C.With D.Through
解析：答案为C。本题考查with的复合结构作状语的用法。“with + 名词 + 不定式/分词/名词/形容词/介词短语等”可在句中作伴随、时间、原因、条件等状语。本题中with的复合结构作伴随状语。
3. The changes in the city will cost quite a lot, ___________they will save us money in the long run.（2000春季高考题）
A.or B.since C.for D.but
解析：答案为D。本题考查并列连词or、for、but和从属连词的意义和用法。并列连词or通常表示选择关系；for表示因果关系；but表示转折关系；从属连词since表示原因。通过比较前后两个分句意思可知，它们是转折关系。
4. After she considered the problem, she got a tall box to stand ________.
A.on B.up C.above D.by
解析：答案为A。不定式“to stand + 介词”作定语修饰a tall box,其中被修饰词在逻辑意义上是不及物动词，只有加上吊尾介词，句子意思才完整。吊尾介词往往由于受到汉语的影响而缺少，吊尾介词使用的场合有：
（1）定语从句中，先行词被一个不及物动词所修饰，不及物动词后要接介词，先行词被“动词 + 介词”组成的短语动词所修饰，介词常在句尾。
He is the man I just spoke to.
(2)what、whose、who、whatever等引导的宾语从句，宾语从句出现吊尾介词。
I can’t imagine what it is like.
(3) 强调句型，特殊疑问句中由于被强调部分和疑问词位置变更，常出现吊尾介词。
It was the poor boy that we gave the books to.
What for? Where to? Who with?
(4)不及物动词的不定式修饰表“涉及对象、场合、工具、方式、材料”等意义的名词时常带吊尾介词。
a room to live in, a bench to sit on
There is nothing to worry about.
She is a good girl to work with.
(5)某些形容词后接不定式或“动词 + 介词”型短语，动词的不定式形式表“反射”，常用吊尾介词。
①fit、easy、hard、comfortable、difficult、heavy等形容词后。
②The river is good to swim in.
The box is too heavy to carry.
③be worth doing sth.,be worthy of being done / to be done, want/
require / need doing
介词与连词
1．We offered him our congratulations his passing the college entrance exams．
A．at B．0n C．for D．of
2．Let’s walk over——the sun．
A．in B．to C．under D．by
3．We’re all going to the games．Why don’t you come ?
A．up B．across C．along D．to
4．If you are worried about the problem，you should do something it．
A．about B．for C．against D．with
5．I wanted two seats Madame Curie for Friday night，so I rang the cinema to see if I could book two tickets．
A．of B．about C．to D．for
6．He thought the jar made of earth little value and 1et me have it only one dollar．
A．with；for B．of；for C．of；by D．with；by
7．We can’t feel that we are going forward as everythjng us is moving the same speed．
A．around；at B．around；with C．before；at D．with；in
8．The two rings are so alike that it is difficult to tell one the other．
A．very；to B．much；to C．much；from D．very；from
9．It’s so nice to go out for a walk a cool nice summer evening．
A．in B．on C．for D．a
10．He decided to the matter himself．
A．look through B.look into C．look after D．look up
11．I ran an old friend of mine yesterday，whom I hadn’t seen for ages．
A．across B．cross C．after D．for
12．The scientist is well known us his great achievement．
A．to；for B．by；for C．by；as D．to；in
13．This article is quite me．There are too many new words
A．above B．against C．upon D．beyond
14．Does John know any other foreign languages French？
A．except B．but C．besides D．beside
15．She thought I was talking about her daughter， ，in fact，I was talking about my daughter．
A．whom B．where C．which D．while
16．They were surprised that a child should work out the problem they themselves couldn’t．
A．once B．then C．while D．if
17．My name is Robert， most of my friends call me Bob for short．
A．then B．instead C．however D．but
18．—I don’t like reading watching TV．What about you?
—I don’t like reading all day， I 1ike watching TV plays．
A．and；but B．and；and C．or；and D．or；but
19．It was raining hard， ，the peasants went on with their work．
A．but B．and C．however D．although
20．—What do you want those old boxes?
—To put things in when I move to the new flat．
A．by B．for C．of D．with
介词与连词
1-5 BACAD 6-10 BACBB 11-15 AADCD 16-20 CDDCC
一、考点聚焦
1、形容词、副词的作用与位置
形容词是用来修饰名词的，常被放在名词前作定语，或放在系动词后面作表语。而副词则用来修饰形容词、动词，其他副词或者句子，一般位于形容词之前，动词之后或句子之首。以下属几种特殊情况，须牢记；
（1）形容词短语作定语，定语后置。
a language difficult to master, a leaning tower about 180 feet high
（2）表语形容词（afraid、alike、alone、asleep、awake、alive等）作定语，定语后置。如a man alive。有些表身体健康状况的形容词如well、faint、ill只作表语。sick既可作表语又可作定语，ill如作定语意为“bad”。
（3）用作定语，修饰由不定代词one、no、any、some和every构成的复合词如anything、something等时，通常后置。如：
I have something important to tell you.
（4）else常用作疑问代词和不定代词的后置定语。
（5）enough、nearby修饰名词前置或后置，程度副词一般位于形容词、副词前面，enough修饰形容词、副词时，必须后置。
（6）几个副词并列作状语时，其顺序较灵活，但一般是：方式→地点→时间。如：
We had a good time together outdoors last Sunday.
（7）频度副词如often、always、usually等在be动词后，行为动词前。（8）副词作定语，定语后置。如：
The person there is waiting for you.
（9）几个并列的形容词作定语，其语序通常为：限定语（The、A）+ 描绘性形容词 + size（大小）+ shape（形状）+ age（年龄、时间）+ color（颜色）+ origin（国籍、来源）+ material（材料）+ purpose（目的）+ 名词。如：
a heavy black Chinese steel umbrella,
the man’s first tow interesting little red French oil paitings
（10）以-ly结尾的词性辨析。
①下列单词以-ly结尾，但却是形容词而非副词：lively、lonely、lovely、deadly、friendly、ugly、silly、likely、brotherly、timely等。
②表愿意（无-ly）和引申意(有-ly)的副词：
deep深 wide宽广 high高 low位置低
deeply深入地 widely广泛地 highly高度地 lowly地位卑微
③有无-ly意义大不相同的副词：
dead完全，绝对be dead asleep
deadly非常be deadly tired
pretty相当be pretty certain that…
prettily漂亮地be prettily dressed
close近Don’t sit close.
closely密切地Watch closely!
late晚、迟arrive late, come late
lately最近I haven’t seen him lately(recently).
2、复合形容词的构成
（1）形容词 + 名词 + ed
kind-hearted好心的，white-haired白发的
(2)形容词 + 形容词
red-hot炽热的，dark-blue深蓝的
（3）形容词 + 现在分词
good-looking好看的，easy-going随和的
（4）副词 + 现在分词
hard-working勤劳的，fast-moving快速转动的
（5）副词 + 过去分词
hard-won得来不易的，newly-made新建的
（6）名词 + 形容词
life-long终生的，world-famous世界闻名的
（7）名词 + 现在分词
peace-loving爱好和平的，fun-loving爱开玩笑的
（8）名词 + 过去分词
snow-covered白雪覆盖的，hand-made手工的
（9）数词 + 名词 + ed
four-storeyed 4层楼的，three-legged 3条腿的
（10）数词 + 名词（名词用单数）
ten-year 10年的,two-man两人的
3、形容词和副词的比较等级
（1）原级的构成和用法。
构成：形容词、副词的原级即本身。
用法：表示双方在程度、性质、特征等某方面相等时，用“as + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构；表示双方不相等时，用“not so(as) + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构；表示一方是另一方的若干倍时，用“倍数 + as + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构。如： Xiao Wang is as tall as Xiao Yu.
This building looks not so (as)high as that one.
Miss Xu speaks English as fluently as you .
This room is three times as large as that one.
（2）比较级和最高级的构成。
掌握比较级和最高级的变化规则，熟记少数不符合规则的特殊形容词和副词。
（3）比较级的用法。
①对方比较，表示一方超过另一方时，用“比较级 + than”的结构表示。如：
This picture is more beautiful than that one.
②表示一方不及另一方时，用“less + 原级 + than”的结构表示。如：
This room is less beautiful than that one.
③表示一方超过另一方的程度或数量时，可在比较级前加表示程度的状语，如even、a lot、a bit、a little、still、much、far、yet、by fay等修饰。如：
He works even harder than before.
注意：英语的比较级前如无even、still或yet等时，译成汉语时可用“较”或“…一些”或不译出，一般不可有“更”。如：
She is better than she was yesterday
Please come earlier tomorrow.
另注意：by far通常用于强调最高级。用于比较级时，一般放在比较级的后面，如在前面，应在二者中间加“the”。如：
He is taller by far than his brother.
He is by far the taller of the two brothers.
④表示一方随另一方的程度而变化时，用“the + 比较级（主语 + 谓语），the + 比较级（主语 + 谓语）”的结构（意为“越……越……”）。如：
The harder he works, the happier he feels.
⑤不与其他事物相比，表示本身程度的改变时，用“比较级 + and + 比较级”的结构。如：
The weather is getting colder and colder.
The girl becomes more and more beautiful.
⑥某些以-ior结尾的形容词进行比较时，用to代替than。这些词有inferior（劣等的，次的）、superior（较好的，优于……）、junior（资历较浅的）、senior（资格较老的）、prior（在……之前）等。
He is superior to Mr.Zhang in chemistry.
⑦在比较从句中为了避免重复，我们通常用that(those)、one(ones)代替前面出现的名词。that指物,one既可指人又可指物。that可代替可数名词单数和不可数名词，而one只能代替可数名词。
The book on the table is more interesting than that(或the one)on the desk.
A box made of steel is stronger than one made of wood.
⑧倍数表达法。（A）A is three(four, etc.)times the size(height, length etc.)of B.这座新楼是那座旧楼的四倍大（高）。The new bui9lding is four times the size(the height)of the old one.这座新楼比那座旧楼大三倍（高三倍）。（B）A is three(four, etc.)times as big(high, long, etc.)as B. Asia is four times as large as Europe.亚洲比欧洲大三倍。（C）A is three (four, etc.)times bigger(higher, longer, etc.)than B. Your school is three times bigger than ours.你们的学校比我们的学校大三倍。用times 表倍数通常用于三倍以上，两倍可以用twice或double.
(4)最高级的用法。
①三者或三者以上相比，表示最高程度时，用“the + 最高级”的结构表示。这种句式一般常有表示比较范围的介词短语。如：
Zhang Hua is the tallest of the three.
He works(the)hardest in his class.
②最高级可被序数词以及much、by far、nearly、almost 、by no means、not quite、not really、nothing like等词语所修饰。如：
This hat is by far / much / nearly / almost / not nearly / by no means / not quite / nothing like the biggest.
How much did the secon most expensive hat cost?
③表示“最高程度”的形容词，如excellent、extreme、perfect等，没有最高级，也不能用比较级。
④形容词最高级修饰作表语或介词宾语的名词、代词时，被修饰的词往往省略。如：
He is the tallest(boy)in his class.
⑤作状语的副词最高级前可以不加定冠词。如：
Of all the boys he came(the)earliest.
(5)形容词和副词前面使用冠词的情况。
①形容词最高级前一般要加定冠词，副词最高级前可不加冠词。
②形容词最高级前有时加不定冠词，或不加冠词，不表比较，表示“非常”。如：
He is a most clever young policeman.(a most=very)
The film is most interesting.(most=very)③表示两者间“较……的一个”比较级前加the。如：
who is the older of the tow boys?
④在“the + 比较级…，the + 比较级…”结构中。
⑤在same前一般要加the。
⑥有些形容词前加the 成为名词。如the poor、the rich 等。
（6）由as / so组成的形容词或副词短语。
① as much as + 不可数名词数量。
Each stone weighs as much as fifteen tons.
She could earn as much as ten dollars a week.
②as many as + 可数名词数量 多达
I have as a many as sixteen referrence books.
③as early as早在
As early as the twelfth century the English began to invade the island.
④as far as远到；就……而知（论）
We might go as far as (走到)the church and back.
As far as I know（就我所知），he has been there before.
⑤may (might, could)as well不妨、不如
Then you might as well stay with us here.
⑥as … as can be到了最……的程度，极其
They are as unreliable as they can be.他们极其不可信。
⑦as … as one can
He began to run, as fast as he could.
⑧as … as possible
Just get them to finish up as quickly as possible.
(7)几组重要的词语辨析。
①very 和much的区别。（A）可分等级的形容词和副词前使用very不用much。(B)表示状态的过去分词前用very。a very frightened boy, a very tired child, a very complicated problem, 一般的情况下，以-ing、-ed结尾的分词多用much、very much / greatly等修饰。如：We were greatly shocked by the news about Tom. I was much amused by Jack’s attitude。(C)已转化为形容词的现在分词前用very。如：very interesting / worrying / exicting。（D）too前用much或far,不用very。You are much / far / a lot too nice.另外，在too many / much, too few / little前用far。 There’s far too little opportunity for adventue these days.We’ve got far too many eggs and far too few egg cups.（E）关于原级形容词要记住下列固定的修饰结构：（a）修饰绝对意义的形容词，一般不用very,而用quite completely、well、entirely。如：quite wrong(mistaken, sure)、completely dead、quite impossible、quite perfect等。（b）修饰以a-开头的形容词，多有特殊的修饰词：quite alone, very much alone, wide awake, fast asleep, very much afraid。(c)修饰一些特殊形容词的修饰语有：be well worth, much the same, freezing cold, quite different, terribly cold / frightening。
②so … that … 与such … that … 的区别。
so + 形容词 / 副词 + that …
so + 形容词 + a（n）+ 单数可数名词 + that …
so + many / much / little / few + 名词 + that …
such + a(n)+ 形容词+单数可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 复数名词 + that …
注意：下列结构中只能用so不可用such,当名词前有many、much、little、few等表示“多、少”的词修饰时，如 so much progress、so many people、so little food、so few apples等。但当little表示“小”时用such。如：These are such little boys that they can’t dress themselves.下列so的用法是错误的：so a diffcult problem,so difficult problems, so hot weather。
③其他几组词的辨析。（A）ago、before:ago表示以现在为起点的“以前”；before指以过去或将来的某时刻为起点的“以前”。泛指“以前”用before而不用ago。（B）already、yet、still:already表示某事已经发生；yet表示期待某事发生；still表示某事还在进行，主要用于肯定句。
(C)too、also、either:too和also用于肯定句，too多用于口语，also多用于书面语，either用于否定句。(D)good、well:与good不同的是，well作形容词，只能在系动词后作表语，表示“身体状况好”，也作副词修饰动词。(E)quick、fast:作形容词皆表“快”。fast多指运动的物体，含持续的意思。quick多指一次动作的敏捷、突然，而且持续的时间较短。(F)real、true:形容词表“真的”。real强调真实存在的而不是幻想的，在句中常作定语；true指与事实标准和实际情况相符合，在句中作表语或定语。(G)hard、difficult:均表“困难”，但hard通常指体力上困难；difficult则指智力或技能上的困难，困难程度大于hard。它们都可作定语和表语。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. It is generally believed that teaching is ___________it is a science.（NMET 2001）
A.an art much as B.much an art as
C.as an art much as D.as much an art as
解析：答案为D。本题可从考查形容词的同级比较点入手。在同级比较as…as句式中，如果as后面的形容词作定语且其所修饰的名词前有不定冠词时，该冠词须置于形容词之后，即形成“as + 形容词 + a / an + 单数可数名词 + as”结构。这道题在名词专题中也有解析，不同的是观察视角不同，应注意培养发散思维。
2. It is always difficult being in a foreign country, __________if you don’t speak the language.(NMET 2000)
A.extremely B.naturally C.basically D.especially
解析：答案为D。本题考查副词的词义辨析。注意掌握词语的准确含义，结合语境进行分析。A项意为“极端地”；B项意为“自然地”；C项“基本上”；D项“尤其，特别地”。根据句意“如果你不会讲（它的）语言，在国外你就总会困难重重”可知答案。
3. Professor White has written some short stories, but he is ______known for his plays.(NMET 1998)
A.the best B.more C.better D.the most
解析：答案为C。本题考查副词的比较级和最高级。要把握句式之间的联系，抓住句子的隐藏信息，结合语境进行分析。根据句意，句中but后应有一词组be well known for…。同时，应注意到前后两个分句把professor White的短篇小说和戏剧进行了对比，故应用well的比较级。
形容词与副词
1．If we had followed his plan，we could have done the
job better with money and people．
A．1ess；less B．fewer；fewer C．1ess；fewer D．fewer；less
2．It is impossible for so workers to do so work in a single day．
A．few；much B．few；many C．1ittle；much D．little；many
3．—If you don’t like the red coat，take the blue one．
—0K，but do you have size in blue?This one is a bit tight for me．
A．big B．a bigger C．the big D．the bigger
4．After the new technique was introduced，the factory produced tractors in 1988 as the year before．
A．as twice many B．as many twice C．twice as many D．twice many as
5．—How did you find your visit to the museum?
—I thoroughly enjoyed it．It was than I expected．
A．far more interesting B．even much interesting
C．so more interesting D．a lot much interesting
6．If there were no examinations，we should have at schoo1．
A．the happiest time B．a more happier time C．much happiest time D．a much happier time
7．On the river there is bridge．
A．an old fine stone B．a fine new wood
C．a stone fine old D．a new wood fine
8．If I had ，I’d visit Europe，stopping at all the small interesting places．
A．a long enough holiday B．an enough long holiday
C．a holiday enough long D．a long holiday enough
9．It Was raining heavily．Little Mary felt cold，so she stood to her mother．
A．close B．closely C．closed D．closing
10．The means of getting from place to place in
the city is the bus．
A．most commonly useful public B．most commonly public used
C．public used more commonly D．most commonly used public
11.Alice is going camping with girls．
A．1ittle two other B．two other little
C．two 1ittle other D．1ittle 0ther two
12.Where have you been days?
A．all last these few B．these all last few
C．1ast all few these D．all these last few
13.He has made progress that all of us want to learn from him．
A．such a good B．so good a
C．a so good D．such good
14.All the people at the party were his supporters.
A．present B．thankful C．interested D．important
15.This kind of apple tastes and sells
A．well；well B．good；good C．good；well D．well；good
16．The storm kept me all through the night．
A．awake B．awoke C．awaked D．awaken
17．My brother was still studying into the night while I was asleep．
A．1ate；sound B．1ately；wide C．deeply；far D．far；late
18．The temperature of a person is about 37℃．
A．formal B．normal C．common D．usual
19．I’m always very when I was asked to recite the text in class．
A．curious B．nervous C．mysterious D．sad
20．It Was impossible for her to get the 9 o’clock train，I know she got up at
9：15．
A．quite B．very C．too D．much
形容词与副词
1-5 CABCA 6-10 DBAAD 11-15 BDDAC 16-20 AABBA
替代词it, that, one, which, so的用法比较
英语的代替现象比汉语普遍，使用代词的场合比汉语多。大多数句子中均用代词代替上文谈到的人、事物或情况，避免了对较多名词、冠词的反复使用，这样大大简化了句子。最常用于表示替代关系的词语有it, that, which, one, so等，近几年高考试题中均对这些词的用法进行了考查，可见这几个替代词的用法非常重要。下面归纳它们表示替代时的不同用法。
一、it的用法
1、it指代上文所提事物的本身（it表时间、强调等的用法此处不阐明），如果所代替的事物为复数，则应该用they或them表示。
2、it也可以用来代替上文所提到的一件事。
1.The Parkers bought a new house but _____ will need a lot of work before they can move in. (NMET2001,25)
A.they B.it C.one D.which
2.I am looking for a house. I’d like ____ with a brook around_____.
A.one,it B.it,it C.one,one D.it,one
3.Mary’s mother always told her to work hard, but______didn’t help.
A.one B.he C.she D.it
4. —Do you like these photos? — Yes, ____are very beautiful and I like____ very much.
A.they,those B.they,them C.ones,ones D.the ones, the ones
5.—Are you still using your old car? --No, I sold___the other day.
A.it B.one C.that one D.the one
6.Yesterday I lost my pen, but now I have found_____.
A.it B.them C.ones D.those
7.—Where are my books? --_____ are on the TV set.
A.Ones B.Those C.The ones D.They
8.Where have you put my shoes? I can’t find_____anywhere.
A.them B.those C.ones D.the ones
9.Where did you buy the watch? Would you please get____ for me?
A.it B.one C.the one D.them
10.Don’t read in the sun. ____ is bad for your eyes.
A.One B.The one C.It D.This
二、that的用法
1、that用来指前文中确定的非同一事物，常用来替代与定冠词或形容词性物主代词连用的单数可数名词或不可数名词，相当于“the+名词”，其复数形式为those。
2、that表替代时为始终是特指（作指示代词和关系代词用时另论），可指上文谈到的人、物或情况（均为单数），可代替可数名词和不可数名词。
3、若that所代替的内容为前置用法，即要代替的内容将出现在下文中，一般用this,these或the following表示。
1.—He was nearly drowned once
—When was_______?(NMET2002 Beijing spring)
—_____was in 1998 when he was in middle school.
A.that,It B.this,This C.this,It D.that,This
2.Equipped with modern facilities, today’s libraries differ from______ (2003 Shanghai spring,26)
A.those of the past B.the past C.which of the past D.those past
3.Few pleasure can equal __of a cool drink on a hot day. (NMET99,17; NMET99 Guangdong,29)
A.some B,any C.that D.those
4.The population of Sichuan Province is larger than ____of any province in China.
A.one B.it C.that D.the one
5.What I want to suggest is_____: Everyone should have another try. We needn’t only wait for help.
A.that B.this C.it D.one
6.You see, the accident happened like_____: The red car hit the bus and made all the traffic stop.
A.that B.this C.it D.one
7.Listen! ________ is about the lessons we will have to finish today.
A.It B.The one C.The following D.One
8.The climate here is quite different from____ of Shengyang.
A.that B.it C.one D.the one9.The study of idioms is as important as____ of grammar.
A.one B.that B.it D.this
10.My seat is next to_____ of my teacher.
A.that B.it C.this D.one
三、which的用法
1、在后置的非限制性定语从句中代替上文出现的事物或情况（单数或复数）。
2、在问句中作为疑问代词，在名词从句中作为连接代词用，其含义为“哪个、哪些”。
3、如果非限制性定语从句的先行词不是指主句内容，而是指具体的人、时间、地点，则不用which。
4、如果非限制性定语从句前置，则用as。
1.Dorothy was always speaking highly of her role in the play, _____, of course, made the others unhappy. (NMET2000,17)
A.who B.which C.this D.what
2.The result of the experiment was very good, which we hadn’t expected. (NMET2000 Beijing spring,10)
A.when B.that C.which D.what
3.China has its own English language newspaper, China Daily,______is published in Beijing.
A.that B.it C.which D.one
4.China Daily has plenty of advertisements, _____ help to cut the costs of making the newspapers.
A.that B.it C.which D.they
5._____ would you like better, the blue one or the red one?
A.Which B.What C.That D.How
6.I don’t know in_____ direction the thief ran away.
A.whose B.what C.which D.where
7.The old scientist went to the U.S.A in 1921, _____ he spent his last years.
A.which B.when C.where D.that
8.____we all know, China is developing at a great speed to catch up with the western countries.
A.Which B.That C.It D.As
9.At last we came to an old castle, _____ roof was in a bad state.
A.which B.what C.whose D.that
10.The man was standing behind the window, _____ he could see what was happening outside the house.
A.from which B.from where C.where D.which
四、one 的用法
1、 常用来代替与上文所提到人或物相类似的不确定的另一人或物（泛指），且被替代者为可数名词单
数形式。
2、 若下文替代者表示非特指含义，则用a/an—adj—one形式表示；若下文替代者为另一特指含义，
则用the one或the—adj—one表示；若下文替代时为复数含义，则用the—adj—ones 或the ones表示。
3、 one作替代词用时，其前可加某些形容词或限定词，如the,this,that,which,each,every,any，但一般不
能直接在其前加物主代词。
4、one被后置定语修饰表示特指时，前面应加the；被形容词修饰表示泛指时，其前应加a/an；被形容词修饰表示特指时其前应加the。
5、one作主语时，其对应的物主代词用 one’s或 his，反身代词用 oneself或 himself，重复主语用 one 或he。
1.I hope there are enough glasses for each guest to have_______ . (NMET95,21)
A.it B.those C.them D.one
2.—Why don’t we take a little break? —Didn’t we just have________? (NMET2000,23)
A.it B.that C.one D.this
3.Meeting my uncle after all these years was an unforgettable moment, one I will always treasure. (NMET2002,35)
A.that B.one C.it D.what
4. —Did a letter come for me? —Yes, there was _______for you this morning.
A.one B.it C.the one D.that
5.He has a blue pen and two red ______.
A.one B.ones C.those D.the ones
6.I brought a necklace to you that day, but it was________.
A. a different one B.different one C.the different one D.different ones
7.I don’t like this blue cat, I’d like______.
A. the red one B.red one C.a red D.that red
8.I don’t like this expensive cake, _______ is OK.
A.cheap one B.that cheap C.a cheap one D.a cheap
9.____should love____country.
A.One,her B.She,her B.One,one’s D.One,ones
10.Such a drug will make_____ find it hard to go without it.
A.it B.that C.one D.ones
11.Yesterday I lost my pen, but I’ve bought______.
A.it B.that C.one D.the one
12.Young people like seeing the film, but old_____ don’t.
A.those B.ones C.one D.them
13.This book is_____that is needed by all of us.
A.it B.one C.that D.the one
14.He is_____who gave us the talk yesterday.
A.that B.one C.the one D.himself
15.Is this museum_____they paid a visit to yesterday?
A.that B.where C.the one D.which
16.Your old bike is_____, it’s much better than_____
A.a good one,my new one B.good one,my one
C.a good,my new one D.one good,new my one
17.This advice is different from_____.
A.that one B.that C.it D.the one
18.The books on the table are more than____ on the bookshelf.
A.they B.them C.those D.ones
19.A cake made of wheat costs less than____ made of rice.
A.one B.it C.those D.that
20.Do you like red ink or_____?
A.blue one B.blue C.the blue one D.red ink
21.The step you’ve taken is_____ of much risk.
A.one B.that C.it D.ones
22.I’m told you’ve got some foreign stamps. Will you please give me_____?
A.one B.it C.that D.the one
五、so的用法
1、so表示替代常用来代替上文中出现的内容，尤其是上文内容在下文中以宾语从句形式出现时。
2、如果在下文被代替者为否定含义的宾语从句，常用否定动词+so或直接用not代替。如：
1. —The boys are not doing a good job at all, are they?
—______.(NMET2003 Beijing spring,22)
A.I guess not so B.I don’t guess C.I don’t guess so D.I guess not
2. —Do you think it’s going to rain over the weekend?
—_____.(NMET94,13)
A.I don’t believe B.I don’t believe it C.I believe not so D.I believe not)
3. —Do you think it’s going to rain again? —I _____, but I _____.
A.think not,hope so B.not think,so hope C.don’t think so,don’t hope so D.think not,hope not
4.—Do you think it’s going to be fine ? --Yes, and I______.
A.expect that B.expect so C.expect it D.expect them
5.—Will they come back again? --No, I_____.
A.don’t believe B.not believe C.believe not D.don’t believe that
）动词时态和语态
一、考点聚焦1、动词时态考查要点简述
（1）一般现在时考点分析
①表示客观事实或普通真理（不受时态限制）
The geography teacher told us the earth moves around the sun.
Water boils at 100oC.
②表示现状、性质、状态时多用系动词或状态动词；表示经常或习惯性的动作，多用动作动词，且常与表频率的时间状语连用。
Ice feels cold.
We always care for each other and help each other.
③表示知觉、态度、感情、某种抽象的关系或概念的词常用一般现在时：see、hear、smell、taste、feel、notice、agree、believe、like、hate、want、think、belong seem等。如：
I know what you mean.
Smith owns a car and a house.
All the students here belong to No.1 Middle School.
④在时间、条件状语从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。但要注意由if 引导的条件状语从句中可以用shall或will表“意愿”，但不表示时态。
If you will accept my invitation and come to our party, my family will be pleased.如果你愿意接受并参加我们的舞会，我的家人会非常高兴。
⑤少数用于表示起止的动词如come、go、leave、arrive、fly、return、start、begin、pen、close、end、stop等常用一般现在时代替将来时，表示一个按规定、计划或安排要发生的动作。当be表示根据时间或事先安排，肯定会出现的状态，只用一般现在时。 The shop closes at 11:00 p.m. every day.
Tomorrow is Wednesday.
（2）一般过去时的考点分析（考核重点）。
①一般过去时的基本用法：表示过去的事情、动作或状态常与表示过去具体的时间状语连用（或有上下文语境暗示）；用于表达过去的习惯；表示说话人原来没有料到、想到或希望的事通常用过去式。如：
I met her in the street yesterday.
I once saw the famous star here.
They never drank wine.
I thought the film would be interesting,but it isn’t.
②如果从句中有一个过去的时间状语，尽管从句中的动作先于主句发生，但从句中的谓语动词连用过去式。如：
He told me he read an interesting novel last night.
③表示两个紧接着发生的动作，常由以下词语连接，用一般过去时。如：but, and, when, as soon as, immediately, the moment, the minute。
The moment she came in, she told me what had happened to her.
He bought a watch but lost it.
④常用一般过去时的句型：
Why didn’t you / I think of that?
I didn’t notice it.
I forgot to tell you I had been there with my brother before.
I didn’t recognize him.
（3）一般将来时考点分析。
①表示未来的动作或状态常用will / shall + 动词（常与表示将来的时间状语边用如tomorrow、next week等）。
②表示一种趋向或习惯动作。
We’ll die without air or water.
③表示趋向行为的动词如come、go、start、begin、leave等词常用进行时的形式表示将来时。
④be going to与will / shall, be to do, be about to do用法及区别：
be going to 表示现在打算在最近或将来要做某事，这种打算往往经过事先考虑，甚至已做了某种准备；shall / will do表示未事先考虑过，即说话时临时作出的决定。
be going to 表将来，不能用在条件状语从句的主句中；而will则能，表意愿。如：
If it is fine, we’ll go fishing.(正确)
If it is fine, we are going to go fishing.(错误)
be to do sth.表按计划、安排即将发生的动作，还可表示吩咐、命令、禁止，可能性等。
A meeting is to be held at 3:00 o’clock this afternoon.
be about to do sth.表示“即可，就要”，后面不能接时间状语或状语从句。
Autumn harvest is about to start.
（4）现在进行时考点分析。
①表示说话时正在发生着的一个动作；表示现阶段但不一定是发生在讲话时；表近期特定的安排或计划；go、come等起止动作可用进行时代替将来时。如： It is raining now.
He is teaching English and learning Chinese.
I am meeting Mr. Wang tonight.
We are leaving on Friday.
At six I am bathing the baby.(I start bathing the bady before six.)
The girl is always talking loud in public.(与always、often等频度副词连用，表经常反复的行动或某种感情色彩)
②下面四类动词不宜用现在进行时。（A）表示心理状态、情感的动作：like, love, hate, care, remember, believe, want, mind, wish, agree, mean, need。（B）表存在的状态的动词：appear, exist, lie, remain, seem belong to, depend on。（C）表示一时性动作的动词：allow, accept, permit, promise, admit, complete。（D）表示感官的动词：see, hear, notice, feel, smell, sound, taste, look。
（5）过去完成时考点分析（考核重点）。
①常用过去完成时的几种情况：（A）在by、by the end、by the time、until、before、since后接表示过去某一时间的短语或从句以前发生的动作。如：By the end of last year, we had produced 20,000 cars. The train had left before we reached the station. (B)表示曾实现的希望、打算、意图、诺言等。常用had hoped / planned / meant / intended/
though / wanted / expected等或用上述动词过去式接不定式完成式表示即：hoped / planned … + to have done。（C）“时间名词 + before”在句子中作状语，谓语动词用过去完成时；“时间名词 + ago”在句中作状语，谓语动词用一般过去式。如：He said his first teacher had died at least 10 years before. Xiao Hua left school 3 years ago.（D）表示“一……就”的几个句型：Hardly / No sooner / Scarcely had + 主语 + 过去分词 + when / than / before + 一般过去时。如：We had no sooner been seated than the bus started. = No sooner had we been seated than the bus started.
②在before或after引导的时间状语从句中用一般过去时态代替过去完成时。
After he (had)left the room, the boss came in.
We arrived home before it snowed.
（6）过去将来时考点分析。
参照一般将来时对比：用would do、was / were going to do sth.表过去将来；come、go、leave等过去进行时表过去将来时；was / were to do sth.和was / were about to do sth.表过去将来。
（7）过去进行时考点分析。
①过去某一时刻正在进行的动作或某一阶段内发生或频繁发生。
②某一动作发生时另一动作正在发生，其中一个在由when或while引导的时间状语从句中。
（8）现在完成时考点分析。
①现在完成时除可以和for、since引导的状语连用外，还可以和下面的介词短语连用：during / in /over the last(past)few years (months, weeks)、in recent years等。
②下列句型中常用现在完成时
It is (has been) + 一段时间 + since从句
This(That / It)is the first(second…)time that + 完成时
This(That / It)is the only … + that + 完成时
This(that / It)is the best / finest / most interesting … + that 从句 + 完成时
③在时间或条件状语从句中，现在完成时可以代替一般将来时。如：
I shall post the letter as soon as I have written it.
If you have done the experiment, you will realize the theory better.
Don’t get off the bus until it has stopped.
（9）注意几组时态的区别：
①一般过去时与现在完成时：时间上有差异：凡有过去时间的均用过去时态，不能用完成时态，如含有ago、last year、just now、the other day等。
结果上有差异：现在完成时强调的是对“现在”的影响和结果，动作到现在刚完成或还在继续；一般过去时强调的是动作发生在“过去”，和现在毫无关系。
②过去完成时与一般过去时：过去完成时强调的是“过去的过去”；如出现同一主语连续几个动作（“连谓”）形式则只用一般过去时即可。
2、被动语态考查要点简述
被动语态的构成方式：be + 过去分词，口语只也有用get / become + 过去分词表示。被动语态的基本用法：不知道或没必要提到动作的执行者是谁时用被动语态。强调或突出动作的承受者常用被动语态（by短语有时可以省略）。
（1）使用被动语态时应注意的几个问题。
①主动变化被动时双宾语的变化。看下列例句。
My friend gave me an interesting book on my birthday. An interesting book was given to me(by my friend)on my birthday.
I was given an interesting book (by my friend)on my birthday.
②主动变被动时，宾补成主补（位置不变）；（作补语的）不定式前需加to。
The boss made him work all day long.
He was made to work all day long(by the boss)
③短语动词变被动语态时，勿要掉“尾巴”。
The children were taken good care of (by her).
Your pronunciation and spelling should be paid attention to.
④情态动词和be going to、be to、be sure to、used to、have to、had better等结构变被动语态，只需将它们后面的动词原形变为be +过去分词。
⑤当句子的谓语为say、believe、expect、think、know、write、consider、report等时，被动语态有两种形式：（A）谓语动词用被动语态，动词不定式作主补。（B）用it作形式主语，真正的主语在后面用主语在后面用主语从句来表示。如：
People say he is a smart boy.
It is said that he is a smart boy.
He is said to be a smart boy.
People know paper was made in China first.
It is known that paper was made in China first.
Paper was known to be made in China first.
类似句型有：It is said / known / suggested / believed / hoped/ thought that …
（2）不能用被动语态的几种情况。
①所有的不及物动词或不及物动词词组不能用于被动语态之中。
②表示状态的谓语动词，如：last、hold、benefit、contain、equal、fit、join、mean、last、look like、consist to等。
③表示归属的动词，如have、own、belong to等。
④表示“希望、意图”的动词，如：wish、want、hope、like、love、hate等。
⑤宾语是反身代词或相互代词时谓语动词用主动语态，不能用被动语态。
⑥宾语是同源宾语，不定式、动名词等谓语动词不用被动语态。
⑦有些动词以其主动形式表示被动意义，特别是当主语是物时，常见的动词有sell、write、wash、open、lock等。
（3）主动形式表被动意义。
①当feel、look、smell、taste、sound等后面接形容词时；当cut、read、sell、wear、write等词带状语修饰语时；当动词表示“开始、结束、关、停、转、启动”等意义时。
This kind of cloth washes easily.这种布易洗。
These novels won’t sell well.这些小说不畅销。
My pen writes smoothly.我的钢笔写起来很流畅。
The door won’t lock.门锁不上。
The fish smells good.鱼闻起来香。
②当break out、take place、shut off、turn off、work out等动词表示“发生、关闭、制定”等意思时。
The plan worked out successfully.
The lamps on the wall turn off.
③want, require, need后面的动名词用主动表示被动含义。
④be worth doing用主动形式表示被动含义。
⑤在“be + 形容词 + to do”中，不定式的逻辑宾语是句子的主语，用主动代被动。
This kind of water isn’t fit to drink.
The girl isn’t easy to get along with.
另外：be to blame(受谴责)，be to rent（出租）也用主动形式表被动。
（4）被动形式表示主动意义的几种情况。
①be seated坐着
He is seated on a bench.（He seats himself on a bench.）坐在凳子上。
②be hidden躲藏
He was hidden behind the door.(He hid himself behind the door.)他藏在门后。
③be lost迷路
④be drunk喝醉
⑤be dressed穿着
The girl was dressed in a red short skirt.
（5）被动语态与系表结构的区别
被动语态强调动作；系表结构表主语的特点或状态。如：
The book was sold by a certain bookstore.(被动语态)
The book is well sold.(系表结构)
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. Visitors ________not to touch the exhibits.(NMET 2001)
A.will request B.are requested
C.are requesting D.request
解析：答案为B。此题的时态是不难判断的，因为说的是一条规定，所以用一般现在时，而visitor与request之间是动宾关系，即request visitors not to touch the exhibits,究竟是谁要求他们这样做呢？不清楚，也不必知道，因此需要用被动语态。分析visitors与request之间的关系是此题的解题关键。
2. Selecting a mobile phone for personal use is no easy task because technology __________ so rapidly.(NMET 2001)
A.is changing B.has changed
C.will have changed D.will change
解析：答案为A。此题考查现在进行时态的用法。句意为“选择一部移动电话不是一件容易的事，因为科技发展得十分迅速。”本句的主句一般现在时表达的是目前的情况，而“科技发展迅速”也是现阶段正存在的一种状态，不是在过去，也不是在将来，因此只能用现在进行时表达。
3. All the preparations for the task ___________, and we’re ready to start.（2000年春季高考）
A.completed B.complete
C.had been completed D.have been completed
解析：答案为D。现在完成时表示过去年做的事对现在的影响。从and we’re ready to start句意可知，一切准备工作已经就绪，可以开始工作了。complete是及物动词，与句子的主语是被动关系，所以需要用被动语态表达。注意①分清complete与主语之间的关系；②结合语境选择正确时态。
动词的时态与语态
1．—We could have walked to the station．It was so near．
—Yes．A taxi at all necessary．
A．wasn’t B．hadn’t been C．wouldn’t be D．won’t be
2．When I got to the cinema，the film for the minutes．
A．has begun B．had begun C．had been on D．was on
3．If city noises from increasing，people shout to be heard even at the dinner table．
A． are not kept；will have to B．are not kept；have to
C．do not keep；will have to D．do not keep；have to
4．In some parts of the world，tea with milk and sugar.
A．is serving B．is severed C．serves D．served
5．—Do you like the material?
—Yes，it vety soft．
A．is feeling B．felt C．feels D．is felt
6．I don’t really work here．I until the new secretary arrives．
A．just help out B．have just helped out C．am just helping out D．will just help out
7．—You haven’t been to Beijing，have you?
— ．How I wish to go there!
A．Yes．I have B．Yes，I haven’t C．No．I have D．No，I haven’t
8．It is reported that by the end of this year，another school will ．
A．be built B．have built C．have been built D．have be built
9．—Hey，look where you are going!
— ——0h，I’m terribly sorry． ．
A．I’m not noticing B．1 wasn’t noticing C．I haven’t noticed D．I don’t notice
10．—How are you today?
— ——Oh，I as ill as I do now for a long time．
A．didn’t feel B．wasn’t feeling C．don’t fee D．haven’t felt
l1．Old McDonald gave up smoking for a while，but soon to his old ways．
A．returned B．returns C．was returning D．had returned
12．All the preparations for the task ，and we’re ready to start．
A．completed B．complete C．had been completed D．have been completed
13．He to the lab than he set out to do the experiment．
A．has no sooner got B．was supposed to
C．will no sooner get D．have no sooner got
14．The train arrive at 11：30 but it was an hour late．
A．would suppose B．was supposed to C．is supposed to D．supposed to
15．He stepped into the office， down and began to fill in the forms．
A．sitting B．to sit C．sat D．having sat
16．The little girl her heart out because she her toy bear and believed she wasn’t ever going to find it．
A．had cried；1ost B．cried；had lose
C．has cried；has lost D．cries；has 1ost
17．Both my brothers work at the power station that at my home town．
A．has set up B．has been set up C．was set up D．is set up
18．Linda has 1ost her passport again．It’s the second time this ．
A．has happened B．has been happened C．happened D．happens
19．—Sorry，I forgot to post the letter for you.
—Never mind， it myself tonight．
A．I’m going to post B．I’d better to post
C．I’ll post D．I’d rather post
20．He his leg when he in a football match against another schoo1．
A．broke；played B．was breaking；was playing
C．broke；was playing D．was breaking；played
21．—Where the recorder? I Can’t see it anywhere．
—I it right here．But now it’s gone．
A．did you put；have put B．have you put put
C．had you put；was putting D．were you putting；have put
22．Hello! I you in London．How long have you been here?
A．don’t know；were B．hadn’t known；are
C．have known；are D．didn’t know；were
23．—Come on，Peter．I want to show you something．
—Oh，how nice of you! I you to bring me a gift.
A．never think；are going B．never thought；were going
C．didn’t think；were going D．hadn’t thought；were going
24．All the teachers in this schoo1 are ．
A．clean dressing B．cleanly dressing C．clean dressed D．cleanly dressed
25．When I was at college I three foreign languages，but I all except a few words of each．
A．spoke；had forgotten B．spoke；have forgotten
C．had spoken；had forgotten D．had spoken；have forgotten
26．—Have you moved into the new house?
—Not yet．The rooms ．
A．are being painted B．are painting C．are painted D．are being painting
27．—Excuse me，sir．Would you do me a favor? of course．What is it?
—I if you could tell me how to fill out this form．
A．had wondered B．was wondering C．would wonder D．did wonder
28．—We haven’t heard from Jane for a long time．
— What do you suppose to her?
A．was happening B．to happen C．has happened D．having happened
29．I wonder why Jenny us recently．We should have heard from her by now．
A．hasn’t written B．doesn’t write C．won’t write D．hadn’t written
30．Mary a dress when she cut her finger．
A．make B．is making C．was making D．makes
31．—Do you know our town at all?
—No，this is the first time I here．
A．was B．have been C．came D．am coming
32．The last time I Jane she cotton in the fields．
A．had seen；was picking B．saw；picked
C．had seen；picked D．saw；was picking
33．Tom into the house when no one ．
A．slipped；was looking B．had slipped；looked
C．slipped；had looked D．was slipped；looked
34．We were all surprised when he made it clear that he office soon．
A．1eaves B．would leave C．1eft D．had left
35 The pen I I is on my desk，right under my nose．
A．think；lost B．thought；had lost
C．think；had lost D．thought；have 1ost
36．—Can I join the club，Dad?
—You can when you a bit older．
A．get B．will get C．are getting D．will have got
37．—I’m sorry to keep you waiting．
—0h，not at a11．I here only a few minutes．
A．have been B．had been C．was D．will be
38．You don’t have to describe her I her several times．
A．had met B．have met C．met D．most
动词的时态与语态
1-5 ACABC 6-10 CDCBD 11-15 ADDBC 16-20 BBACC 21-25 BDBDB 26-30 ABCAC
31-35 BDABB 36-38 AAB
主谓一致和倒装
一、考点聚焦1、语法形式上的一致
主语为单数形式，谓语动词用单数形式；主语为复数形式，谓语动词也用复数形式。
The number of students in our school is 1,700.
Mary and Kelly look alike.
2、意义上一致
（1）主语形式虽为单数，但意义为复数，谓语动词用复数。
The crowd were runing for their lives.
单数形式代表复数内容的词有people、police、cattle等。
（2）主语形式为复数，而意义上却是单数，谓语动词用单数。The news is very exciting.
形复意单的单词有new、works（工厂）、means和以ics结尾的学科名称physics、poli-tics、economics等。
3、就近原则。即谓语动词的单复数形式取决于最靠近它的词语。如果连词or、either … or、neither … nor、not only … but also等连接的并列主语，如果一个是单数，一个是复数，谓语动词与靠近它的主语一致。
Either you or I am mad.
4、应注意的若干问题
（1）名词作主语。
①某些集体名词如family、team等作主语时，如果作为一个整体看待，谓语用单数，反之用复数。
My family is going out for a trip.
The whole family are watching TV.这类词常有audience、class club、committee、company、crew、crowd、enemy、government、group、party、public、team等。
Population和“a group(crowd)of + 复数名词”也适用于这种情况，强调整体用单数，强调各个部分用复数。
②某些集体名词如people、police、cattle、oxen只当复数看待，谓语动词必须用复数。
③单、复数同形的名词作主语时，谓语动词应根据意义决定单、复数。
A sheep is over there. Some sheep are over there.
④名词所有格之后的名词被省略，这种情况一般只指商店、工场、住宅等；作主语时，动词一般用单数。My uncle’s is not for from here.
常见的省略名词有the baker’s 、the barbar’s、the Zhang’s等。
表示店铺的名词一般作集体名词看待，但用作主语时，谓语动词往往用复数。如：
Richardson’s have a lot of old goods to sell.
⑤当名词词组中心词为表示度量、距离、金额、时间、书名等复数名词时，往往可以根据意义一致的原则，把这些复数名词看作一个整体，谓语用单数。
Thirty years has passed.
Five minutes is enough to finish the task.
⑥不定代词each、every、no所修饰的名词即使以and或逗号连接成多主语时，谓语动词仍用单数形式。如：
Each boy and each girl in my class has a dictionary.
⑦如果主语有more than one … 或many a … 构成，尽管从意义上
看是复数内容，但它的谓语动词用单数形式。
More than one student has seen the play.
Many a boy has bought that kind of toy.
但是，“more + 复数名词 + than one”结构之后，谓语用复数。
⑧一些由两个部分构成的名词表示衣物或工具作主语时，谓语通常用复数形式。如glasses、clothes、trousers、shoes、compasses、chopsticks、scissors等。
但如果主语用a kind of、a pair of、a series of等加名词构成时，谓语动词一般用单数形式。
A pair of shoes was on the desk.
⑨this kind of book = a book of this kind(这种书)，其谓语动词；短语this kind of men = men of this kind = these kind of
men(口语)（这一类人），但this kind of men的谓语用单数，men of this kind和these kind of men的谓语用复数，all kinds of后跟复数名词，谓语用复数形式。如：
This kind of men is dangerous.
Men of theis kind/sort are dangerous.
⑩复数形式的单、复数同形名词作主语时，按意义一致的原则，用作单数意义时，谓语用单数，反之，谓语用复数。这类名词有means、works、species(种类)、Chinese、Japanese等。当它们的前面有 a、such a、this、that修饰时，谓语用单数；有all、such、these、those修饰时，谓语用复数。
○11如果名词词组中心词是all、most、half、rest等词语，所指是复数意义，谓语动词用复数形式，反之用单数。 All of my students work hard.
All of the oil is gone.
○12在主谓倒装的句子中，谓语动词的数应与其后的主语一致。如：
Between the two windows hangs an oil painting.
（2）由连接词连接的名词作主语。
①用and或both … and 连接并列主语，谓语动词通常用复数形式。但如果并列主语指的是同一个人，同一事物或同一概念时，谓语动词用单数形式，这时and后面的名词没有冠词。
Truth and honesty is the best policy.
To love and to be loved is the great happiness.
Going to bed early and getting up early is a good habit.
A knife and fork is on the table.
②当主语后面跟有as well as、as much as、no less than、along with、with、like、rather than、together with、but、except、besides、including、in addition to等引导的词组时，采取“就远原则”。
③以or、either … or、neigher … nor、not only … but also等连接的词作主语时，采取“就近原则”。
（3）代词作主语。
①名词型物主代词连接的动词，既可以用单数，也可以用复数，这取决于它所代替的是单数还是复数。
Ours (Our Party) is a great Party.
Your shoes are white, mine (= my shoes) are black.
②such、the same起指示代词作用时，应根据其所指的内容来决定单、复数。
Such is our plan. Such are his last words.
③关系代词who、that、which等在定语从句中作主语时，其谓语动词的数应与句中先行词的数一致。
④疑问词who、what、which作主语时，谓语动词可根据说话人所要表达的意思决定单、复数。
Who lives next door? It is Xiao Liu.
Who lives next door? It is Wang and Li.
⑤不定代词any、either、neither、none、all、some、more等作主语时，要注意下列情况：
（A）单独作主语时，视其在文中的意义，动词可用单数或复数形式。Now all has been changed. All are present.（B）其后接of时，若of的宾语为不可数名词，动词用单数形式；若of的宾语为复数名词或代词时，动词可以是单数，也可以是复数；在正式文体中，单数形式的动词更常用。Do (es) any of you know about the accident? None of us has
(have) seen the film.
（4）分数、量词作主语。
①“分数或百分数 + 名词”构成的短语以及由“a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a large quantity of, a heap of, heaps of, half of + 名词”构成的短语作主语时，其谓语动词要与短语中of后面的名词的数保持一致，这是因为短语中后面的名词是中心词，而短语中前面的量词是修饰语。如：
Lots of damage was caused by flood.
A number of students have gone to the countryside.
A large quantity of people is needed here.
Quantities of food (nuts) were still on the table.
②a great deal of、a large amount of修饰不可数名词，其短语作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数；large amounts of修饰不可数名词，其短语作主语时，谓语动词通常用复数。
③表示数量的one and a half后，名词要用复数形式，但是其短语作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。
One and a half apples is left on the table.
④half of、(a)part of修饰可数名词单数及不可数名词时，谓语动词用单数，修饰可数名词复数时，谓语动词用复数。
(5)名词化的形容词作主语。
如果主语由“the + 形容词（或分词）”结构担任时，谓语通常用复数。这类词有the rich、the poor、the brave、the injured、the living、the wounded等。如表抽象的也可以用单数，如the unknown、the beautiful等。
（6）从句作主语。
①由what引导的主语从句，谓语动词通常用单数，但所指的具体内容是复数意义时，谓语动词一般用复数形式。
What we need is more money.
What we need are more people/teachers.
②在“one of + 复数名词 + who/that/which”引导的从句结构中，关系代词who/that/which的先行词是靠近它的复数名词而不是one，因此从句中的谓语动词也应该是复数形式。如one前有the only则用单数形式。
This is one of the most interesting stories that have been told by my father.
She was the only one of the girls who was late for class today.
（7）不定式、名动词（短语）作主语用单数形式；There be句型中be的单复数取决于be后的第一个词的数。There is a book, two pens on the desk.
There are two pens, a book on the desk.
5、倒装句的要点复习
（1）在以there、here、now、then、such引导的，引起人们注意的招呼句要倒装。
There goes the bell. Here comes the bus.
（2）表示动态的状语，置于句首时，句子要倒装。
Off went the horse. In came the boss.
From the speaker comes the doctor’s voice.
（3）表示地点的词语置于句首或强调地点概念时。
South of the town lie two steel factories.
Between the two buildings stands a tall tree.
注意：句子的主语为人称代词时，句子不倒装。
Here it is. Away they went.
（4）否定词never、seldom、hardly、scarcely、barely、rarely、little、not、nowhere、by no means、at no time、neither、nor等放在句首时，句子常倒装。如：
By no means shall we give up.
Never have I been to the USA.
Seldom does she get up late in the morning.
（5）在not only … but also … no sooner … than …、hardly … when …、scarcely … when …、not until …、so … that …、such … that …句型中，主句倒装，从句不倒装，但要注意：neither … nor … 连接的句子前后两个分句都要倒装。
Not only is she smart but also she is beautiful.
Such great progress did he make that he was praised.
So heavy is the box that I can’t carry it.
Neither has he a pencil, nor has he a pen.
（6）Only + 状语或状语从句 +其他（only在句首时要倒装）。
Only then did I realize the importance of learning English.
（7）so、neither、nor放在句首时，表示前面的情况也适用于另一个人或物时，用部分倒装。
（8）表语或状语或动词原形 + as/though + 主语 + 其他时，句子要倒装。（在让步状语从句中）
（9）虚拟语气中用倒装代替if。
Were I you, I would go there at once.
Had you come yesterday, you could have helped us.
（10）在一些表示祝愿的句子中。
Long live China!
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.—Each of the students, working hard at his or her lessons, _________to go to university.
—So do I .(上海 1998)
A.hope B.hopes C.hoping D.hoped
解析：答案为B。本题考查主谓一致中的意义一致原则，不定代词either、neither、each、one、the other、another以及所有的复合不定代词作主语时，谓语动词应根据意义一致的原则采用单数形式，排除A。选项C是非谓语动词的一种，不能单独作谓语，亦应排除。根据答语中的时态又可排除选项D。
2.The number of people invited _________ fifty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.（NMET 1996）
A.were; was B.was; was C.was; were D.were; were
解析：答案为C。本题考查the number of和a number of 的区别。“the number of + 复数名词/代词”结构中的中心词是number,“a number of + 复数名词/代词”结构中的中心词是of后的复数名词或代词，故谓语动词分别用单、复数。解题关键在于仔细区分哪个是真正的主语。
3.—David has made great progress recently.
—_______, and __________.(上海 1997)
A.So he has; so you have B.So he has; so have you
C.So has he; so have you D.So has he; so you have
解析：答案为B。 本题考查倒装知识。“So + 主语 + 助动词”表“确实如此”，“So + 助动词 + 主语”表“也一样。”
主谓一致
1．His Selected Poems first published in 1965．
A．were B．was C．has been D．have been
2．Twenty dollars enough for the coat．
A．is B．are C．has D．have
3．Learning about Travel News and Sports News in China Daily his great interest．
A．is B．are C．cause D．gives
4．His family very big and all of his family music．
A．are；1ove B．are；1oves C．is；have D．is；1oves
5．It Jack and Frank who been murdered．
A．are；have B．is；are C．is；have D．is；has
6．Writing stories and articles what I enjoy most．
A．is B．have been C．was D．were
7．The poor woman with her two children in a street corner．
A．was seen beg B．were seen beg
C．Was seen bagging D．were seen begging
8．—Is there anybody in the classroom?
—No,the teacher as well as the students to the playground．
A．go B．went C．has gone D．have gone
9．Three-fourhs of the land by forest and grass．
A．has covered B．has been covered
C．have been covered D，are to be covered
10．—Have you heard about the new school?
—No,when and where to build the new one
A．is not decided B．aren’t decided
C．has not decided D．haven’t been decided
11．E-mail，as well as telephones， an important part in daily communication．
A．is playing B．have played C．Was playing D．play
12．Not even one of the hundred students who took the test passed．
A．has B．have C．is D．are
13．The worker and poet to the party the other day．
A．is invited B．was invited C．had invited D．invited
14．There a driver and a number of broken wine bottles beside the high way when the police arrived．
A．were B．was C．had been D．would be
15．Books of this kind well．
A．sell B．sells C．are sold D．is sold
16．Three fifths of the cattle sold abroad in the city．
A．has B．has been C．have D．have been
17．Three-quarters of the land covered with
green grass whikthe rest——covered with pine trees．
A．is；is B．is；are C．are；is D．are；are
18．Three million tons of coal in this district every year.
A．is exploited B．are exploited C．has exploited D．have exploited
19．I，not you， in the wrong．Not I but he been invited．
A．were；have B．were；has C．was；has D．was；have
20．Every boy and every girl that each day and each hour brings duty．
A．know；their B．knows；their C．knows；its D．know；its
主谓一致
1-5 BACCC 6-10 ACCBA 11-15 AABBA 16-20 DAACC
省略与倒装
1．If Bob’s wife doesn’t agree to sign the papers， .
A．neither he will B．neither won’t be C．neither will be D．he Won’t neither
2．Hardly the people ran toward it．
A．had the plane landed when B．had the plane 1anded than
C．the plane had landed when D．the plane Was landing than
3．Not until Mr．Smith came to China what kind of country she is．
A．did he know B．he knew C．he did know D．didn’t he realize
4．0nly by practising a few hours every day be able to master the language．
A．you can B．can you C．you will D．will you
5．Jenny is a beautiful girl and she likes dancing very much， ．
A．so is Mary B．so does Mary C．so Mary does D．so it is with Mary
6．Never before our country as strong as it is today．
A．has；been B．不填；has been C．has been；不填 D．is；不填
7．0nly by taking a taxi on time．
A．you can arrive there B．arrive there you can
C．can you arrive there D．therer you can arrive
8．Not only polluted but crowded．
A．was the city；were the streets B．the city was；were the streets
C．was the city；the streets were D．the city was；the streets were
9． got into the room telephone rang．
A． He hardly had；than B．Hardly had he；when
C．He had not；than D．Not had he；when
10．Not until over back to his lab．
A．Was the war；the scientist went B．the war was； went the scientist
C．was the war；did the scientist go D．the war was；did the scientist go
11．—Listen，there ．
— Oh，yes．There ．
A．goes the bell；it goes B．goes the bell；goes it
C．the bell goes；it goes D．the bell goes；goes it
12． then he wouldn’t have made such a mistake．
A．If he followed your advice B．Were he to follow your advice
C．Had he followed your advice D．He had followed your advice
13．Only after set free able to go on with his research work．
A．he was；was he B．was he；was he C．was he；he was D．he was；he was
14． do we go for picnics．
A．Sometimes B．Certainly C．Seldom D．0nce
15．No sooner had she seen her father she ran to him．
A．than B．when C．as D．that
l6．Nowhere else in the World cheaper tailoring than in Hong Kong．
A．a tourist can find B．can a tourist find
C．a tourist will find D．a tourist has found
17． ，the football game has been decided not to be put off．
A．Heavily as did it rain B．As it rained heavily
C．Heavily as it rained D．As heavily as it could
18．Now here else in this city ．
A．can such cheap things be found B．Can find so cheap a thing
C．such cheap things can be found D．you can find sucn cheap things
19．Not the parents their daughter to marry a rich merchant．
A．and；want B．but；wants C．but；want D．yet；want
20．—Can you tell me where my uncle is?
—Yes，of course， ．
A．here your uncle comes B．here comes your uncle
C．comes your uncle here D．your uncle here comes
21．So 1oudly that even people in the street could hear him．
A．he spoke B．did he speak C．he did speak D．spoke he
22．The door burst open and ，shouting with anger.
A．in rushed the crowd B．rushed in the crowd
C．the crowd in rushed D．in the crowed rushed
23．On the top of the hill where the old man once lived．
A．a temple stands there B．a temple standing
C．does a temple stand D．stands a temple
24．The soil is a part of the earth， is the atmosphere．
A．that B．such C．so D．it
25．Not until I shouted at the top of my voice his head．
A．that he turned B．he had turned C．he didn’t turn D．did he turn
省略与倒装
l-5 CAABD 6-l0 ACCBD 11-15 ACACA 16-20 BCABB 21-25 BADCD
虚拟语气
一、考点聚焦1、虚拟语气用于条件状语从句中
（1）表示与现在事实相反的假设，条件状语从句中的谓语动词用“过去式（be动词的过去式用were）”，而主句中的谓语动词用“would / should/ could / might + 动词原形”。如：
If I were a boy, I would join the army.
If the had time, she should go with you.
（2）表示与过去的事实相反，条件状语从句中的谓语动词用过去完成时，主句中的谓语动词则用“would / should / might / could + have +过去分词”。如：
If he had taken my advice, he would have succeeded in the competition.
（3）表示与将来事实相反，条件状语从句中的谓语动词一般过去时或should(were to) + 动词原形，而主句中的谓语动词则用would / should/
could might + 动词原形。如；
If it were to rain tomorrow, the football match would be put off.
（4）当条件状语从句表示的行为和主句表示的行为所发生的时间不一致时，动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间作相应调整。如：
If they had worked hard, they would be very tired.(从句说的是过去，主句指的是现在)
以下表格是虚拟语气用于条件状语从句中时，主句和从句谓语动词的形式：
条件状语从句 主 句
与过去事实相反 had + 过去分词 should /would/could/might + have + 过去分词
与现在事实相反 一般过去时(be用were) would/should/could/might + 动词原形
与将来事实相反 一般过去时或should(were to) + 动词原形 Would/should/cold/might + 动词原形
有时侯在使用时可省略if,句子则可换成下列形式，即“were / had / should +主语”。如：
Were I a boy, I would join the army.
Had he taken my advice, he would have succeeded.
Were it not for the expense, I would go to Britain.
2、虚拟语气用于名词性从句
（1）虚拟语气在宾语从句中的运用。
①“wish + 宾语从句”表示不能实现的愿望，译为“要是……就好了”等。表示现在不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用一般过去时；表示将来不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“would/could + 动词原形”；表示过去不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“had + 过去分词”或“could(should) + have + 过去分词”。如：
I wish it were spring all the year round.
I wish I had known the answer.
I wish I could fly like a bird.
②在表示建议、要求、命令等的动词suggest、advise、propose、demand、require、insist request、command、order等后的宾语从句中，谓语动词用should + 动词原形或是动词原形。如：
She suggested we (should)leave here at once.
The doctor ordered she should be operated.
（2）虚拟语气在同位语从句和表语从句中的运用。
作表示建议、要求、命令等的名词advise、idea、order、demand、plan、proposal、suggestion、request等的表语从句和同位语从句，从句中的谓语动词用“（should） + 动词原形”。如：
His suggestion that we (should)go to Shanghai is wonderful.
My idea is that they (should)pay 100 dollars.
（3）虚拟语气在主语从句中的运用。
在主语从句中，谓语动词的虚拟语气用“should + 动词原形”的结构，表示惊奇、不相信、理应如此等。如：
It is necessary(important, natural, strange, etc.)that we should clean the room every day.
It was a pity (a shame, no wonder, etc.)that you should be so careless.
It will be desired(suggested, decided, ordered, requested, proposed, etc.)that she should finish her homework this afternoon.
注意：这种从句表示的是事实。如果说人对这种事实表现出惊奇的情感，就可用虚拟语气。反之，如果不表示惊奇等情感，that从句也可用陈述句语气。如：
It is pity that you can’t swim.
3、虚拟语气在其他场合的运用
（1）虚拟语气在as if/as though、even if/even though等引导的表语从句或状语从句中，如果从句表示的动作发生在过去，用过去完成时；指现在状况，则用一般过去时；指将来状况则用过去将来时。如：He did it as if he were an expert.
Even if she were here, she could not solve the problem.
（2）虚拟语气用于定语从句中。
这种从句常用于句型“It is (high)time (that) … ”中，定语从句的谓语动词用一般过去时(be用were)或should + 动词原形，意思是“(现在)该……”。如：
It’s time that I picked up my daughter.
It’s high time we were going.
（3）虚拟语气用在if only引导的感叹句中。如：
If only I were a bird.
If only I had taken his advice.
（4）虚拟语气在一些简单句中的运用。
①情态动词的过去式用于现在时态时，表示说话人谦虚、客气、有礼貌或语气委婉，常出现在日常会话中。如：
It would be better for you not to stay up too late.
Would you be kind enough to close the door?
②用于一些习惯表达法中。如：
Would you like a cup of tea?
I would rather not tell you.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it _______. (NMET 95)
A.breaks B.has broken C.were broken D.had been broken
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是as if 引导的让步状语从句中的语气问题，as if引导的状语从句如果与事实一致，不用虚拟语气，如果与事实相反，应用虚拟语气。题中“当铅笔的一部分浸在水中，铅笔看上去好像断了”。而实际上铅笔并未断，与事实相反，前半部分陈述是一般现在时，因而本句是对一般现在时的虚拟，用were broken。
2. I didn’t see your sister at the meeting. If she ___________, she would have met my brother.(NMET 94)
A.has come B.did come C.came D.had come
解析：答案为D。本题考查的是if条件句中的虚拟语气。题意是：我在会议上没看到你姐姐，故你姐姐没来。因此如果“她来了”与事实相反，前面一句交代了虚拟语气的时态是一般过去时的虚拟，所以if从句中用had+过去分词。
3. —If he ___________, he ________that food.
—Luckily he was sent to the hospital immediately.(NMET 93)
A.was warned; would not take
B.had been warned; would not have taken
C.would be warned; had not taken
D.would have been warned; had not taken
解析：答案为B。本题考查的是条件状语从句与主句表示与事实相反时虚拟语气的用法。根据下一句语境可知，他事先并没有得到警告，表示过去时间的虚拟语气，故选B。
虚拟语气
1．I enjoyed the movie very much．I wish I the book from which it was made．
A．have read B．had read C．should have read D．am reading
2．You are late．If you a few minutes earlier,you him．
A．came；Would meetB．had come；Would have met
C．come；Will meet D．had come；would meet
3．I can’t stand him．He always talks as though he everything?
A．knew B．knows C．has know D．had known
4．His doctor suggested that he short trip abroad．
A．will take B．would take C．take D．took
5．We might have failed if you us a helping hand．
A．have not given B．would not give C．had not given D．did not give
6．The law requires that everyrone his car checked at least once a month．
A．has B．have C．had D．will have
7．He was busy yesterday，otherwise he to the meeting．
A．would come B．would have been C．could have been D．would be
8．If there were no subjunctive mood，English much easier．
A．will be B．would have been C．could have been D．would be
9． the fog，we should have reached our schoo1．
A．Because of B．In spite of C．In case of D．But for
10．—What will you do during winter vacation?
—I don’t know，but it’s about time something?
A．I decided B．I’ll decide C．I’d decided D．I’m deciding
11．He was very busy yesterday，otherwise，he to your birthday party．
A．would come B．came C．would have come D．should come
12．The two strangers talked as if they friends for years．
A．should be B．had been C．have been D．were
13．Look! What you’ve done!You have been more careful．
A．should B．may C．ought D．would
14．Without electricity，what ?
A．will the world be like B．would the world be like
C．the world will be like D．the World Would be like
15．With your ability，you out the puzzle within a few minutes．
A． could have worked B．need have worked
B． C．ought have worked D．must have worked
16．My suggestion is that the sick boy to hospital as soon as possible．
A．is taken B．must be taken C．be taken D．has to be taken
17．If we had not missed the bus，we lunch at home now．
A．would have had B．would have C．must be having D．would be having
18． here yesterday，he would attend the lecture with us today．
A．Had he been B．If he were C．Were he D．Should be he
19．His tired face suggested that he really tired after the 1ong walk．
A．had been B．was C．be D．should be
20．Do you feel that I the problem in a different way the other day?
A．should come B．should have solved C．have solved D．solved
21．0ur chairman hasn’t come yet．If he on time，we would have to put off the meeting．
A．should come B．would come C．shouldn’t come D．doesn’t come
22．He insisted that he really very tried and that he to have a rest．
A．was；be allowed B．was；must be allowed
C．should be；must be allowed D．should be；be allowed
23．He did his best in everything； he would not have been what he was．
A．and B．but C．otherwise D．but that
24．I do I could give you a hand．
A．hope B．wish C．expect D．think
25．I Would rather she tomorrow than today．
A．come B．came C．should D．has come
26．The guard at the gate insisted that everybody the rules．
A．obeys B．obey C．will obey D．Would obey
27．I her if I thought she would understand．
A．would tell B．will tell C．Would have to1d D．told
28．The teacher requires Rose by heart 15 English words each day．
A．1earn B．to learn C．must learn D．1earning
29．—If he ，he that food．
—Luckily he was sent to the hospita1 immediate1y．
A．Was warmed；would not take B．had been warmed；wou1d not have taken
C．would be warmed；had not taken D．would have been warmed；had not taken
30．Without electricity human life quite different today．
A．is B．will be C．would have been D．Would be
虚拟语气
l-5 BBACC 6-10 BBDDA 11-15 CBABA 16-20 CDABBD 21-25 CACBB 26-30 BCBBD
名词性从句
一、考点聚焦1、名词性从句中连接词的运用
名词性从句中的连接词有连词that / whether / as if，连接代词what / who/ which / whose / whatever / whoever / whomever / whichever，连接副词where / when / why / how / wherever / whenever。
（1）that的用法。
①主语从句、表语从句、同位语从句中用that但不能省略。如：
That they are good at English is known to us all.
The problem is that we don’t have enough money.
She expressed the hope that they would come to China one day.
②宾语从句中的连接词that有时可省有时又不可省，在以下几种情况中that不能省略：（A）当that从句和主句谓语动词之间有插入词语或者从句主语之间有插入语时，that不可省略；（B）当that 从句与另一名词性从句并列作宾语时，that不能省；（C）当that作介词宾语时，that不可省掉。如：
He judged that,because he was a child, he did not understand
wine
Everyone knew what happened and that she was worried.
The reason lies in that she works harder than the others do.
③that从句作主语和宾语时，可以用it 来替换成以下几种结构表达。
(A)It is clear/certain/likely/true/surprising that… （B）It is a pity/shame/good idea/no wonder that ...（C）It is said/reported/ believed/known/thought/suggested that … （D）It seems/happens that。如：
It happened that I went out last night.
It is said that China will win in the World Cup.
④that和what的区别。
that 引导名词性从句时，在主从句中不以当任何句子成分，也没有任何含义；而what引导名词性从句时，在主从句中都要充当一定的句子成分，what可以分解成定语从句中的先行词 + 关系代词即常说的先行词 + that。如：
It’s shame that he has made such a mistake. Do what he says.
⑤同位语从句与定语从句中that的区别。
同位语从句中的连词that只起连接作用，在从句中不担当任何句子成分；而定语从句中的关系代词that在句中做宾语或主语，宾语与先行词有修饰关系。如果句子是同位语从句，就应用连词that而不能用which.同位语从句一般放在表具体含义的名词后解释名词的含义或内容，如以下名词：news、fact、suggestion、truth、plan、belief、doubt、possibility、idea等，而定语从句只是对先行词的限定和修饰。如：
They expressed the hope that they would come to visit China again.(同位语从句)
The hope she expressed is that they would come to visit China again.（定语从句）
（2）whether和if的用法。
①whether和if在宾语从句中可以互换，但是作介词宾语时连接词一般用whether。如：
It all depends on whether they will come back.
②后面直接跟or not 时用whether。如：
I didn’t know whether or not he had arrived in Wuhan.
③主语从句表语从句中只能用whether。如：
Whether the meeting will be put off has not been decided yet.
The question is whether they have so much money.
④whether可以引导同位语从句，用以说明前面的名词的内容，if不能。如：
We ought to discuss carefully the question whether we can do
it or not.
⑤whether常与or连用表示一种选择，if不能这样用；whether也可与动词不定式连用但if不能。如：
The question of whether they are male or female is not impor-
tant.
I have not decided whether to go or not.
⑥间接引语位于句首时或者是间接引语提前时用whether不用if。如：
Thank you, but whether I’ll be free I’m not sure at the moment.
⑦whether可引导一个让步状语从句表示“不管”、“无论”，而if不能。如：
Whether he comes or not, we will begin our party on time.
（3）疑问词 + ever和no matter + 疑问词的区别。 ①疑问词 + ever可引导名词性从句，在主从句中要充当一定的部分。如：
Whoever breaks the rule must be punished.
You can choose whatever you like in the shop.
②疑问词 + ever还可引导让步状语从句。如：
Whoever breaks the rule, he must be punished,
Whatever you do, you must do it well.
③no matter + 疑问词只能引导让步状语从句。如：
No matter what you do, you must do it well.
No matter who breaks the rule, he must be punished.
（4）when和where引导的同位语从句与定语从句的区别。
when 和where前面的名词若是表示时间、地点的名词，则when和where引导的是定语从句，否则则为同位语从句。如：
They put forward the question where they could get the money.
This is the place where the accident happened.
2、名词性从句中主句和从句的时态一致
（1）宾语从句中主句和从句的时态保持一致，但如果从句中表示提示的是客观现象，虽然主句是过去时态，从句仍用一般现在时。如：
Hello,I didn’t know you were in London. How long have you been here?
The teacher told us that light travels at a very high speed.
（2）主语从句作主语相当于单数第三人称作主语，谓语动词用单数，如果由and 连接两个或两个以上的主语从句作主语时，谓语动词用复数；由两个或多个连接词引导一个主语从句，谓语动词用单数。如：
When the meeting will begin has not been decided yet.
When they will start and where they go have not been decided yet.
When and where the meeting will begin has not been decided.
3、名词性从句的词序
名词性从句在句中要用陈述句语序。如：
He asked me what was the matter with me.
We’ve heard the news that we’ll move into the new house.
Whatever you say will interest us all.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. A computer can only do ________ you have instructed it to do.(NMET 2001)
A.how B.after C.what D.when
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是名词性从句作宾语的用法。此句的引导词既作连词又在宾语从句中充当一成分，故what最合适。
2. —I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week..
—Is that _________ you had a few days off ? (NMET 99)
A.why B.when C.what D.where
解析：答案为A。此题考查的是从句的用法。根据题意“我上周开车去珠海看航空展去了。”下面一句接着问：“那就是你为什么离开的原因吗？”故用why引导表语从句表示原因。
3. I hate __________ when peope talk with their mouths full.(NMET 98)
A.it B.that C.these D.them
解析：答案为A。本题考查的是形式宾语的用法。题意为“我讨厌人们谈话时嘴里塞满东西”。该空白处没有任何含义，而且已经用了when连接该宾语从句，所以此处只填一个形式宾语it。
名词性从句
l．_ the 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing makes the nation very excited．
A．Whenever B．If C．Whether D．That
2．The headmaster made a suggestion that the sports meet until next Sunday．
A．Will be put off B．will put off C．put off D．be put off
3． is a fact that English people and American people share a lot of customs．
A．There B．This C．That D．that
4．Dr Black comes from either 0xford of Cambridge,I can’t remember ．
A．where B．there C．which D．that
5． he said at the meeting astonished everybody present．
A．What B．That C．The fact D．The matter
6．I remember this used to be a quiet village．
A．when B．how C．where D．what
7．Can you tell me the railway station?
A．how I can get to B．how can I get to
C．where I can get to D．where can I get to
8．We all took for granted that he would agree with us．
A．it B．him C．that D．what
9．It worried her a bit her hair was turning grey．
A．while B．that C．if D．for
10． leaves the room last ought to turn off the 1ights．
A．Anyone B．The person C．Whoever D．Who
11． they are most interested in is they can produce more and better cars．
A．That；how B．What；how C．What；that D．That；that
12．The reason she gave for not being present was the heavy snow prevented her coming．
A．why；because B．why；whether C．that；that D．how；that
l3． I have will be yours sooner or later．
A．No matter what B．No matter how C．Whatever D．However
14．Word came I was wanted at the office．
A．which B．why C．that D．whether
15．The town is no longer it was ten years ago．
A．which B．that C．what D．when
16．It is generally considered unwise to give a child be or she wants．
A．however B．whatever C．whichever D．whenever
17．Please tell me you would like to have your coffee—black or white?
A．what B．where C．when D．how
18．—Do you remember be came?
—Yes，I do．He came by car．
A．how B．when C．that D．if
l9． we can’t get seems better that we have．
A．What；what B．What：that C．That；that D．That：what
20．—I drove to Zhuhai for the Air Show last week．
—Is that you had a few days off?
A．why B．when C．what D．where
21．You can take measures you think good to deal with the problems．
A．whatever B．however C．whichever D．those
22．— has made our city Dalian she is taday?
—It is the Party’s policy that has made it take on a new look．
A．What；that B．That；what C．there；so D．That；that
23．It was at the very beginning Mr White made
the decision we should send more firefighters there．
A．that：that B．when；which C．there；what D．where；what
24．It was he worked out the maths problem that we wanted to know．
A．what B．how C．that D．which
25．There will be a special price for buys things in large numbers here．
A．who B．whom C．whoever D．whomever
26．—I rang you about ten，but there was no reply．
—0h，that was probably I was seeing the doctor．
A．when B．why C．what D．that
27．Maria has to baby-sit．That’s she can’t come out with us．
A．how B．why C ．when D．what
28． surprised me most was they had finished the work so quickly．
A．What：what B．That；that C．What：that D．That；what
29．You can’t imagine when they received these nice Christmas presents．
A．how they were excited B．how excited they were
C．how excited were they D．they were how excited
名词性从句
1-5 DDDCA 6-10 CAABC 11-15 BCCCC 16-20 BDAAA 21-25 ACABC 26-29 ABCB
状语从句
一、考点聚焦1、时间状语从句
（1）as、when、while用法一览表。
类别 作 用 例 句
as as表示“当……的时候”，往往和when/ while通用，但它着重强调主句与从句的动作或事情同时或几乎同时发生。 She came up as I was cooking.(同时)
The runners started as the gun went off.(几乎同时)
when (at or during the time that )既可以表示在某一点的时候，又可表示在某一段时间内，主句与从句的动作或事情可以同时发生也可以先后发生。 It was raining when we arrived.(指时间点)
When we were at school, we went to the library every day.(在一段时间内)
while while意思是“当……的时候”或“在某一段时间里”。主句中的动作或事情在从句中的动作或事情的进展过程中发生，从句中的动词一般要用延续性动词。在when表示a period of time时，两者可以互换。 Please don’t talk so loud while others are working.
He fell asleep while/when reading. Strike while the iron is hot.(用as或when不可，这里的while意思是“趁……”)
（2）引导时间状语从句的连接词除上述外还有：
①till, not … until …, until, before, since
Don’t get off the bus until it has stopped.
He waited for his father until(till)it was twelve o’clock.
It will be five years before he returns from England.
②hardly / scarcely … when, no sooner … than, as soon as once
表示“一……就”
As soon as I have finished it , I’ll give yu a call.
Once you show any fear, he will attack you.
We had hardly got / Hardly had we got into the country when it
began to rain.
No sooner had he arrived / He had no sooner arrived than she started complaining.
③directly, immediately, the moment, the minute that… 一……就
He made for the door directly he heard the knock.
④each time, every time, by the time
Each time he came to my city, he would call on me.
注意：表示未来情况，主句用将来时，从句用现在时。
2、让步状语从句
（1）although与though可以引导让步状语从句，不能与but连用，但可以与yet连用。
Although they are poor,(yet)they are warm-hearted.
（2）even if或even though引导让步状语从句，表示“即使”，“纵然”，用来使人注意下文所强调内容的性质。
I’ll get there even if(though)I have to sell my house to get enough money to go by air.
（3）no matter后接上who、what、where、how等疑问词，也可以在这类疑问词后面加上ever构成whoever、whatever、wherever、however等。
Don’t trust him, no matter what / whatever he says.
Whoever breaks the law will be published.
No matter how hard the work is, you’d better try to do it well.
（4）as也可以引导让步状语从句。要用倒装。
Child as(though)he is, he knows a lot.
Much as I like it, I won’t buy.
Try as he would, he couldn’t lift the heavy box.
3、原因状语从句：because, for, as, since, now that
（1）表示不知道的原因时用because,即说话人认为听话人不知道，因此because从句是全句最重要的部分，通常它被置于主句之后。
You want to know why I’m leaving? I’m leaving because I’m full.
for虽然表示不知道的原因，但其语气较because要弱得多，是可说可不说的话，它只能置于主句之后，这时，for是并列连词。如果不是因果关系，而是对前面主句的内容加以解释或推断时，只能用for。如：It’s morning now, for the birds are singing.（很显然，鸟叫不可能是“现在已是早上”的原因。）
（2）表示已经知道的原因时用as或since,即某种原因在说话人看来已经很明显，或已为听话人所熟悉，因此它是句中不很重要的部分。since要比as正式一些，它们通常被置于语句之前，但有时却相反。 Seeing all of the children already seated, he said,“Since everyone is here, let’s start.”
(3)下列情况下只能使用because:
①在回答why的问句时；
②在用于强调句型时；
③被not所否定时。
4、地点状语从句：where, wherever
Make a mark wherever you have any questions.
We will go where the Party directs us.
5、目的状语从句：that, so that, in order that
注意：目的状语从句的谓语动词常与情态动词连用，否则可能是结果状语从句。不可置于句首。
6、结果状语从句：that, so that, so … that, such … that …
注意：so + 形容词/副词 + that从句；such + 名词 + that从句。
7、方式状语从句：as, as if(though)
I’ll do as I am told to.
It looks as if it is going to rain.
8、比较状语从句：than, as
9、条件状语从句：if, unless, so (as) long as, in case, once, a far as, on condition that.
注意if与unless的区别：不能用and连接两个unless从句，即不能有… unless …,and unless … 。但if … not and if … not却不受此限。
You won’t lose your weight unless you eat less and unless you exercise more.(×)
但可以说 … unless you eat less and exercise more.
10、注意状语从句中从句的省略现象
（1）连接词 + 过去分词
Don’t speak until spoken to.
Pressure can be incrased when needed.
Unless repaired, the washing machine is no use.
（2）连词 + 现在分词
Look out while crossing the street.
（3）连词 + 形容词/其他
常见的有it necessary、if possible、when necessary、if any等。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ____________.
(NMET 2000)
A.as last B.in case C.once again D.in time
解析：答案为B。句意为“带些钱以防万一”，只能选择in case。引导的条件状语从句，后面省略了I should need it。
2. The WTO can’t live up to its name _________ it doesn’t include a country that is home to one fifth of mankind.（NMET 2000）
A.as long as B.while C.if D.even though
解析：答案为C。本题考查状语从句的用法。句意为“假如世贸组织不包括占世界人口五分之一的中国的话，那它就名不副实”。as long as语气过于强烈，while和even though不符合句意。
3、Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but they hung up_________I could answer the phone.(NMET 2000)
A.as B.since C.before D.until
解析：答案为C。题意为：半夜里有人打来电话，我没来得及就挂了。but暗示在接话前就挂了。
状语从句
1． ，Mother will wait for him to have dinner together．
A．However 1ate is he B．However he is late
C．However is he late D．However late he is
2．Go and get your coat．It is you left it．
A．there B．where C．there where D．where there
3．I won’t forgive her unless she ．
A．Will apologize B．apologized C．would apologize D．apologizes
4．Why do you want a new job you’ve got such a good one already?
A．that B．where C．which D．when
5．If you go to Xi’an，you’1l find the palaces there more magnificent than commonly ．
A．supposing B．supposed C．to suppose D．suppose
6．Although he is considered a great writer， ．
A．his works are not widely read
B．but his works are not widely read
C．however his works are not widely read
D．still his works are not widely read
7．When you read the book，you’d better make a mark you have any questions.
A．at which B．at where C．the place where D．where
8． the days went on，the weather got worse．
A．With B．Since C．While D．As
9． you go， be honest and modest．
A．Wherever；do B．Wherever；must C．Where；do D．Where；should
10． ，it was finished on time．
A．As was the work difficult B．Difficult as was the work
C．Difficult as the work was D．As the work was difficult
11． everybody is here，let’s begin our meeting．
A．When B．For C．Because D．Since
12．It was he was ill that he was absent yesterday．
A．now that B．since C．as D．because
13．Put the medicine you can easily get it．
A．so that B．where C．which D．there
14．The earth goes around the sun the moon goes around earth．
A．so that B．just like C．as how D．just as
15．No sooner finished my work the boss come
A．had I；when B．I had；when C．had I；than D．I had；when
16． rich one may be，there is always something one wants．
A．Whatever B．Whenever C．However D．Wherever
17．—What was the party like?
— Wonderful．It’years I enjoyed myself so much．
A．after B．before C．when D．since
18．Mother was worried because little Alice was ill．Especially father was away in France．
A．as B．that C．during D．if
19．We won’t give up we should fail 10 times．
A．even if B．since C．whether D．unti1
20．Please let me know you have any more information．
A．the moment B．unless C．as far as D．until
21．Jack and Jim had to wait two more weeks the manager came back．
A．before B．until C．unless D．when
22．Please put back the books you took them．
A．where B．in which C．which D．there
23． you have mentioned it，I’ll remember to look after your dog when you go traveling．
A．Before B．If C．Now that D．Until
24．—What are you going to do this afternoon?
—I’ll probably go for a walk later on it stays fine．
A．as far as B．so long as C．even if D．as if
25．I was about to go to bed there was a knock at the door．
A．whlie B．when C．as D．suddenly
26．He asked me so many questions at a time I didn’t know how to answer．
A．when B．that C．as D．as if
27． again and again，but he didn’t tell me the truth．
A．Having been asked B．Being asked
C．He had been asked D．Though he was asked
28．—Would you like to come to the dinner party here on Saturday?
——Thank you．I’d love to， I’ll be out of town at the weekend．
A．because B．and C．so D．but
29． you want me to fire you，I suggest you stop wearing sports clothes at office．
A．If B．Since C．Unless D．Until
状语从句
1-5 DBDDB 6-10 ADDAC 11-15 DDBDC 16-20 CDAAA 21-25 AACBB
定语从句
一、考点聚焦1、功能：相当于形容词，修饰名词或代词，在句中作定语
2、位置：定语从句置于被修饰词之后
Those who are willing to attend the party, sign here please.
3、先行词：被定语从句修饰的词称为先行词
（1）先行词一般是名词和不定代词，如:some-, any-, every-和no与-boy, -thing的合成词；或all、none、any、some、that、those等代词。数词也可以作先行词，人称代词也同样可作先行词。
（2）先行词与关系词是等量关系。必须注意两点：
①先行词在从句中作主语时，从句谓语动词的数由先行词而定。
This is the place which is worth visiting.
②关系词在从句句子中充当了成分，其意思就是先行词的意义，所以在从句中不能重复其意。
There are many places we can visit（them）in China.
4、关系词：引导定语从句的都称关系词
关系代词：who, whom, which, that, whose, as。
关系副词：when, where, why。that偶尔也作关系副词。
5、确定关系词的步骤
（1）先找关系词，看先行词指的是什么。
（2）看关系词在从句中所充当的成分。
6、在定语从句中，当先行词指物时，下列情况的关系词宜用that而不用which
（1）先行词被①形容词最高级 ②序数词 ③数词几种词修饰或被 ④only、any、few、little、no、all、one of等修饰时。
（2）先行词为all、much、little、none、few、one、something、anything等不定代词时。
（3）先行词中既有人又有物时。
He was looking pleasantly at te children and parcels that filled his bus.
（4）先行词在主句中作表语关系词在从句中作表语时。
The village is no longer the one that was 5 years ago.
（5）当主句中含有疑问词which时。
Which are the books that you bought for me ?
7、宜用which而不用that的情况
（1）在非限制性定语从句中
（2）在关系词前有介词时
（3）当先行词本身是that时
（4）当关系词离先行词较远时
8、关系词who与that指人时，也有不同情况分别用不同的关系词
（1）当主句是there be句型时，关系词用who。
（2）先行词是为anyone、those、someone、everyone、one等词时，关系词用who。
（3）当主句是who作疑问词时，关系词用that。
Who is that girl that is standing by the window?
（4）whom在从句中只作宾语，可被who取代。
9、whose作关系词既指人又指物，在从句中作定语。如：
Do you know Mr.Smith whose story is very moving ?
There is a room, whose window faces the river.
There is a room, the window of which faces the river.
10、关系代词as,在从句中作主语、宾语和表语。
（1）先行词被such和the same修饰，或句型as many（much）中，从句都用as 引导。
Such books as you bought are useful.
The school is just the same as it was 10 years age.
注意：区别①such … that … 引导的结果状语从句。They are such
lovely children that we love them much.②the same … that … 引导定语从句。I want to use the same tool that you used just now.
（2）无先行词的定语从句用as和which引导。
区别：①意义上：as 含有“这点正如……一样”。②位置上：as 从句可置句首，也可在另处。
He didn’t pass the exam, as we had expected.
There is lots of air in loose snow, which can keep the cold out.
As is known, the earth is round, not flat.
11、关系副词when与where、why、that
when 指时间 = in / at / on / during which
where指地点 = in / at / from / which
why指原因 = for which
当先行词为way、day、reason、time时，可用that作关系副词。（非正式场合） I don’t like the way that / in which / he talks.
当time作先行词时，关系词可以省掉。
This is the first time I have given you a lesson in French.
12、必须注意的问题
（1）关系词作主语时，从句中谓语的数。
（2）注意区别定语从句与强调句。
①定语从句中关系词作从句成分，复合句。
②强调it无意义，that / who不是引导词。
③强调it is / was和that / who后如果句子意思讲得通则是强调句，讲不通则不是。
It is the museum that / which we visited last year.(定语从句)
It was in the hotel that we stayed last night.（强调句）
（3）定语从句与同位语从句的区别。
①定语从句引导词被称为关系词，that充当主语、宾语、表语。有时可省略。
②同位语从句引导词被叫做连词，that不能充当任何成分，不可省。
Word came that their army was defeated.(同位语)
We expressed to them our wish that was the same as their.(定语)
（4）关系词在从句中省略的情况。
①关系词作宾语，前无介词时。
②关系词作表语。
（5）限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句的翻译。
（6）关系词前有介词或复杂介词，关系词只能是which和whom。
（7）几个特殊的定语从句句型：
①He is the only one of the students who has got very good marks
in the match.（句中one为先行词）
He is one of the students who have got good marks in the match.（句中students为先行词）
②Is this place the one (that) we visited yesterday?
Is this the place(that / which)we visited yesterday ?
③He stood at the window, from where he could see what was happening.
④It may rain, in which case the match will be put off.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The film brought the hours back to me _________ I was taken good care of in that faraway village.（NMET 2001）
A.until B.that C.when D.where
解析：答案为C。本题考查分隔定语从句的关系词的选择。作好本题的关键是要能辨认出该定语从句的先行词the hours和关系词被介词短语to me所分隔。定语从句的先行词是表时间的名词hours, 并且关系词在从句中用作状语，故应选择表示时间的关系副词when。
2. ___________ is known to everybody, the noon travels around the earth once every month.(NMET 2001)
A.It B.As C.That D.What
解析：答案为B。本题考查as引导的非限制定语从句。as作“正如……”解时，引导的非限制性定语从句来修饰整个句子。当as在从句中作主语时，常用于下列短语：as is known、as is said、as is reported、as is announced等。要注意掌握作关系代词引导定语从句的用法。
3. After living in Pairs for fifty years he returned to the small town ___________ he grew up as a child.(NMET 1996)
A.which B.where C.that D.when
解析：答案为B。本题考查限制性定语从句中关系词的选择。定语从句的先行词是表示地点的名词短语the small town, 且关系词不作定语从句中的主语和宾语而作地点状语，因此定语从句必须用关系副词where引导。要注意分清先行词在从句中充当的成分，然后选择适当的关系词。
定语从句
1．I can still remember the sitting room my mother and I used to sit in the evening．
A．what B．which C．that D．where
2．The man was a friend of mine．
A．that you just talked to B．whom you just talked to him
C．who you just talked to him D．you just talked
3．1’ll never forget the place I visited ten years ago.
A．where B．that C．in which D．what
4． We all know，oil and water don’t mix up．
A．That B．What C．Which D．As
5．All is needed is a Supply of oil．
A．the thing B．that C．what D．which
6．Last night we went to Ann’s party， we enjoyed very much．
A．when B．that C．which D．where
7．There is a mountain the top is always covered with snow．
A．of that B．of which C．its D．that
8．This is the only dictionary he often turns to for help．
A．which B．that C．what D．one
9．I hope you will find this valley a beautiful place you may spend your weekend．
A．that B．w hich C．when D．where
lO．Football， is a very interesting game，is played all over the world．
A．that B．which C．it D．who
11． has already been pointed out，grammar is not a set of dead rules．
A．As B．It C．That D．Which
12．Alice received an invitation from her boss, came as a surprise．
A．it B．that C．which D．he
13． leaves the room last is asked to turn off the lights．
A．Anyone B．Who C．Everyone D．Whoever
14．The wolves hid themselves in the place couldn’t be found．
A．that B．where C．in which D．in that
15．We will be shown around and city；schools，museums，and some other places， other visitors seldom go．
A．what B．which C．where D．when
定语从句
1-5 DABDB 6-10 CBBDB 1l-15 ACDAC
情态动词
一、考点聚焦1、 情态动词的基本用法
(1)can、be able to 和could
①can和be able to都表示能力，意思上没多大区别。但can只有现在和过去时，而be able to则有更多的形式。但当成功地完成某一具体动作时，通常不用could而用was/were able to来表示。这时was/were able to 相当于managed to，表示经过一番努力，终于能够完成某事。如：
Can you use chopsticks?
The wounded man still was able to get to the village and was saved in the
end.
②can和could
can和could都可以表示能力、技能、许可、建议或请求和可能性。但比较委婉客气地提出问题或陈述看法，一般用could，回答时则用can。如：
Could you help me carry the bag?
Can I help you?
(2)may/might
①may/might表示可能，但may比might可能性大。如：-Why isn’t he in class?
He may be sick.(生病的可能性较大)
—
He might be sick.(生病的可能性较小)
②may/might表示“允许”，may用于现在时或将来时，might常用在间接引语中表过去时，但might也可用于现在时间，表示比较委婉的语气，回答用may。如：
He says we may leave.
He said we might leave.
③may / might 表示建议或请求，但might比may 更客气，意思更肯定而无过去时态的含义。
Yes, you can / may.
—May / Might I use your bike? —
No, you mustn’t
（3）must
①must表示必须，应该，没有时态变化。如：
You must do everything as I do.
②must表示肯定的推测。如：
The light is still on, so he must be at home.
③mustn’t 表示禁止做某事。如：
You mustn’t smoke in the office.
（4）have to
have to 表示“必须、不得不”，是由于某种外界（客观）原因而“必须”，“不得不”做某事，也可表示经常的或习惯性的事“必须”做。have to的否定形式表示不必。have to可用于多种时态中。如：
You will have to clean your own boots when you join the army.
I have to be at my office every evening.
（5）should / ought to
①should和ought to表示应当、应该，前者比后者语气轻。如：
You should / ought to work hard.
②should / ought to work hard.
Since she is not here, whe should / ought to be in the classroom.
③should / ought to的否定形式表示禁止之意。如：
Children shouldn’t smoke.
④should可表示陈述意见，推出建议或请求；而ought to可以表示劝告之意。如：
You ought to respect your parents.
He suggested that they should leave at once.
（6）will / would
①will 用于各种人称表示“意志”、“意愿”或“决心”等，否定式won’t + 动词。如：
I will tell you all about it.
Tom won’t do such a thing.
②will用于疑问句中，常用在第二称时表示说话人向对方提出“请求”或“询问”如：
Will you please tell her the news when you see her?
③will 表示习惯性的动作，有“总是”、“惯于”的含义。如：
Fish will die out of water.
④would 表示客气的请求、建议或意愿。如：
Would you please be quiet?
Would you like coffee?
⑤would 表示过去反复发生的动作。如：
When I passed my school I would see my teachers who taught me 5 years ago.
（7）need
need 作“必要”讲，既可作情态动词，也可作实义动词。作实义动词时后面的动词不定式要带to，其变化与一般动词相同。如：
I need to think it over.
—Need you go now? —Yes, I must./No, I needn’t
（8）dare
dare表示“敢”的意思。作为情态动词时，主要用在疑问句和否定句中。dare若作实义动词，后面可带to的不定式，此时to也可以省略。dare与need的用法相似。如：How dare you say that?
She doesn’t date(to)ask her father.
（9）used to
used to表示过去常常发生的动作或存在的习惯，但现在已不复存在了。如：
He used to smoke.
（10）shall
①shall作为情态动词用于第二、三人称，表示说话人的意愿，有“命令”、“警告、威胁、强制”和“允许”等意思。如：
We shall do as our teacher says.
You shall have the book as soon as I finish it.
②在疑问句中，shall用于征求对方的意见或请求指示，常用于第一、第三人称。如：
Where shall he wait for us?
Shall we go out for a walk?
2、情态动词表示推测或判断的用法
下表即是表示推测的情态动词使用的场合：
情态动词 对现在和未来的推测 对过去的推测 使 用 场 合
must must + 动词原形 must have done 肯定句
may / might may / might + 动词原形 May / might have done 肯定句、否定句
can /could can / could do Can / could have done 否定句、疑问名（could可用于肯定句）
should 用来表示一种估计的情况“按理会/估计会”should do/be should have done 肯定句、否定句、疑问句
例如：
It must have rained last night.
She may not be at home. = It is possible that she is not at home.
She can’t be at home. = It is impossible that she is at home.
They should be there right now.
3、情态动词在虚拟语气中的用法
情态动词用于虚拟语气中表示责备的感情色彩，用法如下：
（1）should have done表示“本来应该做某事而实际上未做”，而shouldn’t have done则表示“本不应该做某事而实际上做了”。如：
You should have told me about it earlier.
You shouldn’t have said such words to your parents.
（2）ought to have done也表示“本应该……”而ought not to have done则意为“本不应该……”。如：
You ought to have told me about it earlier.
You ought not to have said such words to your parents.
（3）needn’t have done表示“本无必要做某事而实际上做了”。如：
You needn’t have walked so quickly since time was enough.
（4）could have done表示“本来有可能……而事实上未做到”。如：
I could have come on time, but my car broke on the way.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. I was really anxious about you. You________home without a word.(NMET 2001)
A.mustn’t have B.shouldn’t have left
C.couldn’t have left D.needn’t have
解析：答案为B。本题考查的是情态动词在虚拟语气中的用法。题目给出的条件是“我确实非常担心你”，因此后面可知应是责备you不应该没说一句话就离开了。
2.—Are you coming to Jeff’s party?
—I’m not sure. I__________ go to the concert instead.(NMET 2000)
A.must B.would C.should D.might
解析：答案为D。本题考查情态动词的基本用法。由题目中“I’m not sure”,表明我可能去Jeff’s party，也可能去音乐会，故用might。
3. —Will you stay for lunch?
—Sorry, ____________. My brother is coming to see me.(NMET 99)
A.I mustn’t B.I can’t C.I needn’t D.I won’t
解析：答案为B。本题考查表示请求的英语口语，用will来向第二人称提问的疑问结构，是表示一种请求和意愿，是用疑问的形式来表达较为婉转的祈使语气，意思是“请你……，好吗”，对于这种问句的肯定回答是：Suree! Gertainly! Yes, of course. I’d be glad to 等；否定回答通常是：I’m sorry, I can’t. No, I’m afraid I can’t. I’m sorry, but … I’d like to, but …等。注意情态动词表客气的用法及其在一般疑问句中的问与答。
情态动词
1．I thought you 1ike somethjng to read，so I have brought you some books．
A．may B．might C．could D．must
2．There was plenty of time．She ． A．mustn’t have hurried B．couldn’t have hurried
C．must not hurry D．needn’t have hurried
3．The plant is dead．I it more water．
A．Will give B．would have given C．must give D．should have given
4．You return the book now．You can keep it till next week if you like．
A．can’t B．mustn’t C．needn’t D．may not
5．Tom ought not to me your secret，but he meant no harm．
A．have told B．tell C．be telling D．having told
6．He you more help，even though he was very busy．
A．might have given B．might give C．may have given D．may give
7．He at the meeting this morning．He was in hospital at the time．
A．couldn’t have spoken B．mustn’t have spoken
C．shouldn’t have spoken D．needn’t have spoken
8．He must be in the classroom， he?
A．mustn’t B．can’t C．isn’t D．can
9．—You were driving at 100 km an hour，sir．
—But officer，I ．My car can’t go more than 80．
A．may not have been B．couldn’t have been
C．wouldn’t have been D．needn’t have been
10．—Did you visit the famous museum?
—No．We it，but we spent too much time shopping．
A．could have visited B．must have viste
C．can’t have visited D．shouldn’t have visited
11．—When can I come for the photos? I need them tomorrow afternoon．
—They be ready by 12：00．
A．can B．should C．might D．need
12．You to the meeting this afternoon if you have something important to do．
A．needn’t to come B．don’t need come
C．don’t need coming D．needn’t come
13．Put on more clothes．You be feeling cold with only a shirt on．
A．can B．could C．would D．must
14．—There were already five people in the car but they managed to take me as well．
—It a comfortable journey．
A．can’t be B．shouldn’t be C．mustn’t have been D．couldn’t have been
15．I think all drivers seat belts．
A．should wear B．had better wear C．can wear D．have to wear
16．—Don’t forget to come to my birthday party tomorrow．
— .
A．I don’t B．1 won’t C．I can’t D．I haven’t
17．I to1d Sally how to get here，but perhaps I it out for her．
A．had to write B．must have written C．should have written D．ought to write
18．Peter come with us tonight，but he isn’t very sure yet.
A．must B．may C．can D．will
19．A computer think for itself；it must be told what to do．
A．can’t B．couldn’t C．need D．would
20．Jenny have kept her word．I wonder why she changed her mind．
A．must B．should C．need D．would
21．——Could I borrow your dictionary? Yes，of course you ．
A．might B．will C．can D．should
22．—I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter．
—It true because there was 1ittle snow there．
A．may not be B．won’t be C．couldn’t be D．mustn’t be
情态动词
1-5 BDDCA 6-10 AACBA 11-15 BDDDA 16-20 BCBAB 21-22 CC
非谓语动词
一、考点聚焦1、非谓语动词的句法功能
名称 语 法 功 能
主语 宾语 宾语补足语 表语 定语 状语
不定式 √ √ √ √ √ √
动名词 √ √ √ √
现在分词 √ √ √ √
过去分词 √ √ √ √
2、动词不定式复心中应注意的几个问题
（1）不定式作表语与“be + to do sth.”的异同。不定式作表语说明主语的内容或性质。
His job is to guard.(说明内容)
be + to do sth.(表示按计划要做的事)
（2）带不定式作宾语的词语。
下列词语常不定式作宾语：afford、promise、refuse、expect、hope、learn、offer、wish、want、fail、plan、agree、forget、like、prefer、decide、manage、try、arrange、determine、desire等。
下列动词后可接疑问词+不定式：teach、decide、wonder、show、learn、forget、ask、find、out、advise、discuss等。
（3）如何理解和使用不定式作宾补。
①动词see、watch、notice、hear、listen to、observe、feel、taste、smell、make、let、have等的宾补用动词原形，变被动时要加to,此时的不定式就是主语补足语。
②常用带不定式作宾补的几种情况：
主语 + ask / require / tell / order / force / get / want / like + sb.to do sth.③主语 + think / judge / suppose / believe / consider /imagine/
consider / feel + sb. + to be/ to have done
④主语 + call on / upon / depend on / wait for / ask for + sb.+ to do sth.
（4）不定式作定语的特殊用法。
①下列词语后常接不定式作定语：chance、wish、right、courage、need、promise、time、opportunity、way、the first、the second、the last、the only等。
②不定式作定语和所修饰的名词在逻辑上有主谓关系。
There is no one to look after her.
③不定式与被修饰的名词在逻辑上有动宾关系。
She is now looking for a room to live in.
（5）不定式作状语的用法。
不定式作状语，修饰动词，在句中表示行为目的、结果、原因。only to do表示出人意料的结果。
We hurried to the classroom only to find none there .
in order(not)to,so as(not)to用来引导目的状语,enough,too, so… as to do, such + 名词… as to do作结果状语，如:The girl was so kind as to help the old man off the bus.
I’m not such a fool as to believe that.
（6）不定式的完成时的特殊用法。
①表示不定式中谓语动词发生的动作先于主句的谓语动词发出的动作。
The novel was said to have been published.
I regret to have been with you for so many years.
seem、appear、be said、be supposed、be believed、be thought、be known、be reported等动词常用于上面句型。
此外，glad、happy、satisfied、sorry、surprised、disappointed后也接完成时，但要注意与一般时的区别。
I’m sorry to keep you waiting for a minute.对不起，请稍等。（说话时还未等）
I’m sorry to have kept you waiting.对不起，让你久等了。（说话时已等了很久）
②不定式的完成时还可表示“过去本想做某事但未做”的虚拟语气。（A）should like to / would like to / would love to + 不定式的完成时。（B）was / were to + 不定式的完成时，表示该做某事或想做但未实现。（C）expect / hope / mean / promise / suppose / think / want/ wish + 不定式完成时，表示过去未曾实现的愿望。
（7）不定式的省略。
①同一结构并列由and或or连接。
I want to finish my homework and go home.
I’m really puzzled what to think or say.
特例：To be or not to be,this is a question.
He is better to laugh than to cry.(表示对比)
②不定式作表语，其前面的主语从句中含有do时，后面的to省略。
What he did was lose the game. ③句中含有动词do时，but、except、besides、such as等后面to可省略。即“前有do,后省to”。
Don’t do anything silly, such as marry him.
④主句含有不定式，后面有rather than, rather than后省to。
⑤Why not、had better、would rather、can’t but等词后省to。如：
He could not but walk home.
（8）不定式的替代。
多用在同一句或联系紧密的对话中，为了避免重复，作宾语或主补，宾补的不定式再次出现时，to后的内容常承前省略（只保留to即可）。但如果承前省略的不定式有助动用的have或be任何形式，后应该保留原形be或have。如：
Susan is not what she used to be.
—You came late last night. You ought to have finished your
homework.
—I know I ought to have.
常见的有：I’d like / love / be happy to.
3、动名词复习中应注意的几个问题
（1）动名词作宾语。
①下列动词后只能接动名词：suggest, finish, avoid, stop, can’t help, mind, enjoy, require, practise, miss, escape, pardon, advise, consider, imagine, keep, appreciate, eacape, permit。
②下列动词短语接动名词：leave off, put off, give up, look forward to, feel like, have trouble / difficulty(in) doing sth. devote to, get used to, pay attention to, be fond of, be worth。
③介词后要接动名词。what about、how about、without、be fond of、be good at等介词后接动名词。注意on / upon doing sth. = as soon as 引导的从中。作此意讲时on / upon后也可以接名词。如on his arrival…。
④动名词作宾语和动词不定式作宾语的区别：
begin, start, continue, like, love, dislike, hate, prefer, can’t stand
例 句 解 析
1. It began to rain. It began raining.
2. It was beginning to snow.
3. I love lying (to lie)on my back.
4. I like listening to music, but today I don’t like to.
5. I don’ t prefer to swim in the river now.
1. 意思无差别，但谓语动词用进行时，后面只跟不定式。
2. 表示一种倾向多接动名词作宾语，如果表示某一特定的或具体的行动，多接不定式。
remember, forget, regret, try
例 句 解 析
1. I remember to meet her at the station.
I remember seeing her once somewhere.
2. I forgot giving it to you yesterday.
I forgot to tell you about it. Now here it is.
3. I regret not having working hard.
I regret to hear of your sister’s death.
4. Try knocking at the back door.
We must try to get everything ready.
5. That will mean flooding some land.
I had meant to go on Monday. 1. remember to do sth.记住要做的事
remember doing sth.回顾过去发生的事
2. forget to do sth.忘记要做的事
forget doing sth.忘记做过的事
3. regret to do sth.对将要做的事抱歉
regret doing sth.对发生过的事后悔
4. try to do sth.设法……，试图
try doing sth.试试看，试一试
5. mean to do sth.打算做……，想要
mean doing sth.意味着，就是
want, require, need
例 句 解 析
These desks need repairing.
These desks need to be repaired.
The patient required examined
The patient required to be examined. 1. need doing 需要被做
need to be done需要被做
2. want doing
want to be done
3. require doing
require to be done
4、分词复习应注意的几个问题
（1）现在分词在句中作时间、原因、伴随、条件、结果等状语。
①时间状语（分词作状语前面可加when, while等）
Hearing the good news, he jumped with greatjoy.
Not having finished her work in time, the boss fired her.
②原因状语
Seeing nobody at home, he decided to leave them a note
③伴随状语
The girls came in, following their parents. ④结果状语
The poor old man died, leaving nothing to his children.
注意：现在分词作状语的几个特性。①时间性。与谓语动词同时发生，用一般时，如发生在谓语动作之前时则用完成式having done。②语态性。与句子的主语之间的关系，是主谓关系或动宾关系。遵循的规则“主动进行，被动完成”。③人称一致性。分词的逻辑主语就是句子的主语。
（2）分词作表语。
S. + be + 动词-ed表示被动，主语是人；S. + be + 动词-ing表示主动，主语是物。分词作宾补不定式作宾补的区别：
感官动词 动词原形→做了某事
S．+ + 宾语 + 现在分词→正在做某事
使役动词 过去分词→做了或被做
5、复习过去分词应注意的几个问题
过去分词作状语，相当于一个状语从句，有来说明原因、时间、条件等。
（1）过去分词作原因状语
Tired by the trip, he soon feel asleep.
= Because he was tired by the trip, he soon fell asleep.
Lost in thought , he almost ran into a car.
=As he was lost in thought, he almost ran into a car.
（2）作时间状语
Seen from the hill, the city looks like a garden.
=When the city is seen from the hill, it looks like a garden.
（3）作条件状语
Given more time, I would have worked out the problem.
=If I have been given more time, I would have worked out the problem.
（4）伴随状语
The teacher came in, followed by some students.
=The teacher came in and was followed by some students.
分词短语作状语时，通常与主句中的主语在逻辑上一致，但有时它也可以有自己独立的逻辑上的主语，这种结构称为独立主格结构。如：
Her grandfather being ill, she had to stay at home looking after him.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. __________such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.(NMET 2001)
A.Having suffered B.Suffering C.To suffer D.Suffered
解析：答案为A。本题考查分词短语作状语的用法。分词作状语，其逻辑主语必须是句子的主语，而本句的主语看似是it,其实它为形式主语，真正的主语为不定式，而不定式省略了逻辑主语for people，所以应用现在分词，又因already，应用完成时。
2. One learns a language by making mistakes and _______ them.(2001年春季高考)
A.correct B.correcting C.corrects D.to correct
解析：答案为B。本题考查动名词作介词宾语的用法。介词by意为“通过……，凭……”，后面常接动名词，形成“by+ v. –ing ”结构，表示通过做某事而得到某种结果。本题中只有correcting符合。
3. The picture _________ on the wall is painted by my nephew.(2000年春季高考)
A.having hung B.hanging C.hangs D.being hung
解析：答案为B。本题考查现在分词作定语的用法。根据句意“墙上挂的那幅画是我侄子画的”，可知空白处所填的动词形式在句中作定语，表说话时仍在进行的动作或所处的解题关键在于分析picture与hang之间的逻辑关系。
非谓语动词与动词辨析
1．—I’d like to buy an expensive sports car．
—Well，Mike，we have got several models ．
A．to be chosen from B．to choose C．to choose from D．for choosing
2．In the busiest season the farmers are seen their tractors from morning till night．
A．to have；working B．have；work C．have；working D．had；worked
3． the meeting room，he found all the parents a1ready there．
A．To enter；sitting B．Stepping into；to seat
C．Entered；seat D．Entering；seated
4．I spoke to my friend in a very 1ow voice by anybody else．
A．so as not to be heard B．so as to not to hear
C．so not to hear D．so as to not be heard
5．Did you notice anyone my room just now?
A．enter into；Nobody B．entering；None
C．to enter；None D．enter．N0 one
6．The boy pretended when his mother entered．
A．reading B．to read C．to be reading D．being read
7．When medicine，please follow these instructions carefully．
A．to take B．taking C．taken D．he takes
8．The classroom is so dirty that it needs badly．
A．clean B．to clean C．being cleaned D．cleaning
9．This is one of the experiments in our laboratory.
A．being made B．making C．to make D．having make
10．Do you remember me somewhere before?
A．to meet B．met C．meeting D．meet
11． more time，the job can be done better．
A．Given B．Giving C．To give D．To be given
12．The meeting this evening is of great importance．
A．holding B．held C．to hold D．to be held
13．In spite of his broken English，he can make himself
A．understood B．understanding C．understand D．to understand
14．The speech was very ，and we were to tears．
A．moved；moved B．moving；moving C．moving；moved D．moved；moving
15．Charles Babbage is generally considered the first computer．
A．to invent B．inventing C．having invented D．to have invented
16． ，I went to the railway station to see my friend off．
A．After eating quickly my dinner B．After my qujckly eating dinner
C．After eating my dinner quickly D．After eating my quickly dinner
l7．Mr Smlith wanted his daughter after drinking．
A．never to drive B．to never drive C．never driving D．never drive
18．My son isn’t feeling well，so I’ll get him in the hospital．
A．examined B．examining C．to examine D．examine
19．The secretary worked late into the night， a long speech for the president．
A．to prepare B．preparing C．prepared D．was prepared
20．I can hardly imagine Peter across the Atlantic 0cean in five days．
A．sail B．to sail C．sailing D．to have sailed
21．—How do you deal with the disagreement between the company and the customers?
—The key the problem is to meet the demand by the customers．
A．to solving；making B．to solving；made C．to solve；making D．to solve；made
22．John was made the truck for a week as a punishment．
A．to wash B．washing C．wash D．to be washing
23．Little Jim should love to the theatre this evening．
A．to be taken B．to take C．being taken D．taking
24．—I usually go there by train．
—Why not by boat for a change?
A．to try going B．trying to go C．to try and go D．try going
25．I would appreciate back this afternoon．
A．you to call B．you call C．your calling D．you’re calling
26． a reply，he decided to write again．
A．Not receiving B．Receiving not C．Not having received D．Having not received
27．“Can’t you read?”Mary said to the notice．
A． angri1y pointing B．and point angrily
C．angrily pointed D．and angrily pointing
28．How about the two of us a walk down the garden?
A．to take B．take C．taking D．to be taking
29．The computer centre， last year，is very popular among the students in this schoo1．
A．open B．opening C．having opened D．opened
30．The man on now is my brother．
A．to be operated B．being operated C．operated D．been operated
31．The visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with his talks， that he had enjoyed his stay here．
A．having added B．to add C．adding D．added
32．The first textbooks for teaching English as a foreign 1anguage came out in the
16th centry．
A．have written B．to be written C．being written D．written
33．Let the work as soon as possible．
A．was done B．be done C．to be done D．is done
34．The 0lympic Games， in 776 B．C，did not include women players until 1912．
A．first played B．to be first played
C．first playing D．to be first playing
35．When I got back home I saw a message pinned to the door， “Sorry to miss you；will call later．”
A．read B．reads C．to read D．reading
36．I’ve worked with children before．so I know what in my new job．
A．expected B．to expect C．to be expecting D．expects
37．The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see the next year．
A．carry out B．carrying out C．carried out D．to carrv out
38．Do you know such problems?
A．how to deal with B．what to deal with C．how to do with D．to do with
39 The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the ．
A．20 dollars remained B．20 dollars to remain
C．remained 20 dollars D．remaining 20 dollars
40．He spent me an E-mail， to get further information．
A．hoped B．hoping C．to hope D．hope
41．It is said in Australia there is more land than the government knows ．
A．it what to do with B．what to do it with
C．what to do with it D．to do what with it
42．Be careful when you cross this very busy street．If not，you may run over by a car．
A．have B．get C．become D．turn
43．We thought of selling this old furniture，but we’ve decided to it．It might be valuable．
A．hold on to B．keep up with C．turn to D．1ook after
44．—Mummy，can I put the peaches in the cupboard?
—No，dear．They don’t well．Put them in the bridge．instead．
A．keep B．fit C．get D．last
45．His mother had thought it would be good for his character to from home and earn some money on his own．
A．run away B．take away C．keep away D．get away
非谓语动词与动词辨析
l-5 CADAD 6-10 CBDAC 11-15 ADACD 16-20 CAABC 21-25 DAADC 26-30 CACDB
31-35 CDBAD 36-40 BCADB 41-45 CBADC
反意疑问句
反意疑问句是英语四大问句之一，它是由一个陈述句加上一个短问句而构成的。反意疑问句的基本构成形式是：陈述句+动词（肯定或否定）+主语？如：①She often has lunch at school, doesn’t she? ②You don’t like sports, do you?
使用反意疑问句要注意以下若干对应规则：
一、 反意疑问句中问句部分的动词与陈述部分的动词在语气上成相反的对应关系，即：
肯定+否定？ 否定+肯定？如：
①You can’t do it, can you? ②They are very late for the meeting, aren’t they?
二、 反意疑问句中问句部分的动词与陈述部分的动词种类要对应一致。如：
①He has supper at home every day, doesn’t he? （不能用hasn’t he?）
②They have known the matter, haven’t they? （不能用don’t they?）
三、 反意疑问句中问句部分的动词在时态上应和陈述部分的时态一致。如：
①They will go to town soon, won’t they?（不能用don’t they?或 aren’t they?）
②He works very hard, doesn’t he?（不能用didn’t he?或won’t he?）
四、 反意疑问句的陈述部分含有由un-, im-, in-, dis-, 等否定意义的前缀构成的词语时，陈述部分要视为肯定含义，问句部分用否定形式。如：
①Your father is unhappy, isn’t he?（不能用is he?）
②The man is dishonest, isn’t he? （不能用is he?）
③It is impossible to learn English without remembering more words, isn’t it?（不能用is it ?）
五、反意疑问句的陈述部分带有little, few, never, hardly, seldom等否定意义的词时，问句部分用肯定式。如：
①She never tells a lie, does she?（不用doesn’t she?）
②He was seldom late, was he?（不用wasn’t he?）
六、反意疑问句的陈述部分为I am……时，问句部分习惯上用aren’t I？表示。如：
I am a very honest man, aren’t I?
七、反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We) think(believe, suppose, consider) + that从句时，问句部分的动词及主语与that从句内的动词和主语保持一致。如：
①I think that he has done his best, hasn’t he?
②We think that English is very useful, isn’t it? （不用don’t we?）
八、反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We) don’t think(believe, suppose, consider)+ that从句时，从句为否定意义，问句部分的动词和主语仍与that从句保持一致且用肯定式。如：
①I don’t think that you can do it, can you? （不用do I?）
②We don’t believe that the news is true, is it? （不用do we?）
九、反意疑问句的陈述部分为非第一人称主语+ think(believe, suppose, consider) + that从句时，问句部分的动词和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：
①They all think that English is very important, don’t they? （不用isn’t it?）
②He didn’t think that the news was true, did he? （不用wasn’t/ was it?）
十、反意疑问句的陈述部分为主语+said( told, reported, asked……) + that从句时，问句部分的动词和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：
①They said that you had finished your work, didn’t they? （不用hadn’t you）
②Kate told you that she would go there, didn’t she? （不用wouldn’t she?）
十一、陈述部分的主语为不定代词something, anything, nothing, everything时，问句部分的主语用it。如：
①Something is wrong with the computer, isn’t it?②Nothing has happened to them, has it?
十二、陈述部分的主语为不定代词somebody(someone), anybody(anyone), nobody(no one), everybody(everyone)时，问句部分的主语用he或 they，这时问句动词的数应和he或 they一致。如：
①Someone has taken the seat, hasn’t he?②Everyone has done their best in the game, haven’t they?
十三、陈述部分为Let me……时，问句部分习惯上用shall I? 或will you?形式。如： Let me have a try, shall I?(will you?)
十四、陈述部分为Let us……时，问句部分习惯上用will you?形式。如：
Let us stop to rest, will you?
十五、陈述部分为Let’s……时，问句部分习惯上用shall we?形式。如：
Let’s go home together, shall we?
十六、陈述部分用上述情况以外的祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式表示请求，用won’t you？形式表示委婉请求或邀请。如：
①Do sit down, won’t you?/ will you? ②You feed the bird today, will you?
③Please open the window, will you?(won’t you?)
十七、陈述部分为否定祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式。如：
Don’t make any noise, will you?
十八、陈述部分为There (Here) + be + 主语时，问句部分用动词+there(here)?形式。如：
①There are two cakes on the plate, aren’t there? ②Here is a story about Mark Twain, isn’t here?
十九、陈述部分用had better +原形动词表示建议时，问句部分用hadn’t +主语？形式。
①You’d better tell him about the matter, hadn’t you?②We had better do it by ourselves, hadn’t we?
二十、陈述部分用used to +主语时，问句部分用didn’t + 主语？或usedn’t +主语？形式。
①He used to live in the country, didn’t he?/usedn’t he?
②They used to be good friends, didn’t they?/usedn’t they?
二十一、陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed表示推测时，若句中带有明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词用过去时形式。如：
①He might have forgotten his pen in the classroom yesterday, didn’t he?
（不用mightn’t he?/ hasn’t he?）
②You must have got up late this morning, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/haven’t you?）
二十二、陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed表示推测时，若句中没有带明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词用现在完成时形式。如：
①Everyone must have known the death of the waitress, haven’t they? （不用mustn’t they?）
②You must have worked there a year ago, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/ haven’t you?）
二十三、陈述部分的主语为从句时，问句部分的主语一般用it代替，如：
①What he said is true, isn't it? （不用didn’t he?）
②Where we will build the dam has not been decided yet, has it? （不用won’t we?）
二十四、陈述部分的主语为动名词或不定式时，问句的主语用it代替。如：
①To do one good deed is easy for a person, isn't it?②Skating is your favorite sport, isn't it?
反意疑问句专题练习
1.I think they will go to town tomorrow, ________?
A.do I B.don’t I C.will they D.won’t they
2.I don’t believe he can catch up with me, _________?
A.can he B.can’t he C.do I D.don’t I
3.I’m sure that I will be well again, __________?
A.am I B.aren’t I C.will I D.won’t I
4.I am afraid that he will not come, _______? A.am I B.aren’t I C.will he D.won’t he
5.They don’t believe you are wrong, _________?
A.are you B.aren’t you C.do they D.don’t they
6.He thought you were Beijing, _________?
A.didn’t he B.did he C.weren’t you D.were you
7.We told you that he would come tonight, _______?
A.didn’t we B.did we C.would he D.wouldn’t he
8.The reporter said the news was not true, _________?
A.wasn’t it B.didn’t he C.did he D.was it
9.They suggested that he should go to work at once, ________?
A.did they B.didn’t they C.should he D.shouldn’t he
10.Your brother has lunch at home, _________-?
A.hasn’t he B.doesn’t he C.has he D.does he
11.John has to get up early, ________? A.has he B.hasn’t he C.does he D.doesn’t he
12.She has got to get everything ready, _________? A.hasn’t she B.has she C.doesn’t she D.does she
13.She has never been to China, _________?A.has she B.hasn’t she C.doesn’t she D.does she
14.She had better tell you the news right now, _______?
A.had she B.hadn’t she C.did she D.didn’t she
15.They would rather not have done that last week,________?
A.would they B.wouldn’t they C.have they D.haven’t they
16.I’d rather stay here for a rest, ________?A.did I B.would I C.didn’t I D.wouldn’t I
17.You ought to do it again,_________?A.ought you B.oughtn’t you C.do you D.don’t you
18.You must do that again,_________?A.mustn’t you B.needn’t you C.do you D.don’t you
19.He must wait here, __________?A.mustn’t he B.doesn’t he C.shouldn’t he D.does he
20.He must be a good worker,________?A.mustn’t he B.needn’t he C.isn’t he D.doesn’t he
21.He must have been to China twice,_________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
22.He must have been ill last week,__________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
23.He must have known you during the war,__________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
24.He must have known the result already,_________?
A.hasn’t he B.didn’t he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
25.There used to be a temple here,________?
A.didn’t there B.did there C.used there D.was there
26.They used to be good friends,________?
A.usedn’t they B.didn’t they C.used they D.both A and B
27.Mother usedn’t to dress the baby,______?
A.didn’t she B.did she C.used she D.usedn’t she
28.The students used to go to see him,_______?
A.usedn’t they B.didn’t they C.used they D.both A and B
29.Alice, you have a little more chicken,________?
A.haven’t you B.don’t you C.will you D.do you
30.Hi! Alice, you have bought a little chicken,_________?
A.haven’t you B.won’t you C.will you D.have you
31.You two had breakfast just now,__________?
A.hadn’t you B.didn’t you C.had you D.did you
32.You two had finished the breakfast,_________?
A.hadn’t you B.didn’t you C.did you D.had you
33.Neither you nor I was invited to the party,________?
A.were we B.weren’t we C.was I D.were you
34.Either he or she is to clean the window,__________?
A.are they B.aren’t they C.isn’t he D.isn’t she
35.It is Jiao Yulu who turned Lankao into a rich district,_______?
A.is it B.isn’t it C.did he D.didn’t he
36.It was you who never made such mistakes,________?
A.wasn’t it B.weren’t you C.did you D.didn’t you
37.The little child dared not climb the tree,________?
A.dared he B.did he C.was he D.does he
38.What he said is not wrong,__________? A.didn’t he B.did he C.is it D.isn’t it
39.That his parents were ill made him a little worried,_________?
A.weren’t they B.were they C.didn’t it D.wasn’t it
40.He dislikes what you have said,__________?A.does he B.doesn’t he C.have you D.haven’t you
41.(2003Shanghai spring)If you want help—money or anything,let me know,____you?
A.don’t B.will C.shall D.do
42.(2002Shanghai)Mrs. Black doesn’t believe her son is able to design a digital cameral,____?
A.is he B.isn’t he C.doesn’t she D.does she
43.(2002Shanghai spring)Brian told you that there wasn’t anyone in the room at that time,___?
A.was there B.wasn’t there C.didn’t he D.did he
44.(2001Shanghai)I don’t suppose anyone will volunteer,_____?
A.do I B.don’t I C.will they D.won’t they
45.(2000Shanghai)The news that they fialed their driving test discouraged him,___?
A.did they B.didn’t they C.did it D.didn’t it
46.(NMET99)—Alice,you feed the bird today,____? --But I fed it yesterday.
A.do you B.will you C.didn’t you D.don’t you
高考高中化学有机化学复习专题
急找《大学英语三、四、六级重点语法讲与练》！！！！！！！！！！！！！
哪有高考试卷和高考复习专题的网站
高三历史专题复习怎样才能应对高考？
你能在网上找到《大学英语三、四、六级重点语法讲与练》？急用！！
哪有高三专题复习教案
中考数学专题复习
谁能帮我找到《 大学英语三、四、六级重点语法讲与练》这本书。张鹏主编. - 天津: 天津大学出版社 RMB19.0
怎样找到“高考语文专题辅导与训练 ”
2007高考总复习直击考点100练
高考世界地理专题
高考数学专题
高考复习
高考复习
高考复习
高考复习
like语法集中讲!!
我现在进入了高三的全面复习阶段，哪位仁兄帮我查查高考专题复习的资料，十分感谢！！！
怎样购买<教材解读与优化讲练>
初三语法复习的网站
初三政治的专题复习提纲
2006年时政中考专题复习
请问哪里有高中生物会考专题复习？
《与名师对话》高考总复习 语文 答案